Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual

Technical Publication
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
HF Series Generators
Pre-Installation
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
JUL 15, 2002
First edition
SEP 20, 2003
kW corrections for SHF-5xx model
FEB 17, 2004
New equipments
SEP 15, 2005
Revision of environmental and electrical requirements
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer.
The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their
application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT

IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT

HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR
DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or

avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment
or data.
Note
PI-1005R3
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent

information that is important to know but which do not necessarily
relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
Pre-Installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Responsibility of Purchaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRE-INSTALLATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.1
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.3
Line Powered Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
3.4
Line Powered Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
3.5
Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.6
Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.7
Battery Powered generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
3.8
Battery Powered Ggenerators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
3.9
Interconnection and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
3.10 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
PI-1005R3
ii
Pre-Installation
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This Pre-Installation document provides the information and data needed to
plan and qualify the customer site prior to equipment delivery and installation.
This document considers only the Generator and its associated components.
Product information, environmental and electrical requirements are specified.
For system-related requirements, such as room layout, and system
interconnections, refer to documentation provided with other subsystems.
1.1
RESPONSIBILITY OF PURCHASER
Site planning and preparation are the responsibilities of the purchaser. The
following points should be considered fundamental to the customers
Pre-Installation activities; addition work may be needed depending on specific
site circumstances:
Note
PI-1005R3
Install required material prior the delivery of the system components.
Complete room floor, ceiling and wall finish.
Install conduit, duct, and raceway.
Install proper size junction boxes with covers at locations specified in the
installation plan.
Install mains power of proper voltage output and adequate kVA rating.
Install all safety devices according to this document and Local Codes.
Provide current room dimensions, including hall way and entry door
sizes.
Complete and proper Pre-Installation will avoid delays and

confusion.
Pre-Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
SECTION 2
PRE-INSTALLATION DATA
This section provides product information and illustrations showing physical
dimensions, weight, mounting holes and normal access areas for cabling and
service. (Refer to Illustration 2-1.)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
COMPONENT
DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT
Length
Width
Height
Vertical Generator Cabinet

with LF-RAC (LSS) or DRAC (HSS)
506 mm
468 mm
1101 mm
148 kg
Compact Generator Cabinet

(for only 1 Tube (LSS))
445 mm
360 mm
568 mm
72 kg

(for 1 or 2 Tubes (LSS or HSS))
592 mm
360 mm
690 mm
95 kg
500 mm
360 mm
790 mm
108 kg
Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

with Batteries Module
813 mm
436 mm
948 mm
235 kg
Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

with Batteries Module (17 A/h batteries)
813 mm
436 mm
1223 mm
372 kg
LINE POWERED GENERATORS
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS

with Capacitors Module
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIMENSIONS
COMPONENT
WEIGHT
Length
Width
Height
w/o Pedestal
433 mm
298 mm
123 mm
8 kg
with Pedestal
433 mm
298 mm
1023 mm
22 kg
w/o Pedestal
554 mm
360 mm
124 mm
12 kg
with Pedestal
554 mm
360 mm
1010 mm
35 kg
with Handswitch support
545 mm
290 mm
50 mm
6 kg
w/o Handswitch support
430 mm
290 mm
50 mm
6 kg
with Handswitch support
468 mm
290 mm
114 mm
8 kg
w/o Handswitch support
360 mm
290 mm
114 mm
8 kg
298 mm
236 mm
930 mm
10 kg
STANDARD CONTROL CONSOLES

RAD Control Consoles
R&F Control Consoles
RAD Console Graphic Display
Touch Screen Console

(TPC 10 or 12)
Optional Pedestal for

RAD Console Graphic Display or Touch Screen Console
Note.-- Dimensions for no-standard Consoles are not indicated in this document.
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE AND PC UNIT

Touch Screen Console
400 mm
200 mm
400 mm
5 kg
PC Unit
480 mm
200 mm
400 mm
15 kg
PC Interface Box
130 mm
140 mm
46 mm
0.6 kg
Note.-- Specifications of Touch Screen Consoles and PC Units subject to change without notice.
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
METHOD OF MOUNTING
COMPONENT
Note:
NORMAL METHOD OF MOUNTING
Generator Cabinet
Floor freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to floor with

four M10 (3/8) bolts.
Control Consoles
Desk freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to an optional pedestal.
Anchoring hardware should be field supplied. For seismic areas all components must be anchored,
Local Standards should be applied.
MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FREE AREA FOR SERVICE ACCESS

COMPONENT
SURFACE
Left Side
Right Side
Front
Rear
Top
Bottom
Generator Cabinet
50 cm
(20)
50 cm
(20)
100 cm
(40)
-(see note)
Completely
free
--
Control Consoles
10 cm
(4)
10 cm
(4)
Completely
free
10 cm
(4)
Completely
free
--
Note: Ventilation conditions requires to keep a minimum free distance of 15 cm (6) from both lateral sides of the Generator
Cabinet and also the same distance from the rear side when the Generator is provided with High Speed Starter (fans for the
starter module).
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1
Generators
568
Cable Access
COMPACT
GENERATOR
(For only 1 Tube)
445
57
57
83
427.5
57
57
67
67.5
80
44
67
Generator
702
Wall Support
206
200
150
28
150
33
40
251
435
Floor Support
110
422
224
Wall and Floor Supports are options
40
19
315
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

Generators
690
Cable Access
COMPACT
GENERATOR
(For 1 or 2 Tubes)
592
57
57
57
57
427.5
57
57
57
57
68
67.5
827
Generator
280
250
Wall Support
200
28
40
40 44
68
150
33 40
336
580
Floor Support
105
422
234
Wall and Floor Supports are options
40
19
462
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation

Generators
CAPACITORS
GENERATOR
Cable Access
790
1101
VERTICAL
GENERATOR
Cable Access
Cable Access
948
1223
Cable Access
COMPACT-ESM
GENERATOR
COMPACT-ESM
GENERATOR
(with Batteries 17 A/h)
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation

Consoles
1010
124
R&F CONSOLE
PEDESTAL (optional)
RAD CONSOLE
Mounting Holes 8
1023
123
Cable Access
PEDESTAL (optional)
Mounting Holes 8
Cable Access
400
45
400
Cable Access
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE

FOR PC
PI-1005R3
PC UNIT
PC INTERFACE BOX
Pre-Installation

Consoles
TABLE SUPPORT
RAD CONSOLES -- GRAPHIC DISPLAY
WALL SUPPORT
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES (TPC)
PEDESTAL
THESE CONSOLES CAN BE MOUNTED ON A TABLE SUPPORT, WALL SUPPORT OR PEDESTAL
10
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
SECTION 3
3.1
ROOM REQUIREMENTS
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
LINE POWERED GENERATORS /
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS
Storage / Transport
Environmental Conditions
Temperature range of --40oC to 70oC

Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100%
Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa
Temperature range of --20oC to 40oC

Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100%
Operating
Environmental Conditions
Temperature range of 10oC to 40oC

(Battery Powered Generators: for a longer life cycle of batteries it is recommended a temperature around 22 oC)
Relative Humidity (no condensing) range of 30% to 75%
Heat Output
In normal environmental circumstances the maximum heat output of the equipment can reach:
-- for Line Powered Generators 0.16 kW (544 btu/hr)
-- for Capacitor Assisted Generators 0.20 kW (682 btu/hr)
-- for Battery Powered Generators 0.26 kW (890 btu/hr).
Components must not be allowed to overheat.
Overheating of components can cause system malfunction.
3.2
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
This Generator contains advanced circuitry which will maintain the selected
X-ray techniques during adverse line conditions. However, there is a limit to the
Generators ability to correct for inadequate line power.
To ensure proper operation:
Do not under size the Distribution Transformer (Line Powered

Generators). It is recommended that the secondary of Distribution
Transformer has a Star configuration.
Size feeder and ground wires per this document.
Ensure and maintain input mains voltage to specification. Ensure that

the ground resistance is lower than 10 .
The power requirements given here (wire sizes, etc.) are the recommended
specification. With the exception of high current carrying conductors and
grounds, low voltage connections are made with preterminated wires.
The installation should comply with all the electrical

requirements indicated in this document. These
requirements should be upgraded if Local Standards were
more stringent.
PI-1005R3
11
Pre-Installation
3.3
LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS

Operation:
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-310
SHF-315
SHF-320
Max. Power kW
32 kW
Maximum mA
400 mA
SHF-325
SHF-330
SHF-335
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
C/D
C/D
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-410
SHF-415
SHF-420
SHF-425
SHF-430
SHF-435
Max. Power kW
40 kW
Maximum mA
500 mA
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
C/D
C/D
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-510
SHF-515
SHF-520
SHF-525
SHF-530
SHF-535
Maximum Power kW
50 kW
Maximum mA
640 mA (or 630 mA under special order)
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
C/D
C/D
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-630
SHF-635
SHF-835
Maximum Power kW
64 kW (or 65 kW under special order)
80 kW
Maximum mA
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
C/D
C/D
D (or E for 1000 mA)
POWER LINE
A
230 / 240 VAC,

Single-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
230 / 240 VAC,

Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
400 / 415 / 440 VAC,

480 VAC,
530 VAC,
Line voltage automatic compensation: 10%.

Maximum line regulation for maximum kVA demand: 5%.
NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
-- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate
the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).
12
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
RMS line current during a X-ray exposure, minimum line power required,
Generator stand-by consumption (W), the differential sensitivity (mA)
and the thermomagnetic breaker should be:
SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS
LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
208 VAC *
192 A
240 A
300 A
230 VAC
174 A
217 A
272 A
240 VAC
167 A
208 A
260 A
Minimum kVA required
Maximum kW x 1.25
Stand-by Consumption
500 W
Differential Sensitivity
(Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)
30 mA
Differential, Thermomagnetic
(Fuses) and Contactor
50% of the RMS line current

(RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)
NOTE:
-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
LINE VOLTAGE
THREE-PHASES GENERATORS
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
64 kW (or 65 kW)
80 kW *
208 VAC *
111 A
138 A
173 A
--
--
230 VAC
100 A
125 A
156 A
240 VAC
96 A
120 A
150 A
--
--
400 VAC
58 A
72 A
90 A
115 A
144 A
415 VAC
55 A
69 A
87 A
111 A
139 A
440 VAC
52 A
65 A
82 A
105 A
135 A
480 VAC
48 A
60 A
75 A
96 A
120 A
Minimum kVA required
Maximum kW x 1.25
Stand-by Consumption
500 W
Differential Sensitivity
(Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)
30 mA
Differential, Thermomagnetic
(Fuses) and Contactor
50% of the RMS line current

(RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)
PI-1005R3
13
Pre-Installation
Maximum Power Line Impedance. The Impedance of the Power Line in

the installation must be lower than the maximum value indicated below:
SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER

LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
208 VAC *
0.045
0.035
0.028
230 VAC
0.055
0.045
0.036
240 VAC
0.060
0.045
0.036
NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7.

THREE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER

LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
64 kW (or 65 kW)
80 kW *
208 VAC *
0.070
0.055
0.044
N.A.
N.A.
230 VAC
0.087
0.070
0.056
N.A.
N.A.
240 VAC
0.094
0.075
0.060
N.A.
N.A.
400 VAC
0.270
0.220
0.170
0.135
0.110
415 VAC
0.300
0.240
0.180
0.150
0.120
440 VAC
0.340
0.270
0.200
0.170
0.135
480 VAC
0.400
0.320
0.240
0.200
0.160
NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7.

14
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
3.4
LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE

Correct sizing of the feeder wires is critical to proper Generator operation. Wire
size is dependent on the Generator power, the line voltage and the distance
from the Distribution Transformer to the Generator Cabinet. The maximum
voltage drop during an exposure must not exceed 5% of the nominal mains
value.
It is recommended that the Distribution Transformer (Hospital) used as power
source have at least a power of the 25% more than the maximum power of the
X-ray Generator.
Recommended wire sizing is indicated in Table 3-1. These lengths are
measured from the Distribution Transformer to the Room Electrical Cabinet
(room disconnect). From the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator
Cabinet 16 mm2 (AWG 6) may be used as long as that length does not
exceed 6 m (20 ft). The maximum wire size that can be connected to the
Generator Cabinet (Input Line Fuse Holder) is 35 mm2 (AWG 2).
Table 3-1
Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet
GENERATOR
32 kW,, 3
50
230 VAC
50
mm2
240 VAC
50 mm2
208 VAC *
40 kW,, 3
45 m
60 m
95
AWG 1/0
95
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
AWG 4/0
--
--
AWG 1/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
230 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
240 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
400 VAC
16
mm2
AWG 6
35
mm2
AWG 1/0
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
16
mm2
35
mm2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
440 VAC
16
mm2
AWG 6
35
mm2
50
mm2
AWG 1/0
480 VAC
16 mm2
AWG 6
25 mm2
208 VAC *
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
230 VAC
70 mm2
240 VAC
AWG 1/0
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
mm2
50
mm2
50
mm2
AWG 2
50
mm2
AWG 4
35 mm2
AWG 2
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
AWG 2/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
208 VAC *
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
230 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
240 VAC
35
mm2
AWG 2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
95
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
25
mm2
50
mm2
70
mm2
83
mm2
AWG 3/0
25
mm2
35
mm2
70
mm2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
440 VAC
16
mm2
AWG 6
35
mm2
AWG 2
50
mm2
AWG 1/0
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
480 VAC
16 mm2
AWG 6
35 mm2
AWG 2
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
400 VAC
415 VAC
NOTE:
30 m
mm2
415 VAC
40 kW,, 1
15 m
mm2
208 VAC *
32 kW,, 1
WIRE SIZE AT:
LINE
VOLTAGE
AWG 6
AWG 4
AWG 4
AWG 2
AWG 2
AWG 1/0
AWG 2
AWG 1/0
AWG 1/0
AWG 2/0
AWG 2/0
PI-1005R3
15
Pre-Installation
Table 3-1 (cont.)

Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet
GENERATOR
50 kW,, 1
64 kW, 3
(or 65 kW, 3)
30 m
45 m
60 m
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
--
--
230 VAC
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
--
--
240 VAC
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
--
--
AWG 1/0
95
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
50
mm2
230 VAC
50
mm2
AWG 1/0
83
240 VAC
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
400 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
415 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
440 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
480 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
400 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
415 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
440 VAC
35
mm2
AWG 2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
83
mm2
AWG 3/0
105
mm2
AWG 4/0
25
mm2
50
mm2
83
mm2
105
mm2
AWG 4/0
50
mm2
83
mm2
105
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
35
mm2
70
mm2
105
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
35
mm2
70
mm2
105
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
35
mm2
70
mm2
95
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
480 VAC
400 VAC
415 VAC
* 80 kW,
kW 3
15 m
208 VAC *
208 VAC *
50 kW,, 3
WIRE SECTION AT:
LINE
VOLTAGE
440 VAC
480 VAC
AWG 4
AWG 1/0
AWG 2
AWG 2
AWG 2
AWG 1/0
AWG 3/0
AWG 2/0
AWG 2/0
AWG 2/0
AWG 3/0
AWG 4/0
AWG 4/0
AWG 4/0
AWG 3/0
16
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
3.5
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
Operation:
G
G
G
Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be:

G
3.6
Single-Phase at 100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.

50 Hz / 60 Hz.
8 / 10 / 12.5 / 16 / 20 A (1P+N).
Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA
Minimum kW required: 2.0 kW
Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE

The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is:
LINE VOLTAGE
100 / 110 VAC
208 / 230 / 240 VAC
PI-1005R3
WIRE SIZE
4 mm2
2.5
mm2
AWG 12
AWG 14
17
Pre-Installation
3.7
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
Operation:
G
G
G
Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be:

G
10 A (1P+N curve type D).
Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA
Minimum kW required:
G
G
3.8
Single-Phase at 110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.

50 Hz / 60 Hz.
without Stand-Alone option: 2.2 kW

with Stand-Alone option: 0.5 kW
Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE

The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is:
LINE VOLTAGE
18
WIRE SIZE
110 VAC
4 mm2
AWG 12
208 / 230 / 240 VAC
2.5 mm2
AWG 14
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
3.9
INTERCONNECTION AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS

Every installation must be provided with a main line disconnect device
(thermomagnetic breaker) and the remote disconnect devices required at all
Consoles that are not located next to the line safety switch. (For more
information about interconnection and grounding refer to Installation
document).
Illustration 3-1
Interconnection Block Diagram for LINE POWERED GENERATORS
DISTRIBUTION
TRANSFORMER
(Hospital, etc.)
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET WITH

LINE SAFETY SWITCH
(Provided by customer)
AUX. BOOST TRANSFORMER

WHEN POWER LINES IS 210 VAC OR BELOW OR FOR
80 kW GENERATORS WITH LINES AT 400 / 415 / 440 VAC
(Provided by customer)
3
CONTROL CONSOLE
SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC)
TOUCH SCREEN
PC
PC INTERFACE BOX
or
Serial Comm.
4
or
Note
CABLE RUN
LF-RAC (LS)
or
LV-DRAC (HS)
For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located

inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made.
Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet
should be connected to the Serial Console, Touch Screen Console or
PC Interface Box.
FUNCTION
Single or Three Phase Power.
(1 : 230 / 240 VAC)
(3 : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC)
GENERATOR
CABINET
POWER MODULE
HV TRANSFORMER
HV Cables
X-RAY TUBE
or
Serial Comm.
REMARKS
Connect to Room Electrical Cabinet according to the indicated
electrical requirements. Customer supplied.
Ground.
Single or Three Phase Power.
(1 : 230 / 240 VAC)
(3 : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC)
Ground.
3
Control Signals and Ground

Stator Supply.
Ground.
Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator

cable. (Refer to Installation document).
NOTES:
Connect to Generator according to the indicated electrical

requirements.
Install an Auxiliar Boost Transformer when it is
q
required.
eq i ed C
Customer
sto e ssupplied.
pplied
Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.)
Provided with X-ray
X ray Tube.
Tube
Field supplied.
-- For wire size refer to Section 3.4. Consult to Local Standards for feeder and ground wire size requirements.
-- The system power ground point is located in the Generator Cabinet.
PI-1005R3
19
Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-2
Interconnection Block Diagram for CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET

with LINE SAFETY SWITCH
(Customer supplied)
1
(Customer supplied)
CONTROL CONSOLE
TOUCH SCREEN
PC
PC INTERFACE BOX
2
or
Serial Comm.
or
Serial Comm.
HV Cables
X-RAY TUBE
Note
CABLE RUN
2
3
NOTES:
20
POWER MODULE
GENERATOR
CABINET
HV TRANSFORMER
LF-RAC (LS)

PC Interface Box.
FUNCTION
Single-Phase Line.
100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
REMARKS
Ground.
The Unit is connected by a Line Plug.

Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch.
Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.
Stator Supply.
Ground.
Provided with X-ray

X ray Tube.
Tube
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-3
Interconnection Block Diagram for BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET

with LINE SAFETY SWITCH
(Customer supplied)
1
(Customer supplied)
CONTROL CONSOLE
TOUCH SCREEN
PC
PC INTERFACE BOX
2
or
Serial Comm.
or
Serial Comm.
HV TRANSFORMER
HV Cables
3
or
X-RAY TUBE
Note
CABLE RUN
REMARKS
Ground.
The Unit is connected by a Line Plug.

Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch.
Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.
Ground.
Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator
cable. (Refer to Installation document).
NOTES:
or
LV-DRAC (HS)
FUNCTION
Stator Supply.
3
LF-RAC (LS)

PC Interface Box.
Single-Phase Line.
110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
GENERATOR
CABINET
POWER MODULE
Provided with X-ray

X ray Tube.
Tube
Field supplied.
PI-1005R3
21
Pre-Installation
3.10 SAFETY DEVICES

Devices such as Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door
Interlock Switch should be supplied and installed by the customer. (Refer to
Illustration 3-4.)
SAFETY SWITCH / EMERGENCY SWITCH
The main Safety Switch should be installed in the Room Electrical Cabinet
(Room Disconnect) (close to the Generator Cabinet), and provided with light
indicators for Power On / Off. It should be used for main disconnection, and
located in an accessible place where it can be seen and controlled during
operation and service.
Other Emergency Switches should be installed in accessible locations in the
room (near to the main entrance door or to the Control Console) for use in an
emergency. They should be connected to the Room Electrical Cabinet (Room
Disconnect) so that they cut power to the Generator when they are activated.
The rating of these switches should be: 10 A, 500 VAC, NC.
DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH
The Door Interlock Switch indicates to the operator when Doorways to the X-ray
room are open. It inhibits or not the X-ray generation, according to the Local
Standards and customer preferences.
This switch should be installed in the entrance door(s) and its connecting cable
should be routed to the Generator Cabinet.
WARNING LIGHT
The Warning Lights are signal lamps installed outside of the X-ray room (near
of the main entrance) that indicate:
1.
The system is under voltage (red lamp ON).
2.
X-ray exposure in process (yellow lamp ON) (for connection refer to

Installation document.)
The Warning Lights connection cables should be routed to the Generator

Cabinet.
Note
22
In any case, the installation must be in compliance with the Local

Regulation.
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-4
Room Electrical Cabinet and Mains Connection
EC
Electrical Cabinet
DCB
TCB
CR
L
System
Ground Bar
SS
ON
OFF
WL1
GEN
EM
WL2
EM
DIS
LEGEND
EC:
Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) for powering X-ray equipment. (Customer supplied)
DCB:
Differential Circuit Breaker.
TCB:
Thermomagnetic (or Fuses) Circuit Breaker.
CR:
Contactor controlled by the Safety Switch (SS).
SS:
Safety Switch used for Generator main disconnection, with ON/OFF positions.
L:
ON / OFF Indicator Lamps located on the Electrical Cabinet.
EM:
Emergency Switch near to Control Console and/or to the Room main entrance.
GEN:
Generator Cabinet.
WL1:
X-ray Emission Indicator Lamp (yellow lamp) connected to the Generator Cabinet,
located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).
PI-1005R3
WL2:
Warning Light (red lamp) located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).
DIS:
Door Interlock Switch located on the main entrance(s).
23
Pre-Installation
24
PI-1005R3
IN-1052R0
Installation
(ONLY FOR GENERATORS WITH U-ARM POSITIONERS)
Installation
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
FEB 26, 2008
First edition
This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS

DATA.

or data.
Note
IN-1052R0

Installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Pre-Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION AND CABINET INSTALLATION . . .
2.1
Control Console Installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
3.1
Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
3.1.1
General Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
High Voltage Cables Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.2.1
X-ray Tubes with Metallic Insert Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.2.2
High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
3.3.1
Stator Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
3.3.2
Tube Selection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Interconnection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
3.4.1
Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3.4.2
Collimator Error Signal (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
3.4.3
Door Interlock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
3.4.4
Warning Light Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3.4.5
Collimator Lamp and System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3.4.6
Buckys (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3.4.7
Tomo Device (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3.4.8
Ion Chambers (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3.2
3.3
3.4
IN-1052R0
Installation
Section
4
ii
Page
FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
4.1
HV Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
4.2
Cable Fastening and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
5.1
System Interconnection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
5.2
System Interconnection Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
The Installation process depends on the Generator and System configuration.
Installation must be performed in the order indicated along this document.
Perform only the sections required to install this Generator.
1.1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

The following hand tools and products are required for the Installation:
Standard service engineers tool kit.
Electric drill motor and assorted bits.
Silicone Insulating Grease (proofing compound).
Alcohol cleaning agent.
The following test equipment is required for Configuration and Calibration:
Digital Multimeter.
Non-invasive kVp Meter.
Digital mAs Meter.
Calculator.
Only for AEC purposes:
Sensitometer (only for Film).
Densitometer (only for Film).
Copper Plates for the Collimator Filter Holder (recommended):

2 units of 1 mm thickness,
1 unit of 0.5 mm thickness,
2 units of 0.2 mm thickness,
1 unit of 0.1 mm thickness.
Acrylic Plastic Plates can be used Instead of Copper Plates:

6 units of 5 cm. thickness,
5 units of 1cm. thickness.
Dosimeter (optionally).
Only for Tomo purposes:

G
IN-1052R0
Tomophantom tool.
Installation
1.2
PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK
Prior to beginning installation, it is recommended to inspect the site and verify
that the X-ray room complies with Pre-installation requirements, such as:
Incoming Line.
Main Switch and Safety Devices.
Conduits.
Space Requirements.
(Refer to the Pre-Installation document.)
IN-1052R0
Installation
1.3
GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF

THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY
RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING
DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS
ARE OFF, APPROXIMATELY 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS
TURNED OFF.
ALWAYS HAVE THE IPM DRIVER BOARD CONNECTED IN

THE GENERATOR PREVIOUS TO MAINS POWER IS
ACTIVATED IN IT. IF THE IPM DRIVER BOARD IS NOT
CONNECTED, PERMANENT DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO
IGBTS.
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH ANY

HEATSINK OF THE CIRCUIT BOARDS EVEN THE
GENERATOR IS TURNED OFF.
PREVIOUS TO
DISASSEMBLE ANY BOARD, REMOVE ALL CONNECTORS
PLUGGED TO IT.
LINE POWERED GENERATOR:

THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE
POWER LINE, AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY
SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET
IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS POWERED, THE NEON
LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2
(GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON.
INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE
CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF
RELAY (3K3) AND LF-RAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON THROUGH POWER LINE ALTHOUGH THE
CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE SAFETY
SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY INTERNAL PART
OF THE EQUIPMENT.
IN-1052R0
Installation
IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 2
UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION

AND CABINET INSTALLATION
The Generator is shipped in one box to facilitate transport and installation.
Upon receipt of the X-ray unit and associated equipment, inspect all shipping
containers for signs of damage. If damage is found, immediately notify the
carrier or their respective agent.
It is recommended to install the U-Arm Positioner before than

the Generator. (Refer to the Positioner Service Manual).
1.
Open the shipping box. Take out the Control Console (if provided),
Interconnection Cables, Cabinet Cover and other furnished parts. Do not
discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes or bags until all
parts are accounted for as listed on the packing list.
2.
Remove the packing material from the pallet.
3.
Remove the Generator Cabinet from the shipping pallet, placing it near
its chosen room position. This operation requires at least two people.
4.
When the equipment is unpacked, verify that all items on the customer
order are present, and the hardware and internal wiring is secure.
5.
Check the part numbers / serial numbers of each component with its
identification labels, and inspect all pieces for visible damage. If any
damaged parts are found, repair or order replacements to prevent
unnecessary delay in installation.
Illustration 2-1
Compact Generators
IN-1052R0
Installation
6.
Previous to install the Generator Cabinet on the upper side of the

Positioner Control Box, it is recommended to perform the Power Line
connection.
KEEP IN MIND THE GENERAL CAUTIONS FOR LINE
POWERED GENERATORS INDICATED IN SECTION 1.3.
DO NOT POWER ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL SPECIFICALLY
INSTRUCTED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL.
7.
Note
The power supply line should conform with the Generator model defined
in the Pre-Installation document. Wire sizes indicated in this document
are relative to the power supply line and wire length. Verify that the power
line voltage and phase of the Generator coincides with the one for Room
Electrical Cabinet.
As indicated in the Pre-Installation document, 16 mm 2 (AWG 6)
may be used from the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator
Cabinet provided that the length does not exceed 6 m (20 ft).
.
8.
Route the Power Line Cables and the Ground wires to the Input Line
Fuses and Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (Ground Studs are above
the input fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer). These
cables can be secured to the Fastening Bar of the Cabinet and routed
internally along the rear side of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes
for cable routing). (Refer to Illustration 2-2.)
Illustration 2-2
Cable Routing in the Line Powered Generator
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer 6T2
Power Line Cables
Ground Terminals
Input Line Fuses
IN-1052R0
Installation
9.
For Single Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1 and N (L2)
to the Fuse Holders of F3 and F4 (right side of the Cabinet), and the
Ground wire to the Ground stud in the Cabinet Frame (above these fuses
or close to the right side of the HV Transformer).
SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ARE FACTORY DELIVERED

TO OPERATE ON PHASE AND NEUTRAL. IN CASE OF
CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT TO A TWO-PHASE LINE,
REPLACE THE NEUTRAL CARTRIDGE WITH THE FUSE
SUPPLIED WITH THE GENERATOR.
10.
For Three Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1, L2 and L3
to the Fuse Holders of F3, F4 and F5 (right side of the Cabinet), and the
Ground wire to the Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (located above
these fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer).
Three Phase Generators do not need Neutral (N) wire connection from
the Line. If the unit is provided with the optional Fuse Module, connect
the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud below F3 Fuse
Holder.
Illustration 2-3
Power Line connections
Input Transf. 6T2

GND Studs
GND Stud
L1 Input Line
L2 Input Line
L3 Input Line
Neutral Stud
(optional)
IN-1052R0
Installation
For 80 kW Generators, the power supply line must be 480 VAC (or
530 VAC). If the Generator is supplied with an external step-up
autotransformer, it will include the cables to connect the autotransformer
to the Generator Cabinet. Power line should be connected to the
autotransformer terminals according to the line.
480 V
(or 530 V)
415 V
400 V
380 V
SEP-UP TRANSFORMER
Input: 380 VAC / 400 VAC / 415 VAC, Three-Phase.
380 V
400 V
415 V
Output: 480 VAC / 530 VAC, Three-Phase.

Max Power Output: 80 kW, 10% duty cicle
(approx. 5 seconds / minute)
380 V
400 V
415 V
Rising Temperature: 40oC
11.
480 V
(or 530 V)
480 V
(or 530 V)
The whole System (Tables, Spot Film Devices, etc.) can be switched
ON/OFF when the Generator is switched ON/OFF. For this, power the
System through the output terminals of the Line Contactor 6K5 (upper
contactor close to the Input Transformer). These terminals are located
underneath the Line Contactor 6K5.
Illustration 2-4
Line Contactor 6K5
Line Contactor 6K5

Input Transformer 6T2
Output Terminals
IN-1052R0
Installation
12.
Three-Phase Generators can be provided with an optional Fuse Module

mounted on Module-12, for switching ON/OFF the whole system when
the Generator is turned ON/OFF.
For this, connect the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud
below F3 Fuse Holder. Power the System through the Output Terminals
12TS4 (U, V, W, N, GND) close to Fuses F14, F15, F16.
Illustration 2-5
Power Line connections in the optional Fuse Module
GND Studs
Input Transf. 6T2
GND Stud
L1 Input Line
L2 Input Line
Terminals 12TS4
L3 Input Line
Neutral Stud
13.
Note
According to the nominal voltage of the line, verify or connect the

wire : to the indicated terminal (TB) of Transformer 6T2. This wire is
factory connected to 230 VAC (for 1-Phase), 400 VAC (for 3-Phase) or
480 VAC / 530 VAC (for 80 kW 3-Phase Generators). (Refer to
Schematic 543020XX).
For 220 VAC power line, connect the wire : to the 230 VAC
terminals. For 380 VAC power line, connect the wire : to the
400 VAC terminals.
6T2 Terminal Strip
6T2
IN-1052R0
Installation
14.
After connecting the Power Line Cables, secure them to the Fastening
Bar using cable ties if they are routed over the Fastening Bar, or using
a suitable clamp if they are routed through the Round Cable Outlet on the
Rear Cover of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes).
15.
The Generator Cabinet is installed on the upper side of the Positioner

Control Box as follows.
BACK COVER
690
(27.16)
Upper Cable Entrance

(HV Cables, Stator Cable)
462
(18.18)
65
2.55
65
2.55
R9.5
CONTROL BOX
50 28 21
600
(23.62)
213
8.38
21 37 52
COMPACT
GENERATOR
Lateral Cable Entrance
Anchoring Holes
These steps are also described in the Positioner Service Manual.

a.
Place the Control Box on its final position of the room, keep in
mind:
G
the length of the Column Harness (approx. 1.5 m) that goes

from the Column of the Positioner to the Control Box,
the length of the High Voltage Cables (X-Ray Tube -- HV

Transformer in the Generator Cabinet),
the Swivel Arm movements.
(Refer to Room Layout illustrations in the Positioner

Service Manual)
10
IN-1052R0
Installation
b.
Level the Control Box using the Adjustable Leveling Legs. Keep
the Base at the maximum distance from the floor.
Seismic areas and other conditions require to secure firmly the
Control Box to the floor through the mounting holes at its base. In
this case, place the four spacers (provided) under the base and
secure them to the floor. Keep the four Leveling Legs at the same
height than the spacers.
Cable Access
Spacer for using in Seismic Areas

Adjustable Leveling Legs
c.
Assemble the supplied Back Cover for the Generator Cabinet to

the upper side of the Control Box using two M6x20 screws
(supplied).
Back Cover
Fixing Screws
Control Box
d.
IN-1052R0
Remove the four Adjustable Leveling Legs from the base of the
Generator Cabinet.
11
Installation
e.
Hang the Generator Cabinet on the Back Cover and secure it to

the Control Box using four M6x20 screws (supplied). At least two
people are required for this operation. Fix the two screws that join
the rear side of the Cabinet to the Back Cover.
Generator Cabinet
Back Cover
Hook
Fixing Screws
Control Box
f.
P2--Shield
P1
P3
J1
Ground Wire / GND Stud
In some cases, due to transport safety requirements, the HV

Transformer is shipped out of the Generator Cabinet. Install the
HV Transformer inside the Cabinet (upper area) and secure it with
the respective anchors or plates, then connect the following cables
from the Power Module to the corresponding terminals on the HV
Transformer:
G
P2-Shield (2 thin wires), P1 and P3. Connect these cables to

the stud-brass terminals using two wrenches to tighten the
nuts (one to hold the base nut in place and the other to tighten
the nut over the cable) and avoiding twisting the studs. Ensure
that the connection is secure and properly tightened.
Ground wire to Ground stud.
Connector J1.
THE HV TRANSFORMER HAS TO BE SECURED WITH ITS

ANCHORS OR PLATES INSIDE THE CABINET. OTHERWISE
P1, P2 AND P3 STUDS MAY BE IN CONTACT WITH THE
CABINET FRAME AND PRODUCE A SHORT-CIRCUIT.
12
IN-1052R0
Installation
g.
Leave a working area around the Generator Cabinet until its final
installation.
Cable Access to the Generator Cabinet

(HV Cables, Stator / Thermostat, AEC, ...)
Emergency Switch-Off Button

ON / OFF Button
IN-1052R0
16.
Verify that the power supply line is OFF in the Room Electrical Cabinet.
Verify that the power line to the Generator is cut when the Emergency
Switch(es) is(are) activated.
17.
Cut the cables to the appropriate length and remove insulation from both
ends of the power and ground wires. Connect them to the respective
terminals in the Room Electrical Cabinet.
18.
Install the Control Console as indicated in Section 2.1.
13
Installation
2.1
CONTROL CONSOLE INSTALLATION (OPTIONAL)

1.
Control Console can be freestanding, wall supported or mounted on an

optional Pedestal. Console is provided with several mounting holes on
the bottom for anchoring to the Pedestal or another support.
Console CPU Boards and AEC Control Board can be located inside the
Console (standard) or inside the Generator Cabinet (for Serial
communication).
14
2.
When a Pedestal is used, secure the Pedestal to the floor through the
anchoring holes on its base and place the base cover. Attach the Console
to the Pedestal using the mounting holes on the bottom of the Console.
3.
When the Console is wall supported, secure the support to the wall and
attach the Console to the support using the mounting holes on the bottom
of the Console.
4.
Leave a sufficient working area around the equipment until its final
assembly.
IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 3
CABLE CONNECTIONS
This section provides the information necessary to connect the Generator
Cables with the system and options.
Note
For more information about electrical requirements and cable

connections, refer to the Pre-Installation document and
Section 5 System Interconnections at the end of this document.
Note
Identification of some terminal connections (TB, TS), boards, etc...

along with this document (text and schematics) may have a prefix
number which indicates the module number in the equipment.
(a.e. TS2 as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2).
Some safety devices such as the Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning
Light, and Door Interlock Switch are supplied and installed by the customer.
Verify that safety devices have been properly installed and routed during the
Pre-Installation procedure.
3.1
3.1.1
CABLE ROUTING INSIDE GENERATOR CABINET

GENERAL CABLE ROUTING
1.
Before connecting the Interconnection cables within the Generator

Cabinet, cables must be first connected to each Device (Positioner,
Tables, Buckys, etc.) and routed through the raceways. Remove the
ferrite blocks of the cables (factory clamped) when it is required to carry
out a correct routing, then re-install the ferrite blocks where they originally
were around cables.
Cables Entrance (upper side of Wall Support
2.
IN-1052R0
Inside the Generator Cabinet, all Interconnection cables must be routed

over the Fastening Bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet Frame minding the
upper Cable Outlet at the rear side of the Cabinet Cover. (Refer to
Illustration 3-1).
15
Installation
Illustration 3-1
Cable Routing in Compact Generator
Fastening Bar
Stator & Interconnections

Cables Outlet (rear side)
Cable Ties

Cables Entrance
Cable Ties
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer
Power Line Cables
Ground Terminals
Input Line Fuses
HV Cables
Stator & Interconnections Cables
Power Line
Cable Entrance
Input Transformer
Cable Entrance
Power Line Cable Entrance
Input Line Fuses
16
IN-1052R0
Installation
3.
For Generators with the Low or High Speed Starter located on a shelf
(Module 10 or 11), Stator and Interconnections Cables have to be routed
internally through the Cabinet close to the HV Transformer.
In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly

recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator
Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below).
Never wrap in circles.
YES
3.2
NO
4.
Connect all cables as indicated in Section 3 Cable Connections.
5.
Secure all cables to the Fastening Bar using cable ties after all
cable / wire connections are complete.
HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES CONNECTION
FOR GENERATORS WITH A HV TRANSFORMER WITH

DOUBLE X-RAY TUBE RECEPTACLES (ANODE / CATHODE
TO CONNECT TWO TUBES): CONNECTIONS OF THE
FILAMENT LEADS FIL-1 RTN (J4-15) AND FIL-2 RTN
(J4-16) ON THE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD HAVE BEEN
INVERTED. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE FACTORY SET.
(REFER TO SCHEMATIC 543020XX).
3.2.1
X-RAY TUBES WITH METALLIC INSERT ENVELOPE

In case of X-ray Tubes with a Metallic Insert Envelope, it is required to connect
the wire from the Metallic Insert Envelope to the Black Banana Plug connection
on the HV Transformer to obtain a correct mA measures. For these X-ray Tubes
the part number of the HV Transformer has to be coded in revision A or higher
(a.e. A6094--16A). (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Map 54302035).
IN-1052R0
17
Installation
3.2.2
HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES

Connect the HV Cables in the HV Transformer (Generator).
These cables must enter into the Generator through the cable outlet on the
upper side of the Cabinet and then attached to the fastening bar (upper rear bar)
of the Cabinet frame minding the upper cable outlet at the rear side of the
Cabinet cover.
The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely
delicate and easily damaged. Therefore they must be handled
carefully. Make sure that they are straight and that the splits
in the pins are open (parallel to sides).
1.
The mounting accessories of each termination plug are factory

assembled. For extended information refer to the HV Cable
manufacturers instructions located inside the HV Cable package.
Do not install the Silicone washer supplied with the HV
Cables.
2.
Unscrew the grub screw of the ring nut. (Refer to the illustration below.)
Nipple
Contact Pins
Termination Plug
Ring Nut
Grub Screw
Contact
18
3.
Prepare the high voltage terminals that will be installed in the HV

Transformer. Put approximately 1 cm (0.5) of HV Oil in the HV
Transformer receptacles (included in the HV cables package). If HV Oil
is not available, fill the receptacles using silicone paste provided with the
X-ray Tube.
4.
Carefully insert the anode and cathode termination plug into the
respective receptacle socket (watch the nipple on the plug to ensure
correct positioning of the contact pins).
5.
Hand tighten the ring nut. It must be secure. Tighten the grub screw.
IN-1052R0
Installation
3.3
3.3.1
X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION

STATOR CABLE
X-ray Tubes are equipped with the Stator cable installed.
A LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotatory Anode Controller) is required for
High Speed X-ray Tubes. Connections between LV-DRAC and Power Module
are factory made.
Route the Stator cable together with the HV cables to the Generator Cabinet.
Connect the Stator cable terminals to the indicated Terminal Block TS2:
STATOR WIRES
TERMINAL TS2
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
MAIN
TS2-1
TS2-9
AUX (Shift)
TS2-2
TS2-10
COMMON
TS2-3
TS2-11
Note
Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2

depending on the Generator model.
Note
For Philips or Siemens X-ray Tubes refer to Interconnection Maps

I/F-021 or I/F-024.
IN GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH LV-DRAC: THE LV-DRAC
OUTPUT CAN BE AS HIGH AS 1000 Vrms. FOR SAFETY
REASONS (TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCKS), THE STATOR
CABLE MUST BE SHIELDED AND BOTH ENDS OF THE
SHIELD MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND.
DUE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMC)
PROBLEMS, THE IGBTs HEATSINK IS NOT GROUNDED. IT
IS CONNECTED TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE
INPUT RECTIFIER. TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, BE SURE
THAT THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE
CAPACITOR BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED BEFORE
MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC.
MAKE SURE THAT STATOR WIRES ARE PROPERLY
CONNECTED. BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE, CHECK
THAT THE ANODE ROTATES CORRECTLY.
IN-1052R0
19
Installation
FANS
Wires from fans should be routed with the Stator Cables, and connected to the
indicated terminal of the Generator Cabinet. Depending on the model of X-ray
Tube, the fans are powered at 115 VAC or 220 VAC. Make the following
connections to select the fan voltage.
For Compact Generators with the Low Speed Starter LF-RAC located on a shelf
at the bottom of the Generator (module-10), connect wires from fans to:
TUBE
CONNECTION
GENERATOR WITH LOW SPEED STARTER

WIRES FROM FANS
115 VAC
220 VAC
AS TUBE-1
10TS2-6 and 10TS2-7

on the Generator Cabinet
TB4-T1 with TB1-22 or TB1-23

on the LF-RAC Board

on the LF-RAC Board
AS TUBE-2
10TS2-14 and 10TS2-15

on the Generator Cabinet

on the LF-RAC Board

on the LF-RAC Board
For Compact Generators with the High Speed Starter LV-DRAC located on a
shelf at the bottom of the Generator (module-11), connect wires from fans to:
TUBE
CONNECTION
20
GENERATOR WITH HIGH SPEED STARTER

WIRES TO FANS
115 VAC
220 VAC
AS TUBE-1
11TS2-6 and 11TS2-7

on the LV-DRAC Module
wire marked T1 with 11TS2-17


AS TUBE-2
11TS2-14 and 11TS2-15



IN-1052R0
Installation
THERMOSTAT OR PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL

If the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC) or
Pressure Switch (must be NC Contact), the two wires should be routed to the
Terminal Block TS2 in the Generator Cabinet and connected to the following
Terminals.
In case that the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC)
and a Pressure Switch (both must be NC Contacts), connect them in series
before routing, connecting both wire-ends to their respective Terminals in TS2.
Note
THERMOSTAT WIRES
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
THERMOSTAT SIGNAL
TS2-4
TS2-12
THERMOSTAT COMMON
TS2-5
TS2-13
Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2

depending on the Generator model.
If an X-ray Tube is not provided with Thermostat signal, jump both connections
in the Terminal Block TS2 (refer to above table).
GND AND/OR SHIELD

The connection of the GND and/or Shield wire of the Stator cables depend on
the Generator model.
GENERATOR MODEL
CONNECTION OF
GND and/or SHIELD WIRE
Number of X-ray Tubes
Starter type and Location
1 or 2 Tubes
LF-RAC (Low Speed)

Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 10)
10TS2--8 or 10TS2--16
1 or 2 Tubes
LV-DRAC (High Speed)

Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 11)
11TS2--8 (for Tube-1)

11TS2--16 (for Tube-2)
IN-1052R0
21
Installation
3.3.2
TUBE SELECTION SIGNALS
Note
This section only applies to Generators with two X-ray Tubes.
The Tube Selection signals are available through two contacts free of voltage
located on the starter.
TUBE-1 SELECTION
TUBE-2 SELECTION
SELECTION COMMON
on the LF-RAC Board
J1-10
J1-11
J1-12
11KT1-84
11KT1-72
11KT1-83 and 11KT1-71

(connect both)
3.4
INTERCONNECTION CABLES
This section identifies the cables and runs needed for Generator and System
Interconnection. Route and connect the interconnection cables from each
component installed in the system to the Generator Cabinet as indicated in
Illustration 3-2 and Section 5.2 -- Interconnection Maps 543010XX.
Interconnection cables should not be routed into the same

conduit or cable raceway as the Power or High Voltage
cables.
22
IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-2
Interconnection Cables
GENERATOR CABINET
ATP CONSOLE CPU
POWER CABLE (factory supplied)
J1
COMMUNICATION CABLE (factory supplied)
J3
J14
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
(factory supplied)
J2
J3
J5
J7 or J8
TS1
INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)
J2
AEC INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)
J5
J13
TOMO INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
ROOM DOOR CABLE

(customer supplied)
ROOM LIGHT CABLE
(customer supplied)
TS1
CABLES FROM BUCKY 1 & 2

(ONLY FOR SYSTEMS WITH 1 OR 2 BUCKY)
(field supplied)
TS2
STATOR, FAN & THERMOSTAT FROM TUBES

(field supplied)
TS3
COMPATIBILITIES
ADAPTATIONS
L1 / L2 / L3 / N / GND
ION CHAMBERS, TOMO DEVICES

BUCKY 3 & 4, IMAGE SYSTEMS
(customer supplied)
POWER LINE & GND FOR
LINE POWERED GENERATORS
(customer supplied)
GND CABLES (factory supplied)
Note
IN-1052R0
For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are

located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are
factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of
the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Control Box, or
PC Interface Box, or Serial Console.
23
Installation
3.4.1
SERIAL INTERCONNECTION RS232 / RS422
GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT

TOUCH SCREEN
For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections:
(Refer to Illustration 3-3)
Note
24
1.
Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from AC Supply connector

of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from COM1

(Generator) of the TPC to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
3.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.
4.
The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard.
Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these
communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.
For futher information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and

A6188--03 at the end of this Document.
IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-3
Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen
GENERATOR
TPC
HANDSWITCH
HANDSWITCH
TS1
J5
AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx)

SERIAL CABLE (A7067--xx)
AC SUPPLY
COM 1 (GENERATOR)
COM 2
TOUCH SCREEN
(INTERNAL)
COM 3
COM 4
M (MOUSE)
KB (KEYBOARD)
Label of Operating System Licence

Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)
OPTIONAL MOUSE
OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
AC Supply Cable
Handswitch
Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)
IN-1052R0
25
Installation
GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITH

TOUCH SCREEN
For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections:
Note
26
1.
Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from AC Supply connector

of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--xx) from COM1

(Generator) of the TPC to J2 Console of the System Interface Panel
in the Control Box.
3.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1

Generator of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the
Generator Cabinet.
4.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.
5.
The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard.
Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these
communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.
For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and

A6188--03 at the end of this Document, and refer to the respective
Positioner Service Manual.
IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-4
Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen
GENERATOR
TPC
HANDSWITCH
HANDSWITCH
TS1
AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx)
AC SUPPLY
COM 1 (GENERATOR)
POSITIONER CONTROL BOX

J1 (GENERATOR)
J5
COM 2
TOUCH SCREEN
(INTERNAL)
COM 3
COM 4
M (MOUSE)
J2 (CONSOLE)
KB (KEYBOARD)
J6 (REMOTE ON)
ON
OPTIONAL MOUSE
OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
REMOTE ON CABLE (A9611--xx)
Label of Operating System Licence

Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)
AC Supply Cable
Handswitch
Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)
IN-1052R0
27
Installation
VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT TOUCH

SCREEN
Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC
Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator.
Perform the following connections:
Note
Note
1.
Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC

Interface Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
3.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.
4.
Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC

Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1
(Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.
J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto

ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed).
5.
Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
6.
Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for
the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.
For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052,

A6188--03 and I/F-036 at the end of this Document.
Illustration 3-5
Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen
GENERATOR
CABINET
J5
PC INTERFACE
BOX
SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01)
J1
PC (COMPUTER)
PC BOX / PC CABLE
(A3363--01)
J2
HANDSWITCH
J1
COM1
J3
POWER LINE CABLE
TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET
28
IN-1052R0
Installation
VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITH TOUCH SCREEN

Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC
Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator.
Perform the following connections:
Note
Note
1.
Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC

Interface Box to J2 Console of the System Interface Panel in the Control
Box.
3.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1

Generator of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the
Generator Cabinet.
4.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.
5.
Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC

Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1
(Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.
J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto

ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed).
6.
Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
7.
Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for
the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.
For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052,

A6188--03 and I/F-036, and refer to the respective Positioner
Service Manual.
Illustration 3-6
Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen
CONTROL
BOX
GENERATOR
CABINET
J2
J5
PC INTERFACE
BOX
SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01)
J1
PC (COMPUTER)
PC BOX / PC CABLE
(A3363--01)
J2
J1
HANDSWITCH
J1
COM1
J3
POWER LINE CABLE
TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET
IN-1052R0
29
Installation
GENERATOR SERIAL CONSOLE

For systems using a Serial Console, only a Serial Interconnection Cable
(A7066--xx) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet must be connected to the J1 of
the Serial Console. (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03).
3.4.2
COLLIMATOR ERROR SIGNAL (OPTIONAL)

This option must be requested on the customer order. For systems using an
Automatic Collimator, the X-ray exposure can be inhibited due to a Collimator
Error. This signal can be used only for one Automatic Collimator in the system,
special interconnection should be required when two Collimators are present.
Connect two wires from the Collimator to Terminal Block 4TS3-20 (Collimator
Error signal) and 3TS1-18 (or another GND in this Terminal Block). Collimator
Error signal goes (through the Interface Cable) from 4TS3-20 in the Generator
Cabinet to terminal J2-6 in Connector J2 of the ATP Console CPU Board. If the
system is not provided with Automatic Collimator connect 4TS3--20 to GND
(3TS1--18).
3.4.3
DOOR INTERLOCK SIGNAL

Connect two wires from the Room Door Interlock Switch(es) to Terminal Block
3TS1-22 (Door signal) and 3TS1-23 (Door Rtn - gnd). If the X-ray Room is not
provided with a Door signal, place a jumper between both connections in
Terminal Block 3TS1.
At this point, proceed to perform the complete Configuration

and the Calibration procedures except for AEC. Once
Configuration and Calibration tasks have been performed,
proceed with the rest of the Installation and Calibration tasks.
30
IN-1052R0
Installation
3.4.4
WARNING LIGHT SIGNAL

Room Warning Lamp(s) can be externally powered, or internally by the Terminal
Block 3TS1. Room Lamp(s) must be connected through the Terminal Block
3TS1-47 and 3TS1-48 (internal relay on Interface Control Board) to enable the
Generator switches On/Off the Room Warning Lamps. (Refer to Section 5.2 -I/F-008).
3.4.5
COLLIMATOR LAMP AND SYSTEM LOCKS

The Generator can supply power to the Manual Collimator Lamp and System
Locks (Table, Vertical Bucky, etc.)
Connect wires from the Collimator Lamp to Terminal Block TB7-3 (24 VAC) and
TB7-4 (0 VAC) of the Lock Board.
Connect wires from the Locks to Terminal Block TB7-5 (+24 VDC) and TB7-6
(0 VDC) of the Lock Board.
Lock Board
Note
IN-1052R0
When required, voltages (VAC and VDC) on TB7 can be changed

by connecting their respective wires to the other available
terminals on the Input Transformer 6T2. (Refer to Schematics
543020XX).
31
Installation
3.4.6
BUCKYS (OPTIONAL)
Connect the Bucky as indicated in the Section 5.2 (Interconnections Maps for
Buckys), and test them before connecting the Ion Chambers.
The following table represents the standard Bucky cable connections:
SYSTEM
CABLE FROM BUCKY IS CONNECTED TO
Systems with 1 or 2 Bucky
Terminal Block 3TS1 of the Generator Cabinet

(Refer to Section 5.2 -- Bucky)
Systems with 3 or 4 Bucky
Terminal Block TB2 of the optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board,

located in the Generator Cabinet
(Refer to Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).
The Bucky of a RAD only Table with Tomo Device
Terminal Block TB1 of the optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board,

located in the Generator Cabinet
(Refer to Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).
Note
Optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board is required to install

more than two Buckys in the System. (Refer to the Tomo / Bucky
Adaptation Board and the Manual for the Bucky).
If the Bucky Start signal enters the Bucky through a relay or another inductive
device (a.e. a motor), it is mandatory to add the supplied R2--C2 close to each
Bucky, so they have to be connected on the terminal output of the Bucky
assembly. The R-Cs are attached to the Generator harness in a bag.
If Bucky Start signal enters the Bucky through an optocoupler, do not add the
supplied R2--C2 for the Bucky.
Note
3.4.7
The operations described above will prevent noises and

uncontrolled Bucky movements that can cause exposure cutting
or console blocking.
TOMO DEVICE (OPTIONAL)

RAD Only Table
The Tomo cable (A3083-01) from connector J13 of the ATP Console CPU
Board has to be connected to the Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 of the optional
Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board, located in the Generator Cabinet.
The cables from the Tomo Device are also connected to the Terminal Blocks
TB1 and TB2 of the optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board. Refer to the
Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board for more detailed information and interface.
(Refer also to the Manuals of the Tomo Device).
Note
32
RAD only Table requires the optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation

Board.
IN-1052R0
Installation
3.4.8
ION CHAMBERS (OPTIONAL)

The AEC Control Board (A3012-XX) must be installed on the ATP Console
CPU Board before installing the Ion Chamber(s). The AEC Adaptation Board
(A3263-03) is also required. (Refer to the Ion Chamber Service Manuals).
Perform the following tasks in the order described:
Note
The Generator is only compatible with Ion Chambers that output

a positive ramp.
1.
If an Ion Chamber requires High Voltage (200 to 500 VDC), the Generator
must include an Interface Control Board (version A3009-09/12) that
supplies this voltage.
The Interface Control Board must have Jumpers from W3 to W8 in A
position. This High Voltage is supplied through Terminal Block 3TS1-39
PT SPLY of the Generator Cabinet and sent with a wire to TB1-9 of the
AEC Adaptation Board.
ION CHAMBERS WITH HIGH VOLTAGE
GE
BVM CGR
BVM-CGR
300 VDC
230 VDC
PHILIPS AMPLIMAT
AMP-Phenolic Connector
DB 15 Connector
500 VDC
400 VDC
Notes: -- If the System included both GE and BVM-CGR Ion Chambers, Terminal TB1-9 must supply 270 VDC.
-- Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers can not be installed with GE or BVM-CGR Ion Chambers.
DO NOT CONNECT ANY ION CHAMBER TO THE

GENERATOR CABINET UNTIL HIGH VOLTAGE IS EITHER
VERIFIED OR ADJUSTED TO THE VALUES REQUIRED.
OTHER VOLTAGE COULD DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.
Turn the Generator ON and verify voltage in TB1-9 according to the Ion
Chambers to be installed. If necessary, adjust the High Voltage at
Potentiometer R20 of the Interface Control Board. Turn the Generator
OFF after adjustment.
IN-1052R0
33
Installation
2.
Connect each Ion Chamber cable to J1 (IC1), J2 (IC2), J3 (IC3) or J5

(IC4) of the AEC Adaptation Board. The code for the Ion Chamber cable
supplied by the Generator manufacturer is A3253--01.
Note
Same Ion Chamber types have to be installed in consecutive order

starting at J1 (IC1). In the case of using four Ion Chambers, IC3
and IC4 must have the same film/cassette combination.
Note
The Vacutec, AID or similar Ion Chamber type is directly

connected to the AEC Adaptation Board. For Comet Ion
Chambers, cable connection has to be made previously through
the Comet Preamplifier PA-021 and then directly to the AEC
Adaptation Board.
For other cases, a cable adapter is required. The Generator
manufacturer has the following cable adapters available: GE
(A3082--01), CGR-BVM (A3081--01), Philips Amplimat
(A3080--01/02 with DB-15 or A6727-01/02 with Phenolic
connector) and MEDYS (A6715--01).
34
IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-7
Four Ion Chamber Connection
* Connections free of voltage IC Adaptation
Cables
GENERATOR
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3263--03)
J1
TS1
POWER INTERFACE Cable
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC 1 PREAMPLIFIER
TB1
J2
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC 2 PREAMPLIFIER
ATP CONSOLE BOARD

J5
J3
AEC INTERFACE Cable
J4
J5
ION CHAMBER Cable
ION CHAMBER Cable
POWER INTERFACE CABLE
IC 4 PREAMPLIFIER
* Connections with IC Adaptation Cables
AEC ADAPTATION PCB
TS1 (Generator Cabinet)
IC 3 PREAMPLIFIER
TB1
ADAPTATION CABLE*
ION CHAMBER 1
(field supplied)
J1
ADAPTATION CABLE*
TB1--9
ION CHAMBER 2
(field supplied)
J2
ADAPTATION CABLE*
ION CHAMBER 3
(field supplied)
J3
ADAPTATION CABLE*
J5
AEC INTERFACE CABLE
3.
ION CHAMBER TYPE
ION CHAMBER 4
(field supplied)
J5
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
J4
Configure Jumpers from JP1 to JP8 and from JP13 to JP16 according to
the group of Ion Chamber type:
JUMPERS POSITION
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4
IC1 = IC2 = IC3
IC1 = IC2
IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4
IN-1052R0
35
Installation
4.
Each type of Ion Chamber requires a specified reference voltage for

Area Selections and AEC Reset signals:
G
Vacutec, AID and Comet Ion Chambers require GND (TB1-10).
MEDYS, CGR-BVM, GE and Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers

require +24 VDC (TB1-4).
The reference voltage is provided from: TB1-7 Relay 1 for IC1; TB1-6
Relay 2 for IC2; TB1-5 Relay 3 for IC3; and TB1-8 Relay 4 for IC4.
For each group of Ion Chambers of the same type, connect a wire
between each of the above mentioned terminals to TB1-10 (GND), TB1-4
(+24 VDC) or TB1-3 (+12 VDC) depending on the voltage required
(examples: for four MEDYS Ion Chambers add only a wire-jumper
between TB1-7 and TB1-4; or for one MEDYS Ion Chamber as IC-1 and
one COMET Ion Chamber as IC-2 add a wire-jumper between TB1-7 and
TB1-4, and another wire between TB1-6 and TB1-10).
DO NOT TURN ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE INPUT

SIGNALS OF ALL THE ION CHAMBERS ARE CONNECTED TO
THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE. OTHER VOLTAGE MIGHT
DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.
5.
Ion Chambers output must be 0 VDC when there is no-radiation

(No-Offset adjustment). If an Ion Chamber output has an offset, it must
be adjusted to 0 VDC with the respective Potentiometer.
Configure Jumpers from JP9 to JP12 and turn ON the Generator only to
adjust the following Potentiometers (if needed) according to the Ion
Chamber output:
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
36
JUMPERS POSITION
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER

(ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN B POSITION)
TP1 -- R11
TP2 -- R8
TP4 -- R2
TP12 -- R5
IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 4
4.1
FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS
HV TRANSFORMER
This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transformers

(black aluminium HV Transformers).
Ventilation Screw
The HV Transformer contains Shell Diala AX oil. Check that there is no oil
leakage. If leakage is found, remove the oil fill plug from the top of the HV
Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4) from the top of
the HV Transformer. Add Shell Diala AX oil if necessary.
Unscrew the Ventilation Screw from the top of the HV Transformer.
4.2
CABLE FASTENING AND COVERS

Note
Before re-installing cabinet covers, perform the rest of the required

Calibration procedures (a.e. AEC).
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure. Cables should be
correctly routed. (Refer to Section 3.1)
In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly
recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator
Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below).
Never wrap in circles.
YES
NO
Re-install the Cabinet covers and connect its internal ground wires. Power line,
High Voltage and Interconnections cables must go through the cover cable
outlet.
IN-1052R0
37
Installation
38
IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 5
5.1
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION SIGNALS

All input signals are active low. This means the inputs must be pulled to ground
(chassis ground of the Generator) thru relay contacts, by a transistor or other
switching device. The current requirement of the switch is less than 10 mA.
Do not apply 115 / 220 VAC logic signals to any of the logic
inputs. If 115 / 220 VAC logic signals are used in the X-ray
table, these signals must be converted to a contact closure
by a relay.
The outputs signals from the Generator to the subsystem devices are usually
active low (switched to chassis ground of the Generator). The outputs are open
collector transistor drivers with a maximum current of 0.5 Amperes.
Table 5-1
System Interconnection Signals
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
AUX BUCKY SPLY
External voltage supply required for the Bucky motion, when this voltage is not +24 VDC.
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-1 (normally the Table Bucky) drive signal.
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
This low going signal from Bucky-1 indicates Bucky-1 motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.
BUCKY 1 DR
This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-2 (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand) drive signal.
--BUCKY 2 MOTION
This low going signal from Bucky-2 indicates Bucky-2 in motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.
BUCKY 2 DR
This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.
--BUCKY EXP
This low going (0 volts) signal starts the Bucky exposure. The signal originates on the Interface Board
BUCKY SPLY
Voltage supply required for the Bucky drive command.
C--HT CLK
Serial data clock to the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the C--HT DATA signal.
C--HT DATA
Serial data to the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the C--HT CLK signal.
--COLLIMATOR
--DOOR
IN-1052R0
This active low signal indicates that NO EXPOSURE HOLD condition exists at the Collimator. This input is read only when the
Radiographic Tube is selected.
This low signal is the interlock for the Door of the X-ray room.
39
Installation
Table 5-1 (cont.)

System Interconnection Signals
SIGNAL NAME
--FLD1 DR
A low signal to select the right field in the Ion Chamber.
--FLD2 DR
A low signal to select the left field in the Ion Chamber.
--FLD3 DR
A low signal to select the center field in the Ion Chamber.
HT--C CLK
Serial data clock from the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the HT--C DATA signal.
HT--C DAT
Serial data from the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the HT--C CLK signal.
--HT INL
This signal is low when the switch in the high voltage transformer is in the RAD position. This is a safety interlock which
prevents an exposure if the high voltage switch (in the HV Transformer) is in the wrong position.
HV PT CRL
This analogic signal (originates in the optional AEC Control Board) controls the output of the HV Power Supply on the Interface
Control Board. +5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts programs the output to approximately --1200 volts.
IC GND
GND for the IC SPLY.
IC1 INPUT
This input is the output of the Bucky 1 Ion Chamber (normally the Table Ion Chamber).
IC2 INPUT
This input is the output of the Bucky 2 Ion Chamber (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand Ion Chamber).
IC3 INPUT
This input is the output of the Spot Film Ion Chamber.
IC SPLY
--LINE CONT
Power supply for the Ion Chamber. This output should be within the range of 500 to 800 volts.
A low signal energizes the main line contactor K5 in the Power Module.
--PREP
Commands to the HT Control Board to boost X-ray Tube Filament to the value of mA selected and to start the X-ray Tube Rotor
is RAD Tube is selected.
--READY
This low going signal indicates the system is ready to make an exposure (Prep cycle complete). This signal is used to interface
to certain peripheral devices such as Film Changers, etc.
--ROOM LIGHT
This low going signal indicates the X-ray preparation or exposure. This signal is used to interface to the Room X-ray warning
light.
--STRT DR
40
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
A low signal to indicate the start of an exposure to the Ion Chamber.
--THERMOSTAT-1
This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-1.
--THERMOSTAT-2
This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-2.
IN-1052R0
Installation
5.2
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION MAPS

Refer to the following maps for details of the wire connections.
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
Compact / Compact-ESM Generators.

System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301045
Serial Communication to Generator.

System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301052
RS-232/422/485 Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A6188--03
PC / Serial Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-036
Metallic Case X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54302035
Earthing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-103
STATOR INTERFACE
Philips Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-021
Siemens Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-024
ROOM LAMPS
Room Warning Light Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-008
BUCKYS
Table Bucky Interface

(Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-001
Vertical Bucky Interface

(Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-002
AEC -- ION CHAMBERS
IN-1052R0
AEC -- VACUTEC / AID / COMET Compatibility

for more than one Ion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/M-015
AEC Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3263--03
41
Installation
42
IN-1052R0
FLUORO CPU BOARD
CONNECTOR J4
SIGNAL
C--FL DAT
GND
--CAM FL EXP
C--FL CLK
FL--C DAT
GND
FL--C CLK
CAM SYNC
+12V ISO
N.U.
TERMINAL BLOCK 3TS1

PIN I/O SIGNAL
1 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 1)
2 O BUCKY SPLY 1
3 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 1)
4 O BUCKY 1 DR
5 I --BUCKY 1 MOT
6 I
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN
7 O GND
8 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)
9 O BUCKY SPLY 2
10 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 2)
11 O BUCKY 2 DR
--BUCKY 2 MOT
12 I
13 I BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
14 O GND
15 O +12V
16 O --12V
17 O +24V UNR
18 O GND
22 I
--DOOR
23 O DOOR RTN
24 O --ROOM LIGHT
26 O 220 VAC SW
27 O 115 VAC SW
36 O --SF PREP
37 O --FL EXP
39 O PT SPLY
42 O IC GND
47 O ROOM LIGHT SUP
48 O ROOM LIGHT SW
51
I PT INPUT
52 O --ALOE
53 O --READY
54 O 220 VAC SPLY
CONNECTOR J1 / J10
I/O
I
I/O
O
I
O
I/O
O
O
I
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SIGNAL
--4 IN SEL
--9 IN SEL
+12 VDC
V SYNC
--FT SW CMD
FL START
--CAM FL EXP
N.U.
--ABS
--6 IN SEL
BEEP
GND
--MEM EN
--MEM GATE
N.U.
I/O
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FLUORO CABLE
ADAPTATIONS
BOARDS
ATP CONSOLE BOARD

FLUORO
A.E.C.
CONNECTOR J4
SIGNAL
I/O PIN
C--FL DAT
O 1
I
2
--CAM FL EXP
I
3
FL--C DAT
I
4
FL--C CLK
+12V ISO
5
I
I/O 6
GND
7
I
C--FL CLK
I/O 8
GND
O 9
CAM SYNC
CONNECTOR J5
SIGNAL
I/O PIN
1
IC1 INPUT
I
I
2
IC3 INPUT
O
3
--FLD1 DR
O
4
--FLD3 DR
GND
5
O
6
I
IC2 INPUT
7
I
IC4 INPUT
8
O
--FLD2 DR
9
O
--STRT DR
AEC CABLE
COMPACT GENERATOR CABINET

FOR GENERATORS
LINE POWERED
L3 only for Three Phase
FOR GENERATORS
BATTERIES POWERED
1TB1--LINE
L
N
GND
CONNECTOR J13
SIGNAL
TIME1
TIME2
TIME3
TIME4
--PS (DSI) SEL
--CINE (DSA) SEL
--HCF SEL
SPARE IN
--TOMO PREP
--TOMO EXP
TOMO ON
EXT REF
GND
EXP STOP
--FS
I/O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
I
I/O
I
O
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
POWER
CONNECTOR J1
SIGNAL
I/O PIN
1
GND UNR
I
I
2
+12V UNR
I
3
+12VDC
O
--PWR OFF
4
--PWR ON
O
5
6
I
GND UNR
7
I
GND
8
I
+12V UNR
9
I
--12VDC
CONNECTOR J2
I/O
SIGNAL
O
--GEN OK
O
--SFD SEL
I
--THERMOSTAT 1
I
--SF PREP
GND (THERM. COM) I/O
I
--COLLIMATOR
TABLE ERR(COMP) I
O
--ROOM LIGHT
O
--READY
O
EXP OK
O
ABC OUT/--LEFT
O
--DIRECT SEL
I
PT INPUT
EXT SYNC (FL DSI) I
I
SPARE IN2
I
--SFC (--PT SEL)
I
--FL EXP
GND (DOOR RTN) I/O
I
--DOOR
I
--THERMOSTAT 2
--AUTO OFF
O
SPARE IN1
I
O
ALOE
O
--ALOE
O
--ACT EXP
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
INTERFACE CABLE
The ROTOR TUBE connections

are made to TS2 on the DRAC
TERMINAL BLOCK
4TS2 / 10TS2 / 11TS2
SIGNAL I/O
MAIN T1 O
AUX T1 O
COM T1 O
--THERMOSTAT 1 I
THERMOST. COMM. I
FAN 1 O
0 VAC O
GND O
MAIN T2 O
AUX T2 O
COM T2 O
--THERMOSTAT 2 I
THERMOST. COMM. I
FAN 2 O
0 VAC O
GND O
CONNECTOR J3
SIGNAL
I/O PIN
--EXP
O 1
O 2
C--HT DAT
I
3
HT--C DAT
O 4
--PREP
O 5
C--HT CLK
HT--C CLK
I
6
O 7
HV PT CRL
--KV DWN
O 8
I
LINE SYNC
9
O 10
--LINE CONT
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD O 11
--BUCKY EXP
I
12
I
--HT INL
13
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD O 14
O 15
--KV UP
COMMUNICATION CABLE
GND CABLE
HAND--SWITCH (or VET PEDAL SWITCH)

CONNECTOR J15
SIGNAL
I/O PIN
COM
O
1
I
2
PREP
I
3
EXP
N.U.
4
HAND--SWITCH
(or VET PEDAL SWITCH)
GND
STUD
GND
STUD
CONNECTOR 6J2
SIGNAL
PIN I/O
GND
1 O
2 O
+12V UNR
3 O
+12VDC
4
--PWR OFF
I
5
I
--PWR ON
6 O
GND
7 O
GND
+12V UNR
8 O
--12VDC
9 O
CONNECTOR 6J3
SIGNAL
PIN I/O
--EXP
O
1
C--HT DAT
O
2
I
3
HT--C DAT
--PREP
O
4
C--HT CLK
O
5
HT--C CLK
I
6
HV PT CRL
O
7
--KV DWN
O
8
LINE SYNC
I
9
--LINE CONT
O
10
O --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
11
--BUCKY EXP
I
12
--HT INL
I
13
O --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
14
--KV UP
O
15
16
O
GND
Adaptation Boards
F. GARCIA
01/09/06
NAME
DATE
CN 04/032
F. GARCIA
26/04/04
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
04/04/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
28/01/00
New interface
F. GARCIA
08/01/02
New interface
F. GARCIA
02/02/01
CN 00/211
F. GARCIA
04/01/01
New interface
F. GARCIA
05/05/00
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
TO ROTOR TUBE
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
NOTE :
TS2--6 is GND when
TS2 only has 6 terminals.
POWER CABLE
COMMUNICATION
TO SOCKET
} (Line
Voltage)
1
2
3
NOTE.-- For Generator with DRAC :
TERMINAL BLOCK 4TS3

PIN I/O SIGNAL
1
I --THERMOSTAT 1
2
I --THERMOSTAT 2
3
I THERM. COMM
5
I TABLE ERROR
7
I --SFC (--PT SEL)
8
O ALOE
10 O --GEN OK
11 O --SFD SEL
12 O --DIRECT SEL
15
O EXP OK
16
O --ACT EXP
O --AUTO OFF
17
18
I ABC OUT / --LEFT
19
I EXT SYNC(FL DSI)
20
I --COLLIMATOR
A
I Foot Switch Cmd.
GND
B
C
O Prep/Rdy Acq Rad
D
I Boost Fluoro
I Digital Exposure
E
NOTE :
Signal for Thermostats go to 4TS3
and then to TS2 or go directly to TS2
depending on Generator model
INTERFACE
TO EARTH GROUND
GND
TOMO CABLE
TOMO
TO LINE
} VOLTAGE
BREAKER
L1
L2/N
L3
NOTE -- For Serial Cabinet :

-- the Interface cable connections are factory
made to 3TS1, TS2 and 4TS3 terminal blocks.
-- 6J2 is not supplied, Power cable is directly
connected in factory to J1 of the ATP Console.
-- 6J3 is not supplied, Power cable is directly
connected in factory to J3 of the ATP Console.
LOCKS BOARD
TERMINAL BLOCK TB7
SIGNAL I/O PIN
24 VAC LAMP O 3
0 VAC LAMP O 4
+24 VDC LOCKS O 5
0 VDC LOCKS O 6
+24 VDC LOCKS O 7
0 VDC LOCKS O 8
SHEET / OF
1/2
} COLLIMATOR LAMP
LOCKS
(Table & Tube Stand)
54301045
DWG:
F
REV
COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS

NOTE.-- The Adaptation Boards are optional
GENERATOR CABINET
GENERATOR CABINET
AEC
ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3263--03)
to J5 of ATP Console Board
3TS1
16
15
17
18
J4
TB1
--12V
+12V
+24V UNR
GND
39
J2
to Ion Chamber #2
J3
to Ion Chamber #3
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (if required)
RF ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3514--04)
2
3
TB1
TB1
--12V
3
10
to Ion Chamber #1
J2
to Ion Chamber #2
J3
to Ion Chamber #3
J5
to Ion Chamber #4
+24V UNR
NOTE
Depending on the Ion Chamber,
make jumpers configuration and
interface as specific schematic IM-xxx
+12V
to Ion Chamber #4
J1
J5
J4
3TS1
to Ion Chamber #1
J1
to J5 of ATP Console Board
AEC
ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3263--03)
GND
4
10
NOTE
Depending on the Ion Chamber,
TOMO / BUCKY
ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3261--03/05)
TOMO / BUCKY
ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3261--03/05)
TB1
12
TB1
13
12
13
NOTE
Depending on the Tomo Device,
NOTE
Depending on the Tomo Device,
Interconnection of Adaptation Boards

for a Generator with RF Adaptation Board
Interconnection of Adaptation Boards

for a Generator without RF Adaptation Board
F
Adaptation Boards
F. GARCIA
01/09/06
E
D
CN 04/032
New interface
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
26/04/04
08/01/02
New interface
F. GARCIA
02/02/01
CN 00/211
F. GARCIA
04/01/01
New interface
F. GARCIA
05/05/00
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
04/04/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
28/01/00
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
2/2
54301045
DWG:
F
COMPACT GENERATORS
REV
SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE

Board
GENERATOR CABINET
J1
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
+24 VDC UNR

PWR GND
CHASSIS GND
SPARE
RXD
PREP/EXP COMM
EXP ORDER
POWER ON
+24 VDC UNR

PWR GND
CHASSIS GND
SPARE
TXD
PREP ORDER
POWER COMM
POWER OFF
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
NOTE: FOR GENERAL INTERCONNECTIONS REFER TO SCHEMATIC

54301045 (COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS)
SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR SERIAL CONSOLE (A7066--xx or A3149--01)

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
NOTES:
RXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO TXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE
TXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO RXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE
TPC or PC INTERFACE BOX

CONNECTOR J1
SIGNAL
I/O
CTS ( RXD-- )
I
I
RXD ( RXD+ )
TXD ( TXD+ ) O
RTS ( TXD-- ) O
SPARE PIN 5
ACT EXP O
O
LOGIC GND
CHASSIS GND O
CHASSIS GND O
+12 VDC
--ALOE
PWR GND O
PWR GND O
PREP/EXP COMM
O
EXP ORDER
I
PREP ORDER
I
POWER COMM I/O
I
POWER OFF
POWER ON
I
SPARE PIN 20
SPARE PIN 21
DOOR
DOOR RTN
+24 VDC UNR O
+24 VDC UNR O
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CONNECTOR J5
I/O SIGNAL
I
CTS ( RXD-- )
I
RXD ( RXD+ )
O TXD ( TXD+ )
O RTS ( TXD-- )
SPARE PIN 5
O ACT EXP
O LOGIC GND
O CHASSIS GND
O CHASSIS GND
+12 VDC
--ALOE
O PWR GND
O PWR GND
O PREP/EXP COMM
EXP ORDER
I
PREP ORDER
I
I/O POWER COMM
I
POWER OFF
I
POWER ON
SPARE PIN 20
SPARE PIN 21
DOOR
DOOR RTN
O +24 VDC UNR
O +24 VDC UNR
NOTE: REFER TO SCHEMATIC A6188--02 FOR

RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR TPC (A7067--xx or A3352--01)

SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR INTERFACE BOX (A3352--01)
NOTES:
RXD AND TXD ARE INTERNALLY REVERSED IN TPC OR PC INTERFACE BOX
REFER TO SCHEMATICS I/F--036 FOR OTHER PC INTERFACE BOX CONNECTIONS
NC 03 / 050
New schematic
F. GARCIA
08/01/02
Connections
F. GARCIA
02/02/01
REV DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
07/07/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
24/01/00
SHEET / OF
1/1
DWG:
54301052
C
REV
08/03/03
DATE
SEDECAL
SERIAL COMMUNICATION TO GENERATOR

ATP CONSOLE BD. ( Multilayer )

J2
GND
+12V UNR
+12V
OFF
ON
GND
GND
+12V UNR
--12V
POWER CABLE
J1
J3
COMMUNICATION
CABLE
PREP/EXP COMM
+12V UNR
EXP ORDER
+12V
POWER OFF
OFF
POWER ON
J5
14
PREP/EXP COMM
16
PREP ORDER
15
EXP ORDER
18
POWER OFF
19
POWER ON
17
POWER COMM
GND
TS1
GND
+12V UNR
15
10
--12V
52
11
-- ALOE
12
18
PWR GND
13
PWR GND
17
24
+24 VDC UNR
GND
J3
--EXP
--EXP
C--HT DAT
C--HT DAT
HT--C DAT
HT--C DAT
--PREP
--PREP
C--HT CLK
C--HT CLK
HT--C CLK
HT--C CLK
HV PT CRL
HV PT CRL
--KV DWN
LINE SYNC
LINE SYNC
--LINE CONT
10
10
--LINE CONT
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
11
11
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
12
12
13
--BUCKY EXP
13
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
14
14
--KV UP
15
15
--HT INL
POWER COMM
ON
--BUCKY EXP
PREP ORDER
GND
--KV DWN
J5 HARNESS
J14
+24V UNR
25
22
RS--xxx
J8
ACT EXP
RXD+
TXD+
+5V
GND
TXD-RXD--
--HT INL
22
23
23
51
21
ACT EXP
RXD+ ( RXD )
TXD+ ( TXD )
20
J7
GND
See Note
LOGIC GND
TXD-RXD-CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
/////
RS--232
DTR
PT INPUT
TXD
DOOR RTN
--KV UP
RXD
+24 VDC UNR

DOOR
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
ACT EXP
+12 VDC
Note.-- Signals between ( ) when RS--232 Serial Communication
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN 04/148
REV DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
09/09/04
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
04/04/04
REVISED
A. DIAZ
04/04/04
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
1/1
DWG:
A6188--03
A
REV
RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
PC INTERFACE BOX
(A6509--01)
HAND--SWITCH
J1
J2
14
16
15
25
+24V UNR
13
PWR GND
19
18
17
PREP/EXP COMM
PREP ORDER
EXP ORDER
COMPUTER
LAMP
CONNECTION
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOX CABLE
(A3352--01)
HANDSWITCH CABLE
(A3223--05)
J3
POWER ON
INTERFACE BOX--COMPUTER CABLE

(A3363--01)
AUTO ON/OFF
(A3179--01/02)
J1/J2
POWER OFF
J2
1
POWER COMM
+12V
GND
COM 1
N.U.
RS232
TxD
RxD
GND
9
21
PT INPUT
10
+12 VDC
11
--ALOE
22
DOOR
23
DOOR RTN
C
B
A
CN 03/050
F. GARCIA
09/05/03
CN 00/148
F. GARCIA
07/07/00
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
CN 04/148
F. GARCIA
////
GND
STUD
for external
connection
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/03/00
REVISED
A. DIAZ
30/03/00
SHEET / OF
1/1
I/F--036
C
10/09/04
SEDECAL
PC/SERIAL INTERFACE
REV
Anode supply
Black
X-ray Tube
mA
mA Red
Shunt
Shunt
mA +
Cathode supply
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. Daz
11/02/03
REVISED
A. Daz
11/02/03
SEDECAL
REV
5
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
4
SHEET / OF
54302035
1/1
REV
METALLIC CASE X-RAY TUBE CONN.
DATE
3
GENERATOR CABINET
(5)
(6)
ROOM
ELECTRICAL
CABINET
(4)
(7)
(3)
(1)
GND cable
(2)
( yellow/green, AWG #10 )
(12)
Central Ground
(2)
GND Stud
(3)
Cabinet Cover GND
(4)
Back Panel GND
(5)
Front Panel GND
(6)
Filter LF1 Cover GND
(7)
Adaptations Panel GND
(8)
Console GND (Bottom Panel)
(9)
Console Support GND
(10)
Pedestal Tube GND
(11)
Pedestal Cover GND
(12)
GND STUD
Note.-- (9) applicable only

for metallical Box Console
GND
OPERATOR CONSOLE
(1)
HV TANK
See Note
(9)
(8)
PEDESTAL
GND cable
( yellow/green, AWG #10 )
(Option)
(10)
(11)
DRAWING
REVISED
NAME
DATE
F. GARCIA
30/06/04
A. DIAZ
30/06/04
SEDECAL
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SHEET / OF
I/F--103
1/1
REV
EARTHING DIAGRAM
STATOR ROTALIX 350/351 CONNECTIONS

200
100
AUXILIARY
MAIN
10
COMMON
STATOR SUPER ROTALIX 350 CONNECTIONS

200
100
AUXILIARY
MAIN
10
COMMON
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
09/09/98
REVISED
A. DIAZ
09/09/98
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
1/1
Interconnection
Interconexin
I/F--021
REV
PHILIPS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE
STATOR 100 CONNECTIONS ( BIANGULIX and OPTILILIX TUBES )
Estator 100
BIANGULIX and OPTILIX ( SIEMENS )
Ib
Make
jumper
II
MAIN
Make
jumper
I
AUXILIARY
Ia
0
COMMON
Output
connector
NOTE
CONNECT THE STATOR CABLE AS SHOWN.
CHECK THE CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THE TUBE.
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
09/09/98
REVISED
A. DIAZ
09/09/98
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
1/1
Interconnection
Interconexin
I/F--024
REV
SIEMENS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE
Interconnection 1.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and externally powered
POWER
MODULE
X--RAY ROOM
TS1
ROOM LIGHT SUP
ROOM LIGHT SW
47
115 / 220 VAC
48
ROOM
WARNING
LIGHT
Interconnection 2.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and internally powered
POWER
MODULE
TS1
X--RAY ROOM
115 or 220 VAC SW
add jumper
ROOM LIGHT SUP
ROOM LIGHT SW
0 VAC
(in TS1-3 or TS1-10)
ROOM
WARNING
LIGHT
47
48
*
*
Select the power supply on TS1 according to the lamp voltage.

Add jumper to TS1-26 for 220 VAC or to TS1-27 for 115 VAC.
Interconnection 3,-- Additional option to meet some Local Electrical Codes
POWER
MODULE
TS1
ROOM LIGHT SUP
47
Contact 7A 1/6HP
125, 250 V AC
3A 30 V DC
48
ROOM LIGHT SW
E
D
C
B
A
REV
I/F update
F. GARCIA
20/06/04
DRAWING
I/F update
F. GARCIA
02/02/02
REVISED
I/F changing
F. GARCIA
05/05/99
TS1 changing
F. GARCIA
24/05/96
EMC
F. GARCIA
29/03/96
ISSUED BY
DATE
DESCRIPTION
NAME
DATE
F. GARCIA
04/19/95
A. DIAZ
SHEET / OF
04/19/95
SEDECAL
1/1
I/F--008
E
REV
ROOM WARNING LIGHT INTERFACE

INTERFAZ LAMPARA RAYOS--X SALA
TABLE
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic)

BUCKY MIDWEST
BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
Semi--Automatic
Bucky
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
B1
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11
K5
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5
BUCKY START
TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
B3
J4--8
BUCKY 1
DR CMD
K5
(SEE
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
C2
B8
TS1--3
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--2
TS1--1
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is

not connected to B3 terminal.
NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the
bucky according to AC input
NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and
C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
Dont add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and
remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal

B2 no est conectado al B3.
NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensin del
bucky segn la entrada AC
NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, aadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y
C2=470 nF, 250 VAC segn se muestra.
Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no aadir esa R2--C2, y quitar
las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.
8
7
Interf. board revised
REV
DESCRIPTION
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
1/4
Interconnection Cable
Cable de Inerconexin
I/F--001
8
TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE

INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
TABLE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic)

INTERFACE PANEL
Automatic
Bucky
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
B1
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11
K5
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5
BUCKY START
TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
B3
J4--8
BUCKY 1
DR CMD
K5
J4--9
ADD
JUMPER
B8
(SEE
NOTE 3)
(SEE NOTE 2)
TS1--3
R2
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
BUCKY SPLY
C2
TS1--2
TS1--1
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC

8
7
REV

Innomed added
DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
09/09/02
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
2/4
I/F--001
8

INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
TABLE
BUCKY ULTRAVIT
INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
1
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11
K5
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5
TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
BUCKY START
J4--8
J4--9
R2
C2
BUCKY 1
DR CMD
K5
(SEE
NOTE 3)
TS1--3
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--2
5
8
ADD
JUMPER
TS1--1
115/220 VAC
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that 2 terminal is

not connected to 4 terminal.
NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%;
and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 2

no est conectado al 4.
NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, aadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%;
y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC segn se muestra.
8
7
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
3/4
I/F--001
8

INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
TABLE
BUCKY DONG--A
INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
5
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11
K5
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
BUCKY START
K5
TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
J4--8
BUCKY 1
DR CMD
K5
(SEE
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
C2
TS1--3
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--2
3
1
ADD
JUMPER
TS1--1
115/220 VAC
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC


8
7
REV

Innomed added
DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
09/09/02
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
4/4
I/F--001
8

INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic)

BUCKY MIDWEST
INTERFACE PANEL
Semi--Automatic
Bucky
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
B1
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10
K4
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4
BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
B3
J4--7
BUCKY 2
DR CMD
K4
(SEE
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
TS1--10
0 VAC
C2
B8
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--9
TS1--8
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC


8
7
Interf board revised
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
1/4
I/F--002
8
VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE

INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL
REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic)

INTERFACE PANEL
Automatic
Bucky
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
B1
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10
K4
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4
BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
B3
J4--7
BUCKY 2
DR CMD
K4
J4--9
ADD
JUMPER
B8
TS1--10
(SEE
NOTE 3)
(SEE NOTE 2)
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
R2
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--9
C2
TS1--8
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC

8
7
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
2/4
I/F--002
8

REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
BUCKY ULTRAVIT
INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
1
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10
K4
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4
BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
J4--7
J4--9
R2
C2
BUCKY 2
DR CMD
K4
(SEE
NOTE 3)
TS1--10
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--9
5
8
ADD
JUMPER
TS1--8
115/220 VAC
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC


8
7
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
3/4
I/F--002
8

REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
BUCKY DONG--A
INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY
+24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
5
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10
K4
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4
BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
J4--7
J4--9
R2
C2
BUCKY 2
DR CMD
K4
(SEE
NOTE 3)
TS1--10
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--9
3
1
ADD
JUMPER
TS1--8
115/220 VAC
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC

{ TS1--26
for 220 VAC


8
7
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
4/4
I/F--002
8

REV
GENERATOR
POWER
MODULE
TB1
TS1
POWER INTERFACE Cable
AEC ADAPTATION BD. ( A326303 )
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC GND
16
12 VDC
12 VDC
15
+12 VDC
+12 VDC
17
+24 VDC
GND
18
GND
IC1 OUT
+12 VDC
FLD2IC1
6
7
jumper
10
TP6
IC4
CONSOLE
ION CHAMBER #1
J1
42
J5
AEC INTERFACE Cable
5
7
GND
IC4 INPUT
IC1 INPUT
IC2 INPUT
IC3 INPUT
FLD 2 DR
FLD 1 DR
FLD 3 DR
R4
1K
J4
RP1
10K
5
6
7
C8
0.1 uF
U1
LF347
+ 5
7
8
JP12
A
+12 VDC
R6
RP2
3K01
10K
R5
6
5
1K
RP2
10K
7
8
RP1
10K
IC4 OUT
IC1
+12 VDC
R12
RP3
3K01
10K
R11
9
R10
6
5
1K
U1
1K
RP3
LF347
8
10K
10
C10
+
7 7
8
0.1 uF
RP4
8 10K
JP9
IC1 OUT
B A
TP1
RP4
10K
5
6
+12 VDC
R7
RP3
3K01
10K
R8
13
R9
2
1
1K
U1
1K
RP3
LF347
14
10K
12
C9
+
3 3
4
0.1 uF
RP4
4 10K
JP10
IC2 OUT
B A
TP2
IC2
RP4
10K
1
2
4
U1
LF347
+
FLD1IC1
FLD3IC1
STRTIC1
11
TP4
1
2
U1
LF347
+ 3
3
1
C7
0.1 uF
JP11
A
IC1 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
RESET
Screen
TP5
GND
+12 VDC
R1
3K01
RP1
10K
2
R3
1K
C4
100uF
35V
C2
0.1 uF
12 VDC
IC3
C3
100uF
35V
C1
0.1 uF
RP2
10K
2
1
RP2
10K
3
4
RP1
10K
1
12 VDC
+12 VDC
FLD3IC2
Shield
C6
100uF
35V
CR2
1N4148
13
JP8
A
13
JP6
A
C5
0.1 uF
6
13
K2
6
13
JP14
A
FLD2IC1
K11
CR3
1N4148
K6
JP4
A
FLD2IC2
K7
6
13
JP2
A
+12 VDC
GND
IC1 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
RESET
FLD1IC2
Screen
6
13
B
FLD2IC3
13
JP16
A
13
B
FLD1IC3
6
CR4
1N4148
JP7
A
K8
6
JP5
A
B
13
K4
6
JP15
A
B
13
FLD3IC1
K13
6
FLD2IC3
1
B
13
FLD3IC2
13
FLD3IC3
ION CHAMBER Cable
Preamplifier
K14
IC3 OUT
K12
ION CHAMBER #3
J3
1
K3
FLD1IC1
STRTIC2
K15
Preamplifier
12 VDC
FLD1IC2
9
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC3 OUT
IC2 OUT
K10
ION CHAMBER #2
J2
R2
1K
FLD2IC2
STRT DR
Preamplifier
12 VDC
+12 VDC
GND
IC1 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
RESET
FLD1IC3
FLD3IC3
STRTIC3
Screen
TP3
ST
K9
6
R13
10K
CR1
1N4148
13
JP3
A
B
1
8
STRTIC1
K5
6
JP1
A
13
K1
6
JP13
A
13
STRTIC2
K16
6
13
B
8
STRTIC3
IC4 OUT
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12

POS. A NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
POS. B OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
Ion Chamber
Type
Jumpers
Jumpers
Jumpers
JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
IC1=IC2=IC3
IC1=IC2
/
/
/
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
Note. Compatible interface with preamplifier for Ion Chamber types :

ExposAID
ION CHAMBER #4
J5
ION CHAMBER Cable
Preamplifier
12 VDC
+12 VDC
GND
IC1 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
RESET
Screen
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
07/08/96
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/96
SHEET / OF
1/1
DWG:
IM015
A
REV
Vacutec 70145/70151
Comet Ion Chambers with PA021 Preamplifier
A
Version 03
REV DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
10/10/99
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
AEC AID / VACUTEC / COMET COMPATIBILITY
--FIELD SEL 3
F
COMM
--12 VDC
+12 VDC
+24 VDC
4
TB1
RELAY 4
RELAY 1
IC4
10
GND
J4
5
GND
IC4 INPUT
IC1 INPUT
+12 VDC
R6
RP2
3K01
5
6
10K
6
R5
-R4
6
5
1K
U1
1K
RP2
LF347
7
10K
5
+
C8
7 7
8
0.1 uF
RP1
8 10K
JP12
IC4 OUT
B A
RP1
10K
TP6
TP1
+12 VDC
RP4
10K
IC1
5
R10
1K
-- 9
RP3
10K
5
RP3
10K
10
+
8
7 7
RP4
8 10K
U1
LF347
C10
0.1 uF
JP9
B A
R12
3K01
TP2
1
R9
1K
14
IC1 OUT
+12 VDC
RP4
10K
IC2
R11
1K
C9
0.1 uF
IC2 INPUT
JP10
A
RP3
10K
-- 13
2
1
U1
RP3
LF347
12 10K
+
4
3 3
RP4
4 10K
2
R7
3K01
R8
1K
11
IC2 OUT
C3
100uF
35V
TP4
RP1
10K
IC3
1
-- 2
U1
LF347
1
C7
0.1 uF
JP11
B A
3
3 3 4
RP1
4 10K
TP5
GND
IC2 OUT
IC3 OUT
FLD2--IC2
FLD1--IC2
FLD3--IC2
--FLD 3 DR
STRT--IC2
--STRT DR
8
9
--FLD 1 DR
+12 VDC
--12 VDC
+12 VDC
GND
IC1 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
--RESET
5
3
2
6
4
COMM
--12 VDC
+12 VDC
GND
IC2 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
--RESET
J3
K10
C6
100uF
35V
C5
0.1 uF
CR2
1N4148
JP8
A
13
B
FLD2--IC1
K11
6
CR3
1N4148
K6
13
FLD2--IC3
K3
6
13
B
8
8
9
IC3 OUT
FLD2--IC3
13
FLD1--IC3
K14
JP16
1
13
FLD1--IC2
JP2
A
K15
JP14
1
13
FLD2--IC2
13
FLD1--IC1
K7
6
K2
JP6
JP4
1
13
FLD1--IC3
FLD3--IC3
STRT--IC3
K12
CR4
1N4148
13
A
B
FLD3--IC1
JP5
K8
JP7
13
A
B
K4
6
13
B
8
FLD3--IC3
3
2
6
4
K9
R13
10K
CR1
1N4148
JP3
13
A
B
STRT--IC1
JP1
K5
6
13
A
B
K1
6
STRT--IC3
K16
13
B
13
STRT--IC2
IC4 OUT
5
3
2
6
4
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12

POS. A -- NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
POS. B -- OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
Ion Chamber
Type
IC1=IC2=IC3
IC1=IC2
/
/
/
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
GND
IC3 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
--RESET
COMM
--12 VDC
+12 VDC
GND
IC4 OUTPUT
CENTER AREA
LEFT AREA
RIGHT AREA
--RESET
Note.-- Version 03 as CN 99/45
Jumpers
Jumpers
Jumpers
JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
--12 VDC
+12 VDC
J5
1
JP13
1
COMM
K13
13
FLD3--IC2
JP15
8
TP3
ST
COMM
J2
1
--12 VDC
--FLD 2 DR
STRT--IC1
R2
1K
1
RP2
10K
FLD3--IC1
R1
3K01
RP2
10K
FLD1--IC1
C4
100uF
35V
+12 VDC
C2
0.1 uF
--12 VDC
FLD2--IC1
C1
0.1 uF
R3
1K
IC3 INPUT
+12 VDC
4
-U1
LF347
RELAY 2
IC1 OUT
J1
RELAY 3
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
07/07/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
07/07/99
SEDECAL
D
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SHEET / OF
1/1
DWG:
A3263--03
REV
AEC ADAPTATION
ADAPTACION AEC
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Data Book
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
APR 1, 2001
First edition
FEB 10, 2003
Documentation update
JAN 25, 2005
NOV 2, 2004
OCT 26, 2006
Extended Memory Locations
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
DB-1004R4

Data Book
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Maintenance History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB-1004R4
Data Book
ii
DB-1004R4
Data Book
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This Data Book is the register of the Configuration and Calibration data of the
Generator and the register of each Periodic Maintenance Service carried out.
Keep this book always with the equipment for reference.
Note
Enter the data with a pencil in order to modify them later due to
future changes.
If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are

replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have
not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare
Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the
values noted in this document.
Also, make some exposures using different techniques and
Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated
correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures.
Note
1.1
Verify that Configuration Control Sheet and Final Test Results

pages from factory have been included with the equipment.
INSTALLATION DATA
Enter the following information.
HOSPITAL
INSTALLED AND TESTED BY
DB-1004R4
DATE
Data Book
1.2
MAINTENANCE HISTORY
Enter the following information after each data modification in this book or
Periodic Maintenance Service.
DATE
PERFORMED BY
SERVICE NOTES
DB-1004R4
Data Book
SECTION 2
DATA TABLES
Table 2-1
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board
3024SW1 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1
2
3
4
Table 2-2
3024SW2 POSITION
1
2
3
4
Table 2-3
3024SW3 and 3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board
Note
DB-1004R4
Dip switch 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 is not used for configuration

but all their switches must be set in Off position.
Data Book
Table 2-4
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board
3000SW2 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table 2-5
Workstations
WORKSTATION PUSH
PUSH-BUTTONS
BUTTONS
(Draw the push-buttons or
combinations in the cells)
VALUE ON DISPLAYS
kV
(Tube)
mAs
(Device-WM)
mA
(AEC-IC)
ms
(kV Tracking)
(option)
AVAILABLE
AEC AREAS
WS1
WS2
WS3
WS4
WS5
WS6
WS7
WS8
WS9
WS10
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-6
Jumpers in other Generator Boards
GENERATOR BOARDS
JUMPERS POSITION
JP1 and JP2
HT CONTROLLER
JP3, JP5 and JP6

JP4
FILAMENT CONTROL
JP1
W1
INTERFACE CONTROL
W2
W3 to W10
JP1, JP2 and JP3
JP4
JP5
JP6
Connector J8 configured for RS232 so:
JP9, JP10 and JP11 in A. JP7, JP8, JP21
and JP22 do not matter jumpers position
ATP CONSOLE CPU
Connector J8 configured for RS422 so:

JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 and JP11 in B.
JP21 and JP22 do not affect jumpers position
JP12
JP13
JP14
JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18
JP19
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-7
AEC Configuration
JUMPERS POSITION
AEC Control Board
A3012--_____
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
JUMPERS POSITION
AEC Adaptation Board
A3263--03
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8

JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-8
Fluoro Configuration
OPERATION MODE
FIXED RATE PULSED FLUORO
VARIABLE RATE PULSED FLUORO
ABC
JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD

(A3213-XX)
INSERTED
REMOVED
W1
W2
Always inserted (installed)
JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX)

JP4
Always in B position -- Camera
JUMPERS POSITION
RF Adaptation Board
A3514--_____
JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP12, JP13, JP14

JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-9
MEMORY LOCATION
VALUE
MEMORY LOCATION
E01
E17
E02
E18
E03
E19
E04
E20
E05
E21
E06
E22
E07
E23
E08
E24
E09
E25
E10
E26
E11
E27
E12
E28
E13
E29
E14
E30
E15
E31
E16
E32
MEMORY LOCATION
(only for Capacitor
Discharge Generator)
VALUE
VALUE
E67
E68
E69
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-10
Rotor Acceleration Time Configuration
3000SW2-2
OPERATION MODE
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
Rotor Speed
Low Speed
High Speed
TUBE-1
ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME
AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME
3000SW2-7
3000SW2-8
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
_____ seconds
TUBE-2
3000SW2-5
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-6
CLOSED (ON)
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
_____ seconds
3000SW2-4
FLUORO ROTOR
HOLD-OVER TIME
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
Status: ______
Table 2-11
LV-DRAC Configuration
3243SW1
3243SW2
3243SW3
3243SW4
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-12
mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-1
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT
mA
A STATION
40
50
80
120
10
12.5
16
20
25
32
40
50
64 (or 63 or 65)
80
100
125
160
200
250
320
400
500
640 (or 630 or 650)
800
1000
Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
10
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-12 (Cont.)

mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-2
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT
mA
A STATION
40
50
80
120
10
12.5
16
20
25
32
40
50
64 (or 63 or 65)
80
100
125
160
200
250
320
400
500
640 (or 630 or 650)
800
1000
Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
DB-1004R4
11
Data Book
12
DB-1004R4
CF-1018R3
Configuration
Configuration
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
OCT 30, 2003
APR 1, 2005
Documentation upgrade
AUG 1, 2005
Anode Stator Configuration
OCT 10, 2005
First edition
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
CF-1018R3

Configuration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Configuration and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Basic Configuration of Generator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
AEC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
FLUORO Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
Exposure Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1.7
Workstations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2.1
Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2.2
How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
2.3
Limit of Maximum kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
X-RAY TUBE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
3.1
X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
3.2
Generators with LF-RAC (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3.2.1
Stator Voltage and Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3.2.1.1
3.2.1.2
24
3.2.2
CF-1018R3
Configuration for One or Two Tubes with Standard Stator

Configuration for One or Two Tubes with the same
Starting Voltage at 110 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1.3 Configuration for Two Tubes with Different
Starting Voltage and Capacitor or One Tube
with Starting Voltage at 330 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time, RAD Filament Setting Time,
FLUORO Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
25
27
Configuration
Section
Page
3.3
ii
Generators with LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3.3.1
Anode Stator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3.3.2
Programming of RAD Filament Setting Time and

FLUORO Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3.4
Anode Rotation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3.5
Focal Spots Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
X-RAY TUBE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 1
INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

Configuration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout
procedures that must be carried out before making X-ray exposures.
Functional characteristics of this Generator are defined at the time of
installation.
Calibration and some configuration data are stored in a non-volatile memory
chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board in the Power Cabinet.
When the initial setup and checkout has been completed the Generator will be
ready for Calibration.
Note
Record all the configuration settings in the Data Book.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY

INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT.
THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER
RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR
APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
The Generator configuration is determined by:
X-ray tube(s) number, model and use.
System requirements (Bucky, Tomo, AEC, ...)
Maximum kV, kW.
Specific versions of U24-EPROM on the ATP Console CPU Board and U5 on

the HT Controller Board are based on the Generator configuration. (Refer to
Illustration 1-1).
The system configuration and test switches are:
DIP SWITCH LOCATION
System Configuration
Test
No used for Configuration
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board
CF-1018R3
FUNCTION
System Configuration and Test
Configuration
Illustration 1-1
EPROM and Switch locations
J7
J8
3024SW2
3024SW3
U24
3024SW4
3024SW1
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD -- A3024
3000SW2
U5
HT CONTROLLER -- A3000
INTERFACE CONTROL -- A3009
POWER SUPPLY
FILAMENT DRIVER
A3004
POWER CABINET -- FRONT PANEL
CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.1
CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES

ATP Console Dip Switches must be configured with the Generator turned OFF,
and they are read when the Generator is turned ON again.
1.1.1
3024SW1 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD

Set dip switch 3024SW1 in accordance with the Table 1-1.
Table 1-1
System Configuration Dip Switch 3024SW1 on the ATP Console CPU Board
3024SW1 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
60 Hz *1)
50 Hz *1)
--
Normal -- Application mode.

Exposures are inhibited when
Door Interlock Switch is opened.
Not used. Set in OFF position.
Not used.
Not used. Set in OFF position.
Not used.
Note.--
1.1.2
*1) This switch is related with the frequency of the Rotor Controller. For Generators with High Speed Starter
(LV-DRAC) or Generators Powered through Batteries with Stand-Alone set always SW1-1 to 60 Hz, in the rest of
Generators set SW1-1 in accordance with the Power Line Frequency.

Set dip switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as Table 1-2.
Table 1-2
Test Dip Switch 3024SW2 on the ATP Console CPU Board
3024SW2 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
Skips reception with the HT Controller. Use only

for display purposes, troubleshooting or Demo
Consoles when there is no Power Module. Be
sure that J3 connector is not plugged to the ATP
Console CPU Board.
Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is

not emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.
Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is

emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.
Service Mode .
kV Log (Renard) Scale Mode for kV variation

(kV changes in logarithmic steps) (if available).
kV Lineal Scale Mode for kV variation (Normal

mode) (kV changes one by one).
CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.1.3

Dip switch 3024SW3 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be
set in Off position.
1.1.4

Dip Switch 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be
set in Off position.
1.1.5
3000SW2 - HT CONTROLLER BOARD

HT Controller Dip Switches can be configured while the Generator is ON except
Dip Switch 3000SW2-1.
Set dip switch 3000SW2 as indicated in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3
Test Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board in the Power Module
3000SW2
POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
Normal.
Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time,

RAD Filament Setting Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament
Hold-over Time *1) *2)
Normal.
Bypasses: Filament, Rotor Ready, Error E11. *1) *3)
Normal -- Not used.
Not used.
Normal -- Digital mA Loop Closed
Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant *1)
125 kV *4)
150 kV *4)
All Generators except Tube-2 for RAD
Generators with Tube-2 for RAD only.
Filament Boosting for Tube--1
No Filament Boosting for Tube--1 *5)
Filament Boosting for Tube--2
No Filament Boosting for Tube--2 *5)
Notes.-- *1) Set in Closed (On) position only for Calibration and Testing procedures when indicated in the Service Manual.
*2) Note that SW2-1 in Closed (On) position is only set to program the Rotor Acceleration Time, Rad Filament Setting
Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time, therefore it changes the functions of Switches SW2-2 and SW2-4 to
SW2-8. Refer to Section 3.
*3) This turns off the filaments so no radiation will be produced during the exposure.
WARNING: THE kV OUTPUT OF THE HV TRANSFORMER WILL BE WHATEVER IS SET BY THE CONSOLE. IF
THE X-RAY TUBE HV CABLES ARE NOT CONNECTED INTO THE HV TRANSFORMER, FILL COMPLETELY BOTH
HV RECEPTACLES WITH HV OIL.
*4) Set SW2-5 according to the Generator kV rating (refer to the Generator model and/or specifications).
*5) Set to No Filament Boosting when using X-ray Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .
CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.2
BASIC CONFIGURATION OF GENERATOR BOARDS

The following Jumpers are factory set or removed to configure the Generator
Boards according to the customer order. Check the jumper positions in the
Generator Boards.
GENERATOR BOARDS
JUMPERS POSITION
JP1 and JP2 in 2
HT CONTROLLER
FILAMENT CONTROL
JP3, JP5 and JP6 in 2 and JP4 in 1 : for Compact Generators.

JP3, JP5 and JP6 in 1 and JP4 in 2 : for Vertical Generators.
JP1 in A
W1 in 2--3
INTERFACE CONTROL
W2 in 1--2
W3 to W10 in A : for positive High Voltage supply for Ion Chamber
W3 to W10 in B : for negative High Voltage supply for Photomultiplier Tube
JP1, JP2 and JP3 in B (soldered)
JP4 in B (Cam-Sync)
JP5 in B : Standard
JP5 in C : for R&F / DSI Generators with AEC Control Board A3012--02/05
JP6 in A (soldered)
ATP CONSOLE CPU
Connector J8 configured for RS232 so: JP9, JP10 and JP11 in A.

JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position
JP12 removed
JP13 installed (set) : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is installed
JP13 removed : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is not installed
JP14 installed (soldered)
JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 removed
JP19 in A (soldered)
CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.3
AEC CONFIGURATION
Configure the following Jumpers on the AEC Control Board (located over the
ATP Console CPU Board) and on the AEC Adaptation Board when this
option is installed in the Generator Cabinet.
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05)

JUMPER
DESCRIPTION
JP1
A
B
C
FOR TV CAMERA
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
JP2
A
B
FOR TV CAMERA
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP4
A
B
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC

FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG
JP3
A
B
FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY

FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
NOTE:
A3012-05:
A3012
05: JP1
JP1-C,
C JP2-A
JP2 A AND JP4
JP4-B
B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
ATS DIG
A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA
A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP3-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY
JP3-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY
HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / Gy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber)
LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / Gy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)

JUMPER
JP1
A
B
C
FOR TV CAMERA
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
EXTERNAL kV CONTROL
JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA

JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL
JP2
A
B

FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
JP3
FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4
JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
CF-1018R3
Configuration
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)

JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER TYPE
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 (Default)
IC1 = IC2 = IC3
IC1 = IC2
IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
1.4
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT (Default)
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

TP1 -- R11
TP2 -- R8
TP4 -- R2
TP12 -- R5
FLUORO CONFIGURATION
Fluoro configuration depends on position of jumpers W1 and W2 in the Fluoro
CPU Board and jumper JP4 in the Console CPU Board, as indicated below:
JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD

(A3213-XX)
INSERTED
REMOVED
W1
ABC not enable
ABC enable
W2
Always inserted (installed)
JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX)

JP4
CF-1018R3
Always in B position -- Camera
Configuration
Also, configure the following Jumpers on the optional RF Adaptation Board.

RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04)
JUMPER
POSITION
Set all jumpers
JP1, JP3, JP4,

JP8, JP9,
JP10, JP12,
JP13, JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
Remove all jumpers

Set only JP1,
JP8 and JP12
Set
FUNCTION
+24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
Removed
External supply for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
ZOOM 1 output selected from Generator (--9 IN SEL)
ZOOM 1 output selected from Table or external control
LIH output through a N.O. contact
LIH output through a N.C. contact
LIH output selected from an external enable signal
LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
EXP ON/END output active for only RAD exposure
EXP ON/END output active for Fluoro and RAD exposure
For EXP ON output active along the RAD exposure
For EXP END output active about 50 ms pulse at the end of the RAD exposure
For ABC Window adjustment
For normal operation
Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the negative edge of Exp. Sync+
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from composite video signal (video in)
Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the positive edge of Exp. Sync+
For ABC OUT signal from composite video signal (video in)
For ABC OUT signal from a negative external ABC signal
For ABC OUT signal from a positive external ABC signal
ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal
ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System
Set
Removed
Set
Removed
ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal
ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System
Normal position (composite video signal referenced to the Generator ground)
To reduce noise (composite video signal isolate from Generator ground)
Normal position (Fluoro order from the Table sent directly to the Generator)
For Fluoro order enable (Fluoro order from the Table sent to the Image System)
CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.5
GENERATOR SERVICE MODE

The Generator Service Mode (GSM) program allows the access to the service
screens for Reading the Exposure Counters, Configuration and Calibration
procedures.
Start the GSM program by clicking on the TechService icon in the path:
StartMenu / Programs / Tech Service / TechService. (This is the path by default
after installing the program from the CD-Rom).
After accessing to the GSM program, a black Information Area appears at the
lower right corner of the screen to show some messages related with the
process (a.e. Power Up the Generator).
If after pressing the Configuration, Calibration or Auto Calibration buttons,
the GSM program prompts an error message: Please check calibration dip
switch and toggle with power off; it means that these functions are disabled
because position of dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board
is not in Service Mode Allowed. Turn OFF the generator, change the dip
switch 3024SW2-3 to Closed (ON) position, turn ON the generator and start the
GSM program again.
Illustration 1-2
GSM Menu
CF-1018R3
Configuration
The screens to Read Exposure Counters, to enter in Configuration, Manual

Calibration or Auto Calibration are displayed after selecting the respective
button on the right side. Press again the selected button (in yellow on the right
side) to return to the GSM menu.
The Cancel button can also be used to return to the GSM menu, specially if
the others buttons are disable.
Note
Whenever the Configuration menu is closed (by pressing any of

Configuration or Cancel buttons) a double-beep will sound
confirming the storage of the values set for each workstation.
During operation of the GSM program the color of the selected buttons changes
to yellow when they are selected.
Press the Close button to exit from the GSM program.
Exposure status indicators for Ready and X-ray On are located on the upper
right area of the GSM screens. The Information Area displays data related to
the service mode, remaining heat units, working mode, errors indicators, etc.
When an error code or message is displayed on the GSM program press the
Reset Error button to reset the error indication.
Illustration 1-3
Status and Error Indicators
Workstation Selected
Exposure Indicators
Cancel Button
Button of Menu Selected
Reset Error Button

Error Indicator
Information Areas
10
CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.6
EXPOSURE COUNTERS
The Exposure Counters display the number of Rad exposures made with any
of the X-ray Tubes and the accumulated Fluoro exposure time (in hours and
minutes) made with the Tube-2.
1.
Enter in the GSM program and select the Read Exposure Counters
button.
2.
This screen shows the Exposure Counters.
3.
Exit from this screen by pressing the Read Exposure Counters button
or the Cancel button again.
Illustration 1-4
Exposure Counters
CF-1018R3
11
Configuration
1.7
WORKSTATIONS CONFIGURATION
This screen is used to view the configuration of the Workstations (Tube, WM,
Ion Chamber, etc.) and the AEC Areas selected by default for each Workstation
in the system (optional).
The workstations can be configured according to the customer preferences or
default. If a workstation is configured with the value Tube -- 0, its button can
not be selected during operation.
CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATION
Note
Note
This procedure has to be performed always that ATP Console

CPU Board is replaced by a new one.
1.
Enter in the GSM program and select the Configuration button.
2.
Once in Configuration mode, if the Generator has installed the Fluoro

CPU Board the program has to indicate RF on the RAD/RF window.
This means that Fluoro functions are enabled.
If the Fluoro functions are not enabled (RF does not appear) the
Fluoro Display and functions will be deactivated after selecting a
workstation for Tube-2. In this case, exit, check connection
between the Fluoro CPU and ATP Console CPU Board and enter
in Configuration again until the RF indication appears.
Illustration 1-5
Configuration
12
CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.
DISPLAY
1st Value
2nd Value
3rd Value
4th Value
Select the first workstation to be configured, by pressing the respective

button (only the icon of the selected workstation has different color). The
console shows one of the following values:
FUNCTION
VALUE
TUBES
DEVICES -WORKING MODE
ION
CHAMBERS
kV TRACKING
(OPTIONAL)
DESCRIPTION
No-configured workstation
Tube-1
Tube-2
0 -- Direct
Direct (No Bucky)
1 -- Bucky 1
Bucky-1
2 -- Bucky 2
Bucky-2
3 -- STD Tomo
Standard Tomo *1)
4 -- STD RF
Standard RF (Spot Film Device)
5 -- DSI
Digital RAD and Fluoro *2)
6 -- Cine
Cine *2)
7 -- DSA
DSA *2)
0
No AEC
Ion Chamber-1 (IC-1)
Photomultiplier (PT-INPUT)
Formula-1
Formula-2
Formula-3
Formula-4
Formula-5
Formula-6
Formula-7
Formula-8
Notes:
-- Some of listed values are not configurable depending on the Generator model .
*1) Only when the Tomo is controlled from the Generator. In this case, the workstation has to be configured as Tube 1 or 2,
Device STD Tomo and Ion Chamber 0.
If the Tomo is controlled from the Table, the workstation has to be configured as Tube 2, Device STD RF and Ion Chamber 0.
*2) These Devices are only available for Generators provide with interface option for Digital Systems. These workstations has to
be configured as Tube 2.
CF-1018R3
13
Configuration
Note
4.
Set the new value by pressing the corresponding Increase or

Decrease buttons. Value on KV Tracking (optional) assigns by default
one Formula for Zero Point operation mode to the selected RF
workstation. Set also the selected AEC Areas by default for each
Workstation in the system (optional).
5.
Select the next workstations to be configured and set the respective

values of each one.
6.
Exit from configuration mode by pressing the Configuration button, then

a double-bip will sound confirming the process.
7.
Exposures made from workstations configured with:

G
Device Direct (No Bucky), Bucky-1, Bucky-2 and Standard Tomo

are only enabled with the internal Preparation and Exposure
signals controlled by the Handswitch or Rad Footswitch.
Device Standard RF and DSI are only enabled with the

external signals for Preparation, RAD Exposure and Fluoro
Exposure. Fluoro can only be made from this Device
selection.
Device Infimed: DSI, Cine, DSA are only enabled with the
external Digital Preparation and Exposure signals connected
to Terminal Block 4TS3 of the Generator Cabinet.
1) Optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board (in the Power

Cabinet) is required to configure more than two Buckys or one
Tomo Device in the system.
For system without the optional Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board,
it can only work directly with two Buckys, and the value assigned
to them must be 1 and 2 in the second value.
2) TOMO must be always related to Bucky-1. Only one TOMO can
be used in the system, so only one of the workstations should be
configured with the value 3 in the second value.
3) Optional AEC Control Board (connected to the Console CPU
Board) is required to work with AEC.
Optional AEC Adaptation Board is required to configure any
no-standard or more than one Ion Chambers in the system.
14
CF-1018R3
Configuration
DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
Default configuration sets some default values to each workstation. It only
should be used to re-initialize the workstation configuration when the complete
configuration has been lost or it is not possible to select any workstation.
CF-1018R3
1.
Enter in the GSM program and select the Configuration button.
2.
Press the Default Configuration button.
3.
Exit from configuration mode by pressing the Configuration button, then

a double-bip will sound confirming the process.
4.
It is recommended to perform a proper configuration of each workstation

in the system after a default configuration.
15
Configuration
16
CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 2
2.1
EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING
EXTENDED MEMORY LOCATIONS

Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended
Memory Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each
Memory Location. (Refer to Table 2-1)
Note
For generators with only one Radiographic X-ray Tube, this tube
have to be configured, calibrated and used as Tube-1.
Note
For generators with a Fluoroscopic X-ray Tube or DSI (Digital

RAD), this tube have to be configured, calibrated and used as
Tube-2.
For these generators, the value of the E17 Memory Location is not
readable as Tube-2 -- Filament stand-by (Autocalibrated).
Note
CF-1018R3
Generators with a single X-ray Tube for Fluoroscopy / Spot Film

/ DSI (Digital RAD) require to store the respective values of the
Memory Locations:
-- E17: Tube-2 -- Fluoro filament setting.
-- E18: Tube-2 -- Fluoro tube type.
-- E29 and E31: Tube-2 -- Exposure Time adjustments.
-- Other required Memory Locations.
17
Configuration
Table 2-1
MEMORY LOCATION
FUNCTION
E01
TUBE-1 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)
E02
TUBE-1 -- RAD tube type
E03
Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)
E04
AEC-1 calibration
E05
High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)
E06
kV Loop
E07
Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower value)
E08
AEC-1 tracking
E09
AEC-2 calibration
E10
AEC-2 tracking
E11
Not used.
E12
AEC Density Scale
E13
TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E14
Not used.
E15
TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
E16
Not used.
E17*
VALUE
TUBE-2 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)

TUBE-2 -- FLUORO filament setting
E18
TUBE-2 -- RAD or FLUORO tube type
E19
Maximum FLUORO kV
E20
AEC-3 calibration
E21
Not used.
E22
Not used.
E23
AEC-4 calibration / Photomultiplier AEC calibration (SF camera)
E24
AEC-3 tracking / AEC-4 tracking (equal value for both)
E25
FLUORO mA display calibration at 50 kV
E26
E27
E28
Not used.
E29
TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E30
Not used.
E31
TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
E32
Not used.
* Note.-- For Fluoroscopic use, value in E17 means Fluoro filament setting and must be manually set
18
CF-1018R3
Configuration
2.2
HOW TO ENTER AND STORE DATA IN THE EXTENDED MEMORY

The Extended Memory data are entered from the Console when the unit is in
service mode. Access to memory locations as indicated below:
Note
1.
Turn the Generator OFF and set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the
ATP Console CPU Board in On position to permit the service mode.
2.
Power ON the System and select the Manual Calibration button on the
GSM program.
3.
Select the needed Workstation (WS) using the Up and Down buttons,
then press the OK button to enter in calibration mode.
In calibration mode, only the kV and mA parameters can be

modified, values for Time and mAs are factory programmed.
4.
Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position. The mA

Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01), they will
continue sequentially as the Increase mA button is pressed.
The values stored in each location are shown on the Calibration Value
Display after pressing the Read button or after pressing the Increase
or Decrease buttons of this panel. Since these buttons are also used
to increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added
or subtracted from the reading, to obtain the current stored value.
Note
CF-1018R3
5.
Select the new value by pressing the Increase and Decrease buttons.
Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on the
calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.
6.
Store the new value by pressing the Store button (Check-summ

function).
If the Store button is not pressed after a new value is selected,

no modified data will be retained.
7.
Exit from calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button

again.
8.
Turn the Generator OFF and set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP
Console CPU Board in Off position to place the Generator in normal
mode.
19
Configuration
Illustration 2-1
Calibration
Calibration Value Panel
20
CF-1018R3
Configuration
2.3
LIMIT OF MAXIMUM kW
The Maximum kW of the Generator is factory set according to the Generator
performance. Generator kW can be limited to a lower value.
Note
Note
CF-1018R3
This limit can be set to a lower value to match the maximum

Generator power to the Line power, due to a high line impedance
(refer to Pre-installation document).
1.
Enter in calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on

the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) and press the OK
button.
2.
Select the E07 Memory Location (memory location is shown on the mA

Display).
3.
Set the new limit of Maximum kW by pressing the Increase or

Decrease calibration buttons and store the value by pressing the
Store button.
4.
Exit from calibration mode.
Record configuration data for E07 in the Data Book.
21
Configuration
22
CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 3
3.1
X-RAY TUBE SELECTION
X-RAY TUBE INSERT PROTECTION CURVES

In order to properly select the X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves for the Tubes
connected to the Generator, perform the following procedure:
Note
CF-1018R3
1.

the GSM program. Select one of the workstation (WS) related to the
X-ray Tube to be configured. Then press the OK button.
2.
Select the respective memory location, E02 for Tube-1 or E18 for Tube-2
(memory location is shown on the mA Display).
3.
Identify in Section 4 X-ray Tube Data, the X-ray tube that is being
installed and note its tube type number.
4.
Set the tube number by pressing the Increase or Decrease calibration

buttons until the correct number is showed on the Calibration Value
panel.
5.
Store the value by pressing the Store button.
6.
Verify that the tube code (ID) shown in the mAs Display is the same of
the tube code listed in Section 4 X-ray Tube Data. The tube code (ID)
can be only read for the selected X-ray Tube after pressing the Store
button.
7.
If required, repeat this procedure for the other X-ray Tube.
8.
Record configuration data for E02 and E18 in the Data Book.
23
Configuration
3.2
3.2.1
GENERATORS WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER)

STATOR VOLTAGE AND CAPACITOR SELECTION
Check that the capacitor value of the Low Speed Starter
corresponds to the value recommended by the X-ray Tube
manufacturer. If needed replace the capacitor. Also, the Rotor
speed must be indicated by the manufacturer.
The DC Brake of the Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) can be removed by
desoldering CR6 on the LF-RAC Board (refer to schematic 543020xx). In this
case, the Tube will remain coasting after releasing the Prep or the Fluoro
order.
3.2.1.1
CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH STANDARD STATOR

Voltage and capacitor is factory set to 220 VAC, 30 F. In all cases, refer to
X-ray Tube Product Data.
3.2.1.2
CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH THE SAME STARTING VOLTAGE AT
110 VAC
When the stator requires a starting voltage of 110 VAC (a.e. X-ray Tube Toshiba
E7239 / E7240 / E7242 / E7252 / E7299 / E7813 / E7865) perform the following
modifications:
If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to
240 VAC (part number 50509030), remove the wire labelled as 4 that
is connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 3
or 8 (110 VAC).
If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to 530
VAC (part number 50509029), remove the wire labelled as 4 that is
connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 40
(110 VAC).
For X-ray Tube Toshiba E7252 or E7813 (or when it is required) replace
also the Fuse F1 (6A) on the LF-RAC Board by another fuse of 10 A.
These changes affect to all the Tubes connected to
Generator.
24
CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.2.1.3
CONFIGURATION FOR TWO TUBES WITH DIFFERENT STARTING VOLTAGE AND

CAPACITOR OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC
For Generators equipped with a LF-RAC module for two X-ray Tubes, with
possible selection of voltage and capacitor jumpers on the LF-RAC Board, set
jumpers according to the respective X-ray Tube(s) as indicated below.
TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 330 VAC
OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC
(A Kit of 330 VAC is required with this configuration).
VOLTAGE
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
220 VAC
330 VAC
TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9
30 F
15 F
CAPACITOR
10C5--1
15uF
NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and
10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator
10C5--2
30uF
10R4--1
1 Mohm, 2w
10R4--2
1 Mohm, 2w
10J8
230 VAC RTR
( S1, 2--D2 )
60 VAC RTR
0 VAC RTR
TB1
TB1
1
1
2
KACC
K1--1
10RC1
10T3
330V
100 nF
1 KV
10LF2
2
10K1
2
TB2
T1
Tube 1
220V
1
0V
TB2
T2
T2
F1
T 6A
3
47
2w
12 13
TB3
10
30uF
11
14
KCT
K2--3
Tube 2
KCT
K2--1
15 16
TB3
T1
Tube 1
LF--RAC BOARD
10A1
Tube 2
T1/T2 COMM
(to 10TS2)
CF-1018R3
25
Configuration
TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 110 VAC
(A Kit of 110 VAC is required with this configuration).
VOLTAGE
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
220 VAC
150 VAC
TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9
30 F
15 F
CAPACITOR
10C5--1
15uF
10C5--2
30uF
10R4--1
1 Mohm, 2w
10R4--2
1 Mohm, 2w
10J8
230 VAC RTR
( S1, 2--D2 )
60 VAC RTR
0 VAC RTR
TB1
TB1
1
1
2
KACC
K1--1
10RC1
10T3
220V
100 nF
1 KV
10LF2
2
10K1
2
TB2
T1
Tube 1
150 V
1
0V
TB2
T2
12 13
T2
F1
T 6A
3
47
2w
30uF
11
TB3
10
14
KCT
K2--3
Tube 2
KCT
K2--1
15 16
TB3
T1
Tube 1
LF--RAC BOARD
10A1
Tube 2
T1/T2 COMM
(to 10TS2)
26
CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.2.2
PROGRAMMING OF ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME, RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME,

FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER TIME
Rotor Acceleration Time is determined by the X-ray Tube and

Rotor characteristics and it must be considered when the
Generator is about to be configured. X-ray Tube could be
permanently damaged unless the required RPM are reached
before an exposure. (Refer to technical information of the
X-ray Tube).
Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program:
Rotor Acceleration Time. That depends on stator voltage, stator

frequency, stator type, quality of X-ray tube bearings, and X-ray tube
anode size. A reed tachometer or a stroboscope can be used to
determine the anode RPM. Be sure that the Rotor Acceleration Times
meet all requirements for anticipated customer applications.
This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7 seconds. After this time the
Rotor is hold running in maintaining mode as long as Prep is active.
Note
Rad Filament Setting Time. This parameter has the same configuration
value than the Rotor Acceleration Time. Sometimes, if it is required to
increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to the next value, configure the
respective switches again. This adjustment avoids Error-12.
Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This
value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing
the Fluoro Pedal.
The Rotor Acceleration Time and Rad Filament Setting Time is

factory set to 1.8 seconds. The Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and
Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain
this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube
documentation.
1.
Note
CF-1018R3
Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch
3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.
Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch

3000SW2-1 is in Closed (On) position after power the Generator
OFF and back ON again.
27
Configuration
2.
3.
Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in

order to enable the selection of times with the Low Speed Starter. Dip
switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator
powered OFF.
3000SW2-1 (selection enable)
3000SW2-2 (Low Speed Starter)
ON
OFF
Configure the Rotor and Filament Times by setting the dip switches
3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-1.
Table 3-1
Low Speed: Configuration of Rotor and Filament Times
3000SW2-7
TUBE-1
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-8
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
1.2 seconds
1.8 seconds
2.7 seconds
3000SW2-5
TUBE-2
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-6
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
1.8 seconds
2.7 seconds
FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER

HOLD OVER TIME
3000SW2-4
OPEN (OFF)
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Rotor stops and the Filament Current goes
back to stand-by.
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes before the Rotor stops
and the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
28
CLOSED (ON)
1.2 seconds
Note
CLOSED (ON)
CLOSED (ON)
-
Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.

4.
To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until

Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.
5.
Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer
to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).
CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.3
3.3.1
GENERATORS WITH LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
ANODE STATOR SELECTION

For Generators with High Speed Starter, configure NOW the X-ray Tube
Family (anode stator + insert) by setting the respective dip switches 3243SW1
(pos. 4 to 8) and / or 3243SW2 (pos. 4 to 8) on the Control DRAC Board. (Refer
to LV-DRAC - Digital Rotating Anode Controller document).
Configuration of these dip switches automatically determines the appropriate
Starting and Running Stator Voltage and Rotor Acceleration Time of the
selected Tube Family.
3.3.2
PROGRAMMING OF RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME AND FLUORO FILAMENT

HOLD-OVER TIME
Note
With High Speed operation:

-- Rotor Acceleration Time is related to the X-ray Tube Family
configured on the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC).
-- Fluoro and Spot Film Rotor Hold-over Times are configured on
the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC).
-- Rad Filament Setting Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time
are configured with dip switch 3000SW2 per this instruction.
CF-1018R3
29
Configuration
Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program:
Rad Filament Setting Time. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7
seconds. It can be initially set as the same value assigned for the Rotor
Acceleration Time (refer to technical information of the X-ray Tube)
Sometimes, if it is required to increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to
the next value, configure the respective switches again. This adjustment
avoids Error-12.
Note
The Rad Filament Setting Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds. The
Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain
this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube
documentation.
1.
Note
Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch
3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.
Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch

3000SW2-1 is in Closed (On) position after power the Generator
OFF and back ON again.
2.
30
Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This
value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing
the Fluoro Pedal.
Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in

order to enable the selection of times with the High Speed Starter. Dip
switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator
powered OFF.
3000SW2-1 (selection enable)
3000SW2-2 (High Speed Starter)
ON
ON
CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.
Configure the Filament Setting Times by setting the dip switches

3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-2. The Filament Setting
Time should be configured in accordance to Rotor Acceleration Time of
the X-ray Tube.
Table 3-2
High Speed: Configuration of Filament Setting Time
3000SW2-7
TUBE-1
FILAMENT SETTING TIME
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-8
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
1.2 seconds
1.8 seconds
2.7 seconds
3000SW2-5
TUBE-2
FILAMENT SETTING TIME
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-6
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
1.8 seconds
2.7 seconds
FLUORO FILAMENT HOLD-OVER

HOLD OVER TIME
3000SW2-4
OPEN (OFF)
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes
before the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
CF-1018R3
CLOSED (ON)
1.2 seconds
Note
CLOSED (ON)
CLOSED (ON)
-
Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.
4.
To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until

Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.
5.
Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer
to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).
31
Configuration
3.4
ANODE ROTATION TEST

Perform the following tests for each X-ray Tube in the installation, checking the
low and high speed when it is required.
Note
Two people are needed for these tests, one at the Console and the
service engineer looking at the anode of the X-ray Tube. These
tests also can be done by hearing the sound of the anode rotating.
NEVER MAKE EXPOSURES DURING THE TESTS, THE

PERSON CLOSE TO THE X-RAY TUBE WILL BE EXPOSED.
1.
With the switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in On

position (service mode), turn the Console ON and select the
corresponding X-ray Tube.
2.
Select a low value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at
Low Speed.
3.
Press the Prep push-button and visually check that the Tube anode
rotates in the proper way. (Refer to the X-ray Tube documentation).
4.
Hold pressed the Prep push-button and check that the rotation speed
of the Tube anode is in compliance with the X-ray Tube specifications.
For this test is recommended to turn off the Tube filaments (switch
3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller in On position) and use a stroboscope
to measure the anode speed.
32
5.
Release the Prep push-button.
6.
For Generators with LV-DRAC, select a high value for kVp and mAs for
checking the Anode Rotation at High Speed. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.
7.
If required for the second Tube, repeat this procedure.
CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.5
FOCAL SPOTS CONFIGURATION

This configuration determines which mA station will be the smallest mA station
for the Large Focal Spot. It is possible to configure all the mA stations for the
Small Focal Spot or for the Large Focal Spot.
The smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot must be selected according
to the Tube ratings for the Small Filament and the customer preference.
IF THE mA STATION FOR FOCAL SPOT CHANGE IS NOT

CONFIGURED ACCORDING TO THE X-RAY TUBE RATINGS,
THE TUBE FILAMENTS MAY BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED.
Note
1.
With the generator OFF, set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console
CPU Board in On position to permit the service mode.
2.
Power ON the System. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the Manual

Calibration button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS)
of the corresponding X-ray Tube and press the OK button.
3.
Select the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot using the
Increase or Decrease mA buttons. When is required to configure all
mA stations for the Small Focal Spot, select E01 Memory Location.
Default value is factory set at 200 mA except when using X-ray

Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .
4.
Press the Toggle button to store the select mA station and then press
the Confirm or Dismiss buttons to confirm or cancel the process.
When it is confirmed, the ATP Console CPU Board emits a
double-beep.
IF THE FOCAL SPOT SWITCH-OVER POINT IS CHANGED

AFTER mA CALIBRATION, THE mA STATIONS AFFECTED
MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED.
5.
CF-1018R3
33
Configuration
Perform the following test (it is not mandatory).
Note
The test described only applies to RAD Tubes.

In case of a R&F Tube (Tube-2) both filament are always ON (lit).
Select a Direct workstation and a mA station for the Small
Filament. Press Prep for RAD and observe through the X-ray
Tube window that the Small Filament lights more than the Large
Filament.
1.
Select the highest mA station for the Small Focal Spot. Verify that
effectively the Small Filament is ON (lighted) and the Large Filament is
OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.
2.
Select the lowest mA station for the Large Focal Spot. Verify that
effectively the Large Filament is ON (lighted) and the Small Filament is
OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.
3.
If required for the second tube, repeat this procedure.
Illustration 3-1
Focal Spots Configuration
34
CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 4
X-RAY TUBE DATA

The following table lists several common X-ray tubes and their corresponding
number. If a specific tube is not listed, tube specifications are given to enable
you chose a similar tube type. If none of the listed tubes are satisfactory, contact
your generator supplier to obtain special software.
Table 4-1
X-ray Tube Numbers
TUBE
NUMBER
TUBE CODE
001
139
002
POWER RATINGS
FOCAL
SPOT
LS (kW)
HS (kW)
TOSHIBA E7239X
1.0 / 2.0
22 / 45
--
133
201
TOSHIBA E7240X
0.6 / 1.2
15 / 30
--
140
003
140
TOSHIBA E7242X
0.6 / 1.5
18 / 49
--
187
004
090
TOSHIBA E7252X
0.6 / 1.2
15 / 42
26 / 73
300
005
377
TOSHIBA E7254FX
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 66
39 / 100
400
006
274
TOSHIBA E7255FX
0.6 / 1.2
23 / 60
39 / 101
300
007
310
TOSHIBA E7843X
0.6 / 1.2
22 / 49
--
150
008
344
TOSHIBA E7865X
0.3 / 1.0
3 / 40
--
140
009
351
TOSHIBA E7100X
0.6 / 1.2
24 / 59
40 / 100
300
010
260
IAE RTM 101 HS
0.6 / 1.2
22 / 55
37 / 99
400
011
273
IAE RTM 101 HS
0.6 / 1.5
24 / 76
40 / 136
400
012
233
VARIAN RAD 8
1.0 / 2.0
25 / 47
--
150
013
244
VARIAN RAD 14
0.6 / 1.2
16 / 44
27 / 72
300
014
161
VARIAN RAD 21
0.6 / 1.2
21 / 64
36 / 100
300
015
265
VARIAN RAD 60
0.6 / 1.2
26 / 67
39 / 100
400
016
238
VARIAN RAD 74
0.6 / 1.5
20 / 52
--
200
017
252
VARIAN RAD 92
0.6 / 1.2
26 / 62
40 / 99
600
018
092
VARIAN A-192
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 63
40 / 96
300
019
309
VARIAN A196
0.6 / 1.0
20 / 47
32 / 72
350
020
094
VARIAN A-292
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 62
39 / 96
400
021
208
VARIAN G 292
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 63
39 / 95
600
022
051
GE-CGR MN 640
1.0 / 1.8
23 / 46
--
150
023
064
GE MAXIRAY-75
0.6 / 1.5
12 / 37
21 / 62
300
024
062
GE MAXIRAY-100
0.6 / 1.25
18 / 55
31 / 100
350
025
261
SIEMENS DR 154/30/50
1.2 / 1.8
31 / 53
--
200
MODEL
(ID)
KHU
026
027
Note .-- Power Ratings are for 60 Hz. To calculate Power Ratings for 50 Hz multiply the values by 0.91
TB47
Configuration
36
CF-1018R3
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode Controller
LV-DRAC
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
SEP 15, 2005
Tube selection (V10Rx)
JUL 26, 2006
New Tubes in Table-2
MAR 1, 2007
New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R2.04)
MAY 16, 2007
OCT 16, 2007
ADVISORY SYMBOLS
DATA.
or data.
Note
DR-1004R8

LV-DRAC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
LV-DRAC Status Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Self-running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
ii
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
SECTION 1
Note
CONFIGURATION
This document ONLY applies to High Speed Generators supplied
with the LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode
Controller).
The LV-DRAC is a High Speed Rotor Controller located on the Generator
Cabinet. Its configuration is made through dip switches 3243SW1 to 3243SW4
on the Control DRAC Board.
BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC, MAKE SURE THAT
THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR
BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED. WAIT UNTIL LEDS DL7
AND DL8 ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD ARE OFF.
The Function of these switches is the following:
3243SW1-x
FUNCTION
1
2
MINIMUM TIME FOR READY ((DELAY))
3
4
5
6
TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-1

(Also refer to switch position 3243SW3-5)
7
8
3243SW2-x
FUNCTION
1
2
FLUORO HOLD-OVER TIME
3
4
5
6
TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-2

(Also refer to switch position 3243SW4-5)
7
8
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
3243SW3-x
FUNCTION
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE
NOT USED*
SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START
NOT USED*
ON =
WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-1

IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-1
OFF =

6
7
NOT USED*
8
* Note: Set switches not used in ON position.
3243SW4-x
FUNCTION
1
2
3
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME
ON =

OFF =

ON = SELF RUNNING ENABLED (Refer to section 1.2)

OFF = SELF RUNNING DISABLED (Refer to section 1.2)
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
DC BRAKE
* Note: Set switches not used in ON position.
Note
Set dip switches in accordance with the following tables.
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-1

(Switch 3243SW3-5 = ON for Tube-1 )
P
Pos
TUBE FAMILY
(Stator - Anode)
(Switch 3243SW4-5 = ON for Tube-2)
3243SW1-x (TUBE-1)
3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)
GE MAXIRAY 75
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
GE MAXIRAY 100
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
VARIAN G-1582
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 3)

VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 3) / A132
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 4)

VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 4) / A256 / A282 / A292
TOSHIBA 7254X / 7255X
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
CGR STATORIX M50
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SIEMENS 100 L BIANGULIX

SIEMENS 100 L OPTILIX
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
PHILIPS SUPEROTALIX
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
DUNLEE PX-1302
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
CGR STATORIX 260 / RSN 742
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
10
CGR STATORIX 550 / RSN 722 / MSN 722

IAE RTC 600
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
11
SIEMENS 100 G
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
12
SIEMENS RH 150/100
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
13
COMET DO-10 (with Insert 4)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
14
COMET DO-9 (with Insert 4)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
15
CGR STATORIX 240
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
16
PICKER PX-307
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
17
HANGZHOU XD-52-30, 50/150
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
18
DUNLEE PX-1312
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
19
DUNLEE PX-1456 / PX-1436 / PX-1400 (Stator Q)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
20
COMET DX-1000
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
21
COMET DX-81 / COMET XSTAR-14
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
22
PHILIPS ROTALIX 350/351
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
23
COMET MOS-50 (MAMMO)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
24
VARIAN B110 / B112 / B115
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
25
VARIAN B160 / B165
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
26
TOSHIBA E7252 (stator XS-AL)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
27
COMET DX 700 HS
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
28
VARIAN B130 + A192 / A196 / A197
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
29
VARIAN G 1592
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
30
PICKER PX400P + PX457P
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
31
JUGORENDGEN RX 150/30--50
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-2

(Switch 3243SW3-5 = OFF for Tube-1 )
Pos
TUBE FAMILY
(Stator - Anode)
3243SW1-x (TUBE-1)
3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)
VARIAN GS-20711 + Housing B220H (Stator R)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SIEMENS 100 L--W
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SIEMENS SV 125/15/82
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
IAE RTM90+ Housing C55
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
IAE RTM101HS + Housing C100

ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
DUNLEE DA 1036 -- DU 404
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
DUNLEE DA 1094 -- DU 694
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
DUNLEE DR 1825 (High Impedance Stator)

DUNLEE DR 1817 (High Impedance Stator)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CGR STATORIX 240, MSN 740, MSN 742
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
IAE RTC 700 HS + Housing C52 SUPER
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
10
VARIAN GS 30711
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
11
VARIAN BI 130+G292 / G294
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
12
IAE RTM102HS + Housing C52S
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
13
IAE RTC1000HS + Housing C52S
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
14
TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7100X
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
15
DUNLEE DA 1083 / PX 1483 -- DU 404 / DA 10 (Stator C)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
16
VARIAN A277 / A278 + Housing B150H (Stator R)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
17
VARIAN G1092 + Housing B160 / B165 (Stator R)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
18
DUNLEE PX1473Q -- DU 604
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
19
TOSHIBA E7260DX
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
20
VARIAN HE100 + Housing B180 / B185 (Stator R)
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
21
IAE RTC 137 + Housing CT 180
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
22
VARIAN A102 + Housing B100
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
23
IAE X40 + Housing C352 (only Low Speed)

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
24
25
TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7867X / E7869X
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
26
TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7240X
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
27
28
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
30
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
31
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
29
(Switch 3243SW4-5 = OFF for Tube-2)
TOSHIBA E7252X (Stator XS--R)
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
MINIMUM TIME FOR READY (DELAY)

3243SW1-x
MINIMUM TIME
(SECONDS)
0*
ON
ON
ON
0.6
OFF
ON
ON
0.8
ON
OFF
ON
1.0
OFF
OFF
ON
1.2
ON
ON
OFF
1.5
OFF
ON
OFF
2.0
ON
OFF
OFF
3.0
OFF
OFF
OFF
* Note: It is recommended to set these switches at 0 seconds.
FLUORO HOLD TIME
DR-1004R8
3243SW2-x
FLUORO HOLD TIME

(SECONDS)
ON
ON
ON
10
OFF
ON
ON
20
ON
OFF
ON
30
OFF
OFF
ON
40
ON
ON
OFF
60
OFF
ON
OFF
90
ON
OFF
OFF
120
OFF
OFF
OFF
LV-DRAC
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME

3243SW4-x
SPOT FILM
HOLD TIME
SECONDS
MINUTES
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
10
ON
OFF
ON
ON
15
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
20
ON
ON
OFF
ON
30
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
45
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
60
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
10
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
20
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
25
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
30
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
40
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START
SPOT FILM START MODE
3243SW3-3
SPOT FILM ALWAYS STARTS IN HIGH SPEED (10000 RPM)
ON
SPOT FILM STARTS AT REQUIRED SPEED
OFF
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE

LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE MODE (3300 RPM TO 0 RPM)
3243SW3-1
INHIBITED
ON
ACTIVATED
OFF
DC BRAKE (FOR LOW AND HIGH SPEED)

DC BRAKE
3243SW4-8
ACTIVATED
ON
INHIBITED
OFF
3243SW4-7
INHIBITED
(LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is always illuminated)
ON
ACTIVATED (Normal Operation mode)

(LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is non-illuminated
indicating that the DRAC is working properly).
OFF
Note: The Error Codes are shown on the Console Display preceded by the letter E
(a.e. E51) (For Error Codes refer to the Troubleshooting document).
WHEN SWITCH 3243SW4-7 IS IN THE ON POSITION, THE

ERROR PROTECTIONS OF THE LV-DRAC ARE INHIBITED.
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
1.1
LV-DRAC STATUS DIAGRAM
CHANGE
OF TUBE
ACCELERATION
UP TO 3300 RPM
ACCELERATION
UP TO 10000 RPM
STAND-BY
RUNNING
AT 3300 RPM
RUNNING
AT 10000 RPM
BRAKING
FROM 3300 RPM
1.2
BRAKING
FROM 10000 RPM
SELF-RUNNING MODE
SELF-RUNNING MODE
The continuous starting and braking of the anode produces an overheating in
the X-ray Tube Stator (a.e. during calibration procedure). The Self-running
mode avoids this overheating.
In the Self-running mode (switch 3243SW4-6 in the ON position), the anode
remains running for approximately 1 minute when rotates at 3300 rpm or
10000 rpm.
The LV-DRAC enters in the Self-running mode when Preparation is selected
three consecutive times only from the Console buttons or Handswitch, and
the time between two of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than
30 seconds (refer to illustration below).
PREPARATION SIGNALS
t < 30 s
t < 30 s
t < 30 s
t > 30 s
t < 30 s
t < 30 s
t < tsr
ANODE ROTATION
tsr
tsr
Self-running mode
Self-running mode
tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm.
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
SECTION 2
Sch. No.
SCHEMATICS
Scheme
LV-DRAC MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
A3243--04
CONTROL DRAC PCB
A3240--05
INTERFACE DRAC PCB
A3109--01
CLAMPING PCB
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
10
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC MODULE
INTERFACE
CONTROL
DRAC PCB
HV INVERTER
MODULE
PTR1
3PH - IGBT INVERTERS
U2
F3
INPUT
RECTIFIER
PCB
Filter
DC BUS
Ferrites
240 VAC SW
LV DC
Power
Supply
(C) COMM
Acc
Run Com
J1
U16
Control
Drac
Power
Supply
OUTPUT
LOGIC
CONTROL
CONTROL
U11 A -- D
CURRENT
LIMIT
Contactors
Acceleration /
Running Voltage
U15 (ADC)
J3
I AUX
I MAIN
D
A
OC
DRIVER
OUTPUT
COMMANDS
(A) AUX
(M) MAIN
F4
Ribbon Cable
MAINS
U3
MAIN / AUX
TRANSFORMERS
AC / DC CONVERTERS
U4B, C & D
DC Brake
U1C, D & A
I COMMON
U12A, B & U1B
Tube Selection
OP1-- OP2
OPTO
COUPLERS
U17
Common
Main / Aux
Stator
Tube 1
RL2
READY
ERROR
DRAC
Serial Link
SW1 to SW4
DL2
CONTROL DRAC PCB
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SWITCHES
Open
Collector
Driver
LV-DRAC Module Block Diagram
Common
Main / Aux
Stator
Tube 2
F
AR1
SW1
100nF
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
CS3
AR2
SW2
1
19
8 X 10K
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
19
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
U17
87C54
+5 VDC
31
C43
33 pF
19
X1
12MHz
18
EA/VP
X1
X2
9 RESET
29 PSEN
30 ALE/P
RSTuP
ALE
U18
HCT244
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A0
A1
A2
RAW
ENuP
AUTO
RD
WR
R86
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
VSS
20
10K2
1
19
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
U19
HCT244
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
C22
2K21
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
P2.6
P2.7
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
P3.0
P3.1
P3.2
P3.3
P3.4
P3.5
P3.6
P3.7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
P11
P12
PWM
PWMC
C1
C2
MODP1
MODP2
MODA1
MODA2
P21
P22
T2
T3
ST
HS
FL
SF
SPARE 1
SPARE 2
Q9
2N4403
R112
1K5
2K21
R68
475
VS2
7
U10A
TC4426
A22
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
07/04/05
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
16/07/04
CN 02/174
F. GARCIA
07/11/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
5
4
TF2
C68
220nF
7
U7A
TC4426
6
5
TP10
TF6
C64
220nF
6
5
TP7
3
D58
R123
BAT49 1K
D60
BAT49
D59
BAT49
D61
BAT49
D34
R115
BAT49 1K
D36
BAT49
D35
BAT49
D37
BAT49
TF3
C67
220nF
D52
R121
BAT49 1K
D54
BAT49
D53
BAT49
D55
BAT49
C14
100nF
7
U8A
TC4426
5
3
3 U8B
TC4426
TF4
C66
220nF
D46
R119
BAT49 1K
D48
BAT49
D47
BAT49
D49
BAT49
C11
100nF
6
7
U5A
TC4426
6
5
TP5
3
3 U5B
TC4426
TF1
C69
220nF
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
10/10/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/97
D64
R125
BAT49 1K
D66
BAT49
D65
BAT49
D67
BAT49
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
1/3
R29
33.2
R30
2K21
D21
BAT49
C59
10uF
D10
1N5819
D63
1N4148
D62
1N4148
D11
BAT49
Q2
BC640
R122
1K
R23
33.2
R24
2K21
D12
BAT49
10
C62
10uF
D22
1N5819
D39
1N4148
D38
1N4148
D23
BAT49
Q6
BC640
R114
1K
R32
2K21
R31
33.2
D24
BAT49
C58
10uF
D13
1N5819
D57
1N4148
D56
1N4148
R120
1K
D14
BAT49
Q3
BC640
R25
33.2
R26
2K21
D15
BAT49
C61
10uF
D16
1N5819
D51
1N4148
D50
1N4148
R118
1K
D17
BAT49
Q4
BC640
R28
2K21
R27
33.2
D18
BAT49
C60
10uF
Q16
BC640
R116
1K
Q13
BC640
6
TP8
D44
1N4148
PTR1
D20
BAT49
Q5
BC640
Q14
BC640
D45
1N4148
Q11
BC640
3 U7B
TC4426
TP6
D19
1N5819
Q15
BC640
C13
100nF
5
3 U10B
TC4426
VS2
A21
R17
1K5
DZ2
12V
VS1
A11
TF5
C65
220nF
C16
100nF
3 U6B
TC4426
TP9
VS2
A12
VS1
DZ3
12V
GND
10
E
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
R2
R111
475
7
U6A
TC4426
VS1
+15 VDC
Q10
2N4403
R113
20
VCC
D40
R117
BAT49 1K
D42
BAT49
D41
BAT49
D43
BAT49
C12
100nF
VS2
C21
3 U9B
TC4426
A
Q12
BC640
10 uF
40
VCC
C44
33 pF
C40
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
GND
10
100nF
CS0
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
7
U9A
TC4426
C47
U14
HCT244
GND
10
20
VCC
C12
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
+5 VDC
X 10K
+5 VDC
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
VCC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
C39
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
AR4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1G
2G
100nF
CS1
SW4
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
AR6
8 X 4K7
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C11
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
C30
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
AR3
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
GND
10
100nF
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CS2
SW3
1G
2G
B
C15
100nF
VS1
U13
HCT244
+5 VDC
X 10K
+5 VDC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
20
VCC
PD ( 0......7 )
C29
+5 VDC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+5 VDC
8 X 10K
D7
1N5819
D69
1N4148
D68
1N4148
R124
1K
D8
BAT49
Q1
BC640
R22
2K21
11
R21
33.2
D9
BAT49
12
C63
10uF
DWG:
A3243--04
C
CONTROL DRAC
REV
P+
COM
SHL
V--
R37
R33
150K--2w
150K--2w
DL7
HLMP1700
DL8
HLMP1700
C19
C17
100 uF
450V
100 uF
450V
R34
R35
R36
R75
1M
1M
1M
1M
604K
R40
R39
R38
R76
R64
1M
1M
1M
1M
D26
D25
U12C
LF347
R65
9
--
13
R67
10 +
--
14
12 +
C31
100nF
U2
CSNH151 100nF
3
1--7
J1
1
V+
8--14
C4
221K
R8
R7
R10
R4
12K1
12K1
12K1
12K1
R9
100
--
13 -D3
1N4148
2
14
12 +
10 +
D2
1N4148
U1C
LF347
--15 VDC
R3
--
D32
1N4148
221K
U1D
LF347
C1
1uF
J1
4
AUX
1--7
R12
OP
C7
R14
12K1
R11
100
R15
12K1
13
--
12K1
14
D5
1N4148
12 +
100nF
D4
1N4148
U4D
LF347
--15 VDC
R19
12K1
9
--
6
8
10 +
R16
--
U4C
LF347
R13
C35
100nF
R5
10K2
5 +
3
R53
12K1
R18
R54
12K1
--
10
12
N -F
R59
221K
C24
1uF
U12B
LF347
C8
C3
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
100nF
100nF
2
4
U1
LF347
4
-U4
3 + LF347
11
11
C26
--15 VDC
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
10/10/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/97
11
--
C2
C9
--15 VCD
--15 VDC
100nF
100nF
D71
1N4148
4
U12
LF347
11
I. AUX LIMIT
D70
1N4148
100nF
I. PRINC LIMIT
R58
12K1
C28
SKM 40GD 123D
+
U1B
C34
100nF
+15 VDC
PTR1
D72
1N4148
R62
10K2
R56
12K1
100nF
1
U12A
LF347
--
R57
12K1
R55
12K1
D6
1N4148
1K5
D33
1N4148 R20
10K2
C10
1uF
R61
1K5
C25
100nF
D73
1N4148
1K5
12K1
P+
TP36
+5 VDC
U4B
LF347
221K
R60
221K
+5 VDC
221K
TP3
CS4
RD
WR
+5 VDC
C27
100nF
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
R89
100nF
V--
10
I. AUX
TP16
C6
V+
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
9
2
1
19
18
R1
+15 VDC
8--14
D1
1N4148
12K1
U3
CSNH151
C36
100nF
+5 VDC
U1A
LF347
3 +
R6
PD ( 0......7 )
20 10 uF
VCC
DB0
CH1
DB1
CH2
DB2
CH3
DB3
DB4
CH4
DB5
DB6
VREF
DB7
CS
RD
WR
INT
GND
R88
100nF
PTR1
I. PRINC
TP17
1V<>8.26A
TP1
OP
V--
R74
--15 VDC
C5
U15
ADC0844
R72
22K1
+15 VDC
C37
D29
1N4148
1K5
D31
1N4148
R73
10K2
604K
604K
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
U12D
LF347
22K1
D27
100nF
PTR1
PRIN
604K
R66
D28
R63
4 X 1N4148
470 nF--1000V
J2
V+
B
VBUS (4V<>724VDC)
TP18
+15 VDC
C18
N --
PTR1
J1
3
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
07/04/05
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
16/07/04
CN 02/174
F. GARCIA
07/11/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
2/3
DWG:
A3243--04
C
CONTROL DRAC
REV
R50
I. PRINC
Limit
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
1K5
C22
1 nF
R90
23K7
C32
100nF
R126
10K2
10
R127
23K7
11
C33
100nF
R45
10K2
R47
I. AUX
Limit
1K5
C21
1 nF
8
NOTE :
4.5 V < > 37 Amp. pick for I.PRINC or I.AUX
D
V
U11A
LM339
--
+5 VDC
DZ1
15V
13
Q7
2N4403
2K21
+
U11C
LM339
--
R83
221K
TP29
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
--15 VDC
V UNR
V UNR
PRECH IF
PRECH IF
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
T3 IF
T3 IF
T2 IF
T2 IF
T1 IF
T1 IF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
TP25
TP24
R51
AUTO
TP21 TP20
N.U.
TP26 TP22 TP23
ALE
UNR
R87
R85
3K3
22
R81
3K3
+5 VDC
R84
22
R80
22
R78
22
T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation
T2 IF: Not Used
T3 IF: Break Control
2K21
R107
2K21
R108
DL4
R79
3K3
A1
2K21
R109
A2
2K21
C48
22 uF U20
ULN2803
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
OUT8
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
OUT4
OUT3
OUT2
OUT1
COM
IN8
IN7
IN6
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
GND
9
C53
1nF
C54
1nF
C11
14
C12
13
12
P22
A11
10
A21
3
30
29
A22
CS4
CS3
28
16
CS1
CS0
14
12
15
10
TP30
TP31
OP2B
TLP621--4
4
OP2C
TLP621--4
5
6
OP2D
TLP621--4
7
8
R43
HLMP1700
3K3
R94
11
750
12
R98
SPARE1
SPARE1 RTN
13
SF
2K2
R97
2K2
14
R96
SF RTN
15
FL
2K2
R95
2K2
16
R102
FL RTN
17
18
R100
HS RTN
19
ST
2K2
R99
2K2
20
R106
ST RTN
21
T3
2K2
R105
2K2
22
R104
T3 RTN
23
T2
2K2
R103
2K2
24
T2 RTN
RL2
PRME15002
RDY1
7
5
10
+15 VDC
R46
HS
2K2
R101
2K2
RDY1 RTN
RDY1 OUT
+5 VDC
R42
10
35
SPARE2 RTN
2K2
R91
2K2
R44
R41
HLMP1700
10
R92
82
R77
750
4
SPARE2
2K2
R93
2K2
DL2
37
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
+5 VDC
ERROR
DL1
HLMP1700
TP32 TP34
DL3
40
39
57
38
36
43
42
41
1
2
TP28 TP33 TP35
TP27
16
7
8
OP2A
TLP621--4
11
HS
ST
T3
T2
14
5
6
OP1D
TLP621--4
13
SPARE2
SPARE1
SF
FL
3
4
OP1C
TLP621--4
15
CS2
27
4
OP1B
TLP621--4
A12
1
2
11
P21
J4
OP1A
TLP621--4
15
C55
1nF
8 ERROR CODE
7
RDY1
6
DISCH
5
PRECH
BRAKE
4
3
T3
2
T2
T1
1
+5 VDC
16
C22
P11
P12
55
C56
1nF
8 X 4K7
C21
R110
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
4 X HLMP1700
DL5
53
25
46
A0
DL6
68
59
RAW
TP37
9
10
11
17
19
47
TP15
C49
470 uF
23
26
MODP2
MODA1
MODA2
C50
470 uF
34
MODP1
TP2
TP4
TP12
TP13
TP19
C51
470 uF
24
AR5
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
45
6
7
C52
10 nF
221
R48
221
U16
EP1810
20
21
22
48
49
50
51
54
5
32
33
C1
C2
+5 VDC
A
PD ( 0......7 )
44
PWMC
TP14
100nF
R82
10K2
C46
1 uF
PWM
J3
52
56
ENuP
14
18
+5 VDC
D30
1N4148
I. LIM
TP11
R49
1K
R52
100nF
RSTuP
Q8
2N4401
+5 VDC
--
C45
12
+
U11B
LM339
C38
R71
1K5
R70
1K
C57
100nF
R69
1K5
U11D
LM339
--
C
+5 VDC
UNR
ERROR DRAC
GND
C23
+15 VDC
100nF
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
10/10/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/97
U11
LM339
12
C20
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
07/04/05
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
16/07/04
100nF
CN 02/174
F. GARCIA
07/11/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
--15 VDC
F
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
3/3
DWG:
A3243--04
C
CONTROL DRAC
REV
A
J1
+15 VDC
VUNR
CR5
1N4007
CR6
1N4007
2
3
REG1
7815
4
J3
220 VAC SW
IN
TR1
F1
T 0.5 A
CR1
1N4007
CR2
1N4007
OUT
COM
IN
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
OUT
COM
6
7
C3
10 uF
35 V
C1
2200 uF
35 V
15 VAC
REG2
7805
C4
10 uF
35 V
8
9
10
220 VAC
11
C2
2200 uF
35 V
15 VAC
0 VAC
F2
T 0.5 A
CR3
1N4007
C5
10 uF
35 V
CR4
1N4007
IN
R2
150K, 2w
J2
--DC IN
+DC IN
GND
+DC OUT
2
--DC OUT
12
+15 VDC
13
14
--15 VDC
15
VUNR
COM
OUT
16
--15 VDC
REG3
7915
R1
150K, 2w
DS1
HLMP1700
F3
T 15 A
F4
T 15 A
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
--15 VDC
VUNR
VUNR
18
19
+5 VDC
20
21
FILT1
5
6
2
3
+5 VDC
17
CR7
1N4007
+5 VDC
22
9
CAR--DRAC 10
BUS
12
1 7 8 14 13
23
24
25
26
CR12
1N4007
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
T3 IF
T3 IF
T2 IF
T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation
T2 IF: Not Used
T3 IF: Break Control
T2 IF
T1 IF
T1 IF
CR13
1N4007
2
CR14
1N4007
J4
1
J5
1
2
C6
220 nF
1000V
2
CR8
STTA1212DI
K1
KT2
K3
CR10
STTA1212DI
1
CR9
STTA1212DI
VR1
V480LA20A
CR11
STTA1212DI
CN 01/075
F. GARCIA
03/05/01
C, D
CN 98/090, 99/94
F. GARCIA
15/02/00
CN 98/025
F. GARCIA
09/02/98
CN 98/018
F. GARCIA
05/02/98
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
27/09/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
27/09/97
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
1/1
DWG:
A3240--05
E
INTERFASE DRAC--HF
REV
R1
680
15w
ALL DIODES CL03--15
IN--1
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
C1
10 nF
12.5KV
R2
150K
15w
CR5
CR6
C2
10 nF
12.5KV
R3
150K
15w
IN--2
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
12/01/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
16/03/99
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL
INNERSCAN
1/1
DWG:
A3109--01
REV
CLAMPING
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Calibration
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
JAN 23, 2004
First edition
APR 1, 2005
FEB 29, 2007
Calibration of optional 1000 mA station
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
CA-1036R2

Calibration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1
Minimum Current Time Product (mAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
Accuracy of Radiographic and Fluoroscopic Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
Filament Stand-by Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
Exposure Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
2.5
Digital mA Loop Open (X-Ray Tube Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.5.1
Autocalibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.5.2
Manual Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
AEC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
2.6.1
Previous Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
2.6.2
Balance Adjustment for Three Field Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2.6.3
Optical Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2.6.4
kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2.6.5
Photomultiplier RAD-AEC (Digital RAD) Adjustment (Optional) . . . . .
42
2.6.6
AEC Optical Density Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
2.7
Fluoro Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2.8
ABC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
2.8.1
ABC System with PhotoMultiplier Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
2.8.2
ABC System with TV Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
2.8.2.1 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera

Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
2.8.2.2 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera

not Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
2.8.2.3 ABC System Adjustment with no ABC Signal from TV Camera
60
2.6
2.9
CA-1036R2
Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Calibration
ii
CA-1036R2
Calibration
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This Calibration document provides information and procedures to perform all
the adjustments required to establish an optimal performance of this Generator.
Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is

completed.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY

INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT.
THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER
RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR
Calibration data is entered in digital form and stored in a non-volatile memory

chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board, thus no battery
back-up is required.
Note
CA-1036R2
Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this

document. Perform only the sections required to calibrate this
unit.
Calibration
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS
MINIMUM CURRENT TIME PRODUCT (mAs)
Minimum Current Time Product obtained at 0.1 s is 1 mAs.
Minimum Current Time Product within the specified ranges of

compliance for linearity and constancy is 0.1 mAs.
ACCURACY OF RADIOGRAPHIC AND FLUOROSCOPIC PARAMETERS
Note
Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.
PARAMETERS
RAD
FLUORO
1.1.3
ACCURACY
(with 12 BITS HT Controller)
kV
(3% + 1 kV)
mA
(4% + 1 mA)
Exposure Time
(2% + 0.1 ms)
kV
(3% + 1 kV)
mA
10%
Exposure Time
(1% + 20 ms)
HV FREQUENCY
The operating HV Frequency of this Generator is 25 kHz / 30 kHz.
1.1.4
DUTY CYCLE
The Generator duty cycle is continuous, but limits should be set during
installation depending on the capacity of the X-ray tube.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
SECTION 2
Note
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
Enter in GSM Program for Calibration procedures as described in

the Configuration document.
Enter and store calibration data in the Extended Memory
Locations as described in Section 2.2 of the Configuration
document.
Record all the calibration data in the Data Book.
Before calibration, bear in mind that:
Note
For calibration and measure the kVp it is needed a Non-Invasive kVp

Meter.
For calibration and measure mA or mAs it is needed a mAs Meter

plugged to the banana connections on the HV Transformer (connect the
mAs Meter for Digital mA Loops calibration).
Test points on the HT Controller Board can also be used to monitor

the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the
unit. These test points must be checked with scope:
- mA test point is TP-5 and the scale factor is:
with HT Controller Board A3000- xx (except - 44)
(<1000 mA Generator)
- from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 10 mA
- from 100 mA, 1 volt = 100 mA
with HT Controller Board A3000- 44 (1000 mA Generator)
- from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 20 mA
- from 100 mA, 1 volt = 200 mA
- kV test point is TP-7 and the scale factor is 1 volt = 33.3 kV
(0.3 volt = 10 kV)
CA-1036R2
Verify that dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board is in
On position to permit the service mode.
Calibration
DIP SWITCH
Verify position of dip switches on the HT Controller Board during every

calibration procedure:
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
3000SW2-2
Position during operation -- Enables Filament and

Rotor Interlocks
Disables Filament and Rotor Interlocks

(this turns off the filament so no radiation will
be produced during the exposure).
3000SW2-4
Position during operation -- Digital mA Loop Closed
Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant
Note
Only for Generators with Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) (it does not
apply to Generators with High Speed Starter - LV-DRAC):
-- When the Digital mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in
On), the rotor runs for two minutes after releasing the handswitch
button from Preparation position. After this time the rotor will
brake (unless DC Brake is removed).
-- When the Digital mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in
Off), the rotor will brake after releasing the handswitch button
from Preparation position (unless DC Brake is removed).
2.1
Be sure that X-ray Tubes configured in E02 and E18 Memory Locations
correspond to X-ray Tubes installed (refer to Configuration document).
FILAMENT STAND-BY CURRENT
Note
For RAD Only Generators, the Filament Stand-by value is

auto-calibrated by the Generator and automatically stored into the
respective Memory Locations (E01 and E17). Filament Stand-by
values are not field changeable.
Note
For RAD and Fluoro Generators, E17 Memory Location (Fluoro

Filament Setting) sets maximum patient Entrance Skin Exposure
Dose Rate. (Refer to Section 2.7 Fluoro Calibration).
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.2
EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT

The values stored in these Extended Memory Locations only affect to Exposure
Times for techniques below 20 ms. The Memory Locations which affect short
exposure times are:
FUNCTION
MEMORY LOCATION
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - DELAY
E13
E29
EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - Ceq kV
E15
E31
The generator has been optimized at the factory to produce correct exposures
at the lower times (<20 ms.) Therefore do not change the value factory set for
E13 and E29 Memory Locations and only adjust the value for E15 and E31
Memory Location according to the HV Cables length.
The Exposure Time adjustment is calibrated by performing the following steps:
CA-1036R2
1.

the GSM Program. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
OK button.
2.
Select the E13 (or E29) Memory Location. Value in this Memory Location
adjusts the time delay of the exposure. It is factory set for a value of 17,
18 or 19 (default value is 18). Only read this value, do not change it.
3.
Select the E15 (or 31) Memory Location. Value in this Memory Location
is set in relation to the length in meters of one of the HV Cables
(1 ft = 0.3048 m). Verify the HV Cable length in meters and set the
following value:
HV CABLE LENGTH
VALUE TO SET IN MEMORY
4m
27
6m
31
9m
38
12 m
45
14 m
49
16 m
54
For another HV Cable length
value = (2.2711 x cables length) + 17.744
4.
Store the value of each Memory Location by pressing the Store button
of the calibration panel.
5.
Exit from calibration mode and record the new values in the Data Book.
6.
Repeat the above calibration process for the second tube (memory
locations E29 and E31).
Calibration
2.3
KV LOOP
Extended Memory Location E06 contains the calibration factor for kV Loop.
Each number above or below of the indicated in the E06 memory location
increases or decreases respectively the kV gain value.
Note
Value in E06 Memory Location is only related to the Generator

performance (it is not related to the X-ray Tube(s) or another
components installed), so value in this Memory Location is
factory adjusted. Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller
Board and/or HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.
The kV Gain for kV Loop can be manually calibrated with a Non-Invasive kV

Meter (recommended procedure) or Auto-calibrated with HV Bleeder.
Manual Calibration of E06 Memory Location

1.
With the Generator power OFF:
Set Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in Off

position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
Set Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in On

position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).
Remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer. Connect the mAs Meter to the banana plug
connections to measure mA or mAs.
Place and center a Non-Invasive kVp Meter on the X-ray Tube

output at the required SID (refer to the Non-Invasive kVp Meter
documentation).
2.

the GSM Program. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
OK button.
3.
Select the E06 Memory Location and read the calibration value by
pressing the Read button. Enter the value 200 and store it by pressing
the Store button.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
4.
Calibrate manually the Filament Current Number for 80 kV / 200 mA

combination, as indicated in the following steps (if it has not been
previously calibrated).
In calibration mode, Filament Current Numbers are shown on the
calibration panel by pressing the Read button after selecting the
respective kV / mA combination. They can be changed by pressing the
Increase and Decrease buttons and stored by pressing the Store
button of the calibration panel.
Select 80 kV, 200 mA, Large Focus. Enter the value 344 as Filament
Current Number (calibration value) and press the Store button. Make
an exposure with these parameters. The mAs read on the mAs Meter
must be the same mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a
tolerance of 0.1 mAs (tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter).
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high (or
Generator Overload Error is shown), decrease the filament number.
Press the Store button before making a new exposure. Repeat until the
mAs read is correct and the mA station is calibrated.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
5.
Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the Go to User

Mode button.
6.
Select: RAD Menu, 80 kV, 200 mA, 100 ms and Large Focus. Make an
exposure and note the kV value at the end of the exposure.
7.
If calibration of the kV Loop is correct (80 1 kV), record value 200 in

the Data Book.
8.
If calibration of the kV Loop is not correct:
9.
a.
Exit from the User Mode screen by pressing the Manual

Calibration button. Select the E06 Memory Location. Press the
Read button to read the value stored.
b.
Increase or decrease the value to increase or decrease the kV

respectively. Enter the new value and store it by pressing the
Store button.
c.
Exit calibration mode and repeat the exposure (steps 5 and 6) to

determine if the new value has had the proper effect, if not repeat
step-8.
d.
When it is correct, record the new value for E06 Memory Location
in the Data Book.
After calibration of E06 Memory Location, remove the Non-Invasive kVp

Meter.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Auto-Calibration of E06 Memory Location

1.
2.
With the Generator power OFF:
Set Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in On

position (disables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
Remove the HV Cables from the X-ray Tube and connect them to
the HV Bleeder, then connect a short couple of HV Cables from the
HV Bleeder to the X-ray Tube.
Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button

on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
OK button. Then, select the E06 Memory Location and press the OK
button.
Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button
(Yes or No) on the new screen.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing

the respective button (Confirm or Dismiss) on the calibration screen.
Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lighted

and the Press Prep and Expose message appears on the screen.
10
3.
Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at

100 kV, 200 mA and 32 ms and they can be shown when pressing the
Prep button).
4.
Read the kVp measured with the HV Bleeder and enter this value on the
kV Display by pressing the kV Increase or kV Decrease buttons.
5.
Exit from Auto-calibration mode pressing the Auto Calibration button.

At this moment, the Generator will calculate and store the new value in
E06 Memory Location. Auto-calibration is deactivated and the process
is finished when the screen shows the GSM menu.
6.
Press the Manual Calibration button. Select an available workstation

(WS) and press the OK button. Then, select the E06 Memory Location
and read its new value on the Calibration Display. Record this value in
the Data Book.
7.
Exit calibration mode.
8.
After calibration of E06 Memory Location:

G
Switch the Generator power OFF.
Remove the HV Bleeder and connect the HV Cables from the

Generator directly to the X-ray Tube.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.4
DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED

Extended Memory Locations E03 and E05 contain the calibration factor for
Digital mA Loop Closed. Each number above or below the indicated in the
Memory Locations increases or decreases respectively the mA gain value.
Note
Values in E03 and E05 Memory Locations are only related to the
Generator performance (they are not related to the X-ray Tube
installed), so values in these Memory Locations are factory
adjusted. Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller Board
and/or HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.
The mA Gain for Digital mA Loop Closed is calibrated by performing the

following steps:
1.
2.
With the Generator power OFF, set:

G
Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in Off position

(enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in On position

(Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).

Calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations is performed by means of

the Auto Calibration menu.
EACH TIME THAT AUTO-CALIBRATION IS ACTIVATED IN

ONE OF THESE MEMORY LOCATIONS, CALIBRATION DATA
STORED FOR THIS MEMORY LOCATION IS DELETED AND A
NEW CALIBRATION FOR IT WILL BE REQUIRED.
CA-1036R2
11
Calibration
3.

on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
OK button. Then, select the respective Memory Location (E03 or E05)
and press the OK button.

12
CA-1036R2
Calibration

and the Press Prep and Expose message appears on the screen.
4.
CA-1036R2
Calibrate E03 and E05 Memory Locations as described in the following

pages.
13
Calibration
For Low mA stations (from 10 mA to 80 mA) (E03 Memory Location):
14
1.

on the GSM menu and select the E03 Memory Location. Confirm all the
following screens.
2.
When Auto-calibration is activated, Auto Calibration button is lighted

and the 3.5 mAs value is shown on the screen.
3.
Perform the following steps:

a.

80 kV, 32 mA and 100 ms and they can be shown when pressing
the Prep button).
b.
Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.
c.
Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration

panel.
d.
Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing

the Increase or Decrease buttons) to determine the correction
needed to obtain a value between 3.00 and 4.00 mAs in the mAs
Meter after making a new exposure.
e.
Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the
mAs Meter.
4.
Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between
3.00 and 4.00 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the mAs Increase or
mAs Decrease buttons.
5.

6.

the Data Book.
7.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
For High mA stations (from 100 mA) (E05 Memory Location):
CA-1036R2
1.

on the GSM menu and select the E05 Memory Location. Confirm all the
following screens.
2.
When Auto-calibration is activated, Auto Calibration button is lighted

and the 7.75 mAs value is shown on the screen.
3.
Perform the following steps:

a.

80 kV, 125 mA and 64 ms (or 63 ms or 65 ms depending on Generator)
and they can be shown when pressing the Prep button).
b.
Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.
c.
Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration

panel.
d.
Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing

the Increase or Decrease buttons) to determine the correction
needed to obtain a value between 7.00 and 8.50 mAs in the mAs
Meter after making a new exposure.
e.
Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the
mAs Meter.
4.
Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between
7.00 and 8.50 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the mAs Increase or
mAs Decrease buttons.
5.

6.

the Data Book.
7.
8.
After calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations:

G
Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.
Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer.
15
Calibration
2.5
DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN (X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION)

To achieve the most accurate calibration, this procedure has to be
automatically performed by the Generator (Auto-calibration). Calibration
procedure will be manually performed by the field engineer only if
Auto-calibration is not possible.
Two different methods are described in this section: Auto-calibration and
Manual Calibration.
Digital mA Loop Open is calibrated by performing the following steps:
1.
2.5.1

G


2.
Turn the Generator ON.
3.
Perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in Section 2.5.1 for

each X-ray Tube in the system.
AUTO-CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN

Auto-calibration of the Filament Current Numbers is divided in two separated
procedures related to the mA stations configured for the Small or Large Focal
Spots.
It is recommended to start with the Small Focal Spot (first group) and continue
with the Large Focal Spot (second group).
EACH TIME THAT AUTO-CALIBRATION IS ACTIVATED IN A
mA STATION (OR IN E01 MEMORY LOCATION), ALL THE
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS OF THE SELECTED FOCAL
SPOT ARE AUTOMATICALLY SET TO 344. SO A NEW
COMPLETE CALIBRATION OF THE FILAMENT CURRENT
NUMBERS FOR THIS FOCAL SPOT WILL BE REQUIRED.
16
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Auto-calibration starts with the minimum available mA station for the selected
Focal Spot at 50 kV and follows with the other combinations of mA stations for
the selected Focal Spot at 80 kV, 120 kV and 40 kV.
1.

on the GSM menu.
2.
Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated

and press the OK button. This workstation has to be one of the
previously configured as Direct.
3.
Select the Small Focal Spot by pressing the Small button and then
press the OK button.
CA-1036R2
17
Calibration
18
4.

5.

and the Press Prep and Expose message appears on the screen. At
this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for
the Small Focal Spot.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
6.
Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray Tube is 100%
or nearly (HU 0% displayed on the screen).
BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE IN AUTO-CALIBRATION,

VERIFY THAT THE LINK BETWEEN THE BANANA PLUG
CONNECTIONS ON THE HV TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED.
7.
Note
Keep fully pressed the Handswitch button to perform continuous

exposures.
In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory

pre-programmed and they can not be changed.
Auto-calibration can be paused momentarily releasing the
Handswitch button, whenever there is not an exposure in
process. Do not exit from Auto-calibration before the
procedure has been completed.
Note
Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the Auto

Calibration button. A message on the screen informs that
Auto-calibration has been cancelled and after a while the screen
shows the GSM menu.
If during Auto-calibration process, any error indication is shown

momentarily (such as Tube Overload, etc.), it means that Generator
can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination
(because anode overheated, space charge, Generator power limit, etc.).
In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the
following available kV / mA combinations for the selected Focal Spot. At
the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations
previously uncalibrated.
If the Heat Units value displayed is more than 60%, exposures are
inhibited momentarily and message Tube too hot is shown on the
screen. This message will disappear and exposures can be made again
when the X-ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units capacity.
At this point, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Units value
displayed are close to the 20% before making any exposure.
CA-1036R2
19
Calibration
Generator tries to calibrate each kV / mA combination for ten (10)

attempts (maximum). If calibration is cancelled (after ten attempts),
message Auto calibration failure is shown on the screen until press the
Auto Calibration button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back
to the GSM menu. Calibration can be also cancelled due to space charge
during calibration of the lowest kV at the highest mA stations for the Focal
Spot selected, so message Auto calibration failure is also shown on the
screen until press the Auto Calibration button to exit from
Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu.
ONLY IF AUTO-CALIBRATION IS CANCELLED DUE TO

AUTO CALIBRATION FAILURE, CONTINUE THE
AUTO-CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR THE OTHER FOCAL
SPOT. CHECK AT THE END OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE WHICH kV / mA COMBINATIONS HAVE NOT
BEEN AUTO-CALIBRATED FOR EACH FOCAL SPOT (THESE
COMBINATIONS HAVE THE FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBER
SET TO 344). MANUALLY CALIBRATE THESE kV / mA
COMBINATIONS AS EXPLAIN IN SECTION 2.5.2.
When Auto-calibration is successfully performed, message Auto

Calibration OK is shown on the screen until press the Auto Calibration
button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu.
8.
Repeat the same procedure for the Large Focal Spot.

on the GSM menu.
Select the Large Focal Spot by pressing the Large button and then
press the OK button.
on each screen.
Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lighted.
At this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for
the Large Focal Spot.
Before starting the exposures, it is recommended to wait until the Heat
Units value displayed are close to the 20%.
20
CA-1036R2
Calibration
9.
After performing both procedures (for Small and Large Focal Spots),
enter in Manual Calibration mode and select each combination of the
available mA stations for each Focal Spot at the kV break points (40, 50,
80 and 120 kV). Press the Read button to read on the calibration panel
the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each
combination and record the new values in the Data Book.
Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers
larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
2.5.2
10.
11.
Perform the Auto-calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.
12.
Turn the Generator power OFF and set Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the
HT Controller Board in Off position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
MANUAL CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN

This procedure describes the Manual calibration of all the Filament Current
Numbers. It has to be also used to calibrate the kV / mA combinations not
performed during Auto-calibration procedure because it has not been
completed. These combinations have the Filament Current Number set to
344, so only these combinations have to be manually calibrated as described
in this procedure. If Auto-calibration for one of the Focal Spots has been
successful, it is only required to perform the manual calibration of the mA station
do not calibrate for the other Focal Spot.
Manual Calibration is initiated at the 80 kV break point by entering the
appropriate Filament Current Number for the proper tube current at each
selectable mA. Calibration at the other kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV)
are obtained by adding or subtracting values as indicated in Table 2-1.
Although the suggested values (Table 2-1) could change depending on the
X-ray tube used, entering those values will approximate accurate calibration
without making excessive exposures.
In Manual Calibration mode, the Filament Current Numbers are shown on the
calibration panel by pressing the Read button after selecting the respective
kV / mA combination. The value can be changed by pressing the Increase or
Decrease buttons of the calibration panel and stored by pressing the Store
button.
Note that in calibration mode, only the mA stations and kV (at the break points)
can be selected.
CA-1036R2
21
Calibration
Table 2-1
mA Calibration Numbers Change
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kV BREAK POINT

mA
A STATION
40
50
80
120
10
A1+7
A1+6
A1
A1 --5
12.5
A2+7
A2+6
A2
A2 --5
16
A3+7
A3+6
A3
A3 --5
20
A4+7
A4+6
A4
A4 --5
25
A5+7
A5+6
A5
A5 --5
32
A6+7
A6+6
A6
A6 --5
40
A7+7
A7+6
A7
A7 --5
50
A8+7
A8+6
A8
A8 --5
64 (or 63 or 65)
A9+7
A9+6
A9
A9 --5
80
A10+7
A10+6
A10
A10 --5
100
A11+10
A11+8
A11
A11 --7
125
A12+10
A12+8
A12
A12 --7
160
A13+10
A13+8
A13
A13 --7
200
A14+10
A14+8
A14
A14 --7
250
A15+10
A15+8
A15
A15 --7
320
A16+14
A16+11
A16
A16 --9
400
A17+14
A17+11
A17
A17 --9
500
A18+14
A18+11
A18
A18 --9
640 (or 630 or 650)
A19+14
A19+11
A19
A19 --9
800
A20+14
A20+11
A20
A20 --9
1000
A21+14
A21+11
A21
A21 --9
Note.-- The mA station values depends on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
22
CA-1036R2
Calibration
1.

G



2.
Turn the Generator ON and enter in calibration mode by pressing the

Manual Calibration button on the GSM menu.
3.

4.
Check that the Heat Units available for the X-ray Tube is 100% or nearly
(HU 0% displayed on the screen).
5.
Accordingly to X-ray tube ratings or maximum Generator power, check

which kV / mA combinations in Table 2-1 are allowed.
If error Tube Overload is shown after selection of a kV / mA combination,
it means this combination is not allowed for the selected X-ray Tube.
In calibration mode, if Generator power is exceeded by a kV / mA
combination selection, error E-16 is shown after Preparation. Reset
this error by pressing the Reset Error button.
Note which combinations in Table 2-1 can not be calibrated by making
exposures (combinations not allowed due to Tube rating, maximum
Generator power, space charge, etc.) and the Exposure Time assigned
to these combinations in calibration mode.
6.
CA-1036R2

Mode button. Select the mA station and Exposure Time of each kV / mA
combination not allowed. Increase or decrease the kV value as required
to determine the kV value allowed nearest to the kV value of the
combination. Note the kV value allowed in the respective cell of
Table 2-1.
23
Calibration
7.
Exit from the User Mode screen by pressing the Manual Calibration
button. Select 80 kV and lowest mA station available (first combination
available). Enter a Filament Number of 344 for this combination.
8.
Make an exposure. The mAs read on the mAs Meter must be the same
mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a tolerance of 0.1 mAs
(tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter). If the mAs read is close to
zero, increase the filament number in big steps (a.e. increase values in
40). As the mAs read is close to the mAs displayed on the Console,
increase (or reduce) the filament number in smaller steps (a.e. increase
value in 30, 20, 10, ...).
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high,
decrease the filament number. Press the Store button before making
a new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.
Note
Press the Store button to store the new data (filament number)
before selecting the next kV or mA stations.
Calibration data (presently in memory) may or may not be

close to your requirements. If it is not close, the potential
exists to damage the X-ray tube (i.e. too much mA). Thus, as
you start the mA calibration procedure note how close or how
far off the mA break points are. If a large adjustment (more
than 40 points) is required at the low mA stations, make
estimated adjustments to the high mA stations before those
exposures are made.
9.
Select the next mA station at 80 kV. Before making any exposure, enter
as filament number the value calibrated for the previous mA station
increased in 10.
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high,
decrease the filament number. Press the Store button before making
a new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.
24
CA-1036R2
Calibration
10.
Complete the calibration process for all mA stations at 80 kV as

described before. When select the first mA station for the Large Focal
Spot, enter as a filament number the value calibrated for the first mA
station for the Small Focal Spot. Note that the highest mA station for
Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the lowest mA station
for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
Press the Read button to read on the calibration panel the new value
of the Filament Current Number stored for each mA station at 80 kV.
Record the new values in the Data Book.
Note
When highest mA stations of the Generator can not be calibrated

at 80 kV due to insufficient filament current (the filament current
number has reached the maximum number (999)), replace on the
Filament Board (A3004--09/10) the Resistor R11 for another
resistor with 1.4 / 5 W, and place Jumper JP1 in position A.
Then rename the Filament Board as A3004--11.
ATTENTION: After doing this modification reduce the value
of all the filament current numbers (column for 80 kV) at the
25% and perform the calibration procedure again (from
step-5).
Note
11.
Complete the calibration process for the remaining kV / mA combinations

using Table 2-1 as a guide. It is not necessary to make exposures to do
this. Compute the value for all the kV break points of each available mA
station although the Generator power can not reach all the kV / mA
combinations. Select the corresponding kV / mA combination and enter
the computed value.
12.
Check calibration at all break points (making exposures) and correct any
calibration points as needed.
If Tube Overload error is shown directly after selection of an

allowed combination (refer to step-5.), wait until the X-ray tube
anode cools down to permit the calibration of the mA station.
13.
CA-1036R2
Recalculate the values of the non-allowed combinations in accordance

to the new values obtained by exposures. (Refer to Table 2-1).
25
Calibration
14.

Mode button. Select the mA station, Exposure Time and kV value noted
for each kV / mA combination not allowed (refer to step-6.). Check
calibration at these kV / mA combinations by making exposures. If
needed, enter in calibration mode and correct the Filament Current
Number of the respective kV / mA combination not allowed.
15.
Exit from the User Mode screen by pressing the Manual Calibration
button. In calibration mode, select each combination of the available mA
stations at the kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV). Press the Read
button to read on the kV Display the new value of the Filament Current
Number stored for each combination. Record the new values in the Data
Book.
Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers
larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
26
16.
17.
If required, perform the calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.
18.
After calibration of Filament Current Numbers:

G
Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.
Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer.
Set Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in

Off position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.6
AEC CALIBRATION
This section describes the adjustments needed to calibrate the AEC according
to the customer input. Therefore, AEC exposures will be made during the
calibration process in order to insure AEC functionality.
The Optical Density is controlled by the values stored in the respective memory
locations. These values are influenced by film speed, screen speed, dark room
procedures and customer requirements.
Use a homogeneous Phantom with enough density to produce an exposure of
100 ms, the AEC will be calibrated to produce a density of 1.0 (or the customer
preference Optical Density) at 70 kV, and then AEC tracking will be adjusted to
produce the same density at 55 kV, 90 kV and 110 kV.
Note
For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the
customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium
Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed
has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (e.g. 200--Slow,
400--Medium, 800--Fast).
Note
When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital

Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density:
-- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software
tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation).
-- or measure the Dose level:
-- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber.
-- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with
the Grid removed.
The following table indicates the Memory Locations related to AEC Calibration.
FUNCTION
CA-1036R2
MEMORY LOCATION
AEC-1 CALIBRATION
E04
AEC-1 TRACKING
E08
AEC-2 CALIBRATION
E09
AEC-2 TRACKING
E10
AEC-3 CALIBRATION
E20
AEC-4 CALIBRATION / PHOTOMULTIPLIER AEC CALIBRATION
E23
AEC-3 and AEC-4 TRACKING (equal value for both)
E24
AEC DENSITY SCALE
E12
27
Calibration
Illustration 2-1
Automatic Exposure Control
DAC
Jumper
Adjustment
(Potentiomer)
ATP Console CPU

Microprocessor
COMPARATOR
V ref
V out
Reference
AEC STOP
Ramp
(from Ion Chamber)
Data Bus
to cut the exposure
EXP ORDER
STRT DR
DAC Vout (Reference)
(calibration data setting)
Ion Chamber Output
EXP Start
AEC STOP
(AEC CONTROL PCB)
AEC Function Waveform
2.6.1
EXP Stop
PREVIOUS CHECKS
Make sure the automatic processor works correctly, and the concentration and
temperature of the solutions comply with manufacturer specifications.
Obtain a sensitometric curve to determine gamma () of the film and the solution
quality. The procedure normally requires a sensitometer, but if it is not available
proceed as follows:
1.
Make two exposures using the same kV and Film/Screen combination

(medium is recommended) but with different mAs settings, mAs(f1) and
mAs(f2).
2.
Develop and measure the Density (d) of each, d(f1) and d(f2).
3.
Determine gamma () by the formula:

=
d(f2) d(f1)
log 10
mAs(f2)
mAs(f1)
Gamma () must be between 2 and 3, if not change or renew solutions.
28
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.6.2
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT FOR THREE FIELD DETECTORS
Note
CA-1036R2
Some Ion Chambers does not provide balance potentiometers for

Three Field Detectors. Continue calibration process in Section
2.6.3 Optical Density Adjustment.
1.
Set the Master Gain potentiometer of the Ion Chambers to mid range
(refer to Ion Chamber documentation).
2.
Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position A: JP3 for
Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or JP2 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.
3.
Set SID at the Focal Distance of the Grid installed in the Table Bucky
(usually 100 cm) or in the Vertical Bucky Stand (usually 150 cm).
4.
Collimate the X-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields but
does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.
5.
Place Copper plates (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the

Collimator Filter Holder: 1.5 mm for SID of 100 cm, 1 mm for SID 150 cm.
(1 mm Copper 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).
6.
Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Calibration number in E04,
E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The range for AEC
calibration numbers are from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.
7.
Enter in calibration mode selecting a Workstation configured for the Ion

Chamber to be calibrated. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by
pressing the Go to User Mode button.
29
Calibration
8.
30
Select on the Console:

G
RAD Menu: 70 kV, 200 mA Large Focus (or the first mA station for
Large Focus if 200 mA station is set for Small Focus) and 1 second
back-up time.
AEC Menu: Central Area , Density 0 and Medium

Film/Screen.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
9.
Note
CA-1036R2
Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure
Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If
necessary, change the Copper thickness or mA station and make the
exposure again.
The Actual Exposure Parameters area shows the last exposure

parameters when: exposure is finished by the AEC, exposure is
aborted by releasing the exposure control, or after pressing the
Reset Error button.
10.
Deselect Center Area and select Left Area. Make an exposure

without film in the cassette and record the Exposure Time. If this time is
not equal to the Center Area time ( 7%), check that the Ion Chamber
is parallel to the X-ray Tube and make an exposure again. If it is parallel,
adjust Left Area balance potentiometer to increase or decrease
Exposure Time. Repeat this process until both Exposure Times for
Center Area and Left Area are equal.
11.
Deselect Left Area and select Right Area. Make an exposure without
film in the cassette and record the Exposure Time. If this time is not equal
to the Center Area time ( 7%), adjust Right Area balance
potentiometer to increase or decrease Exposure Time. Repeat process
until both Exposure Times for Center Area and Right Area are equal.
12.
Check that the three scan Areas have equal Exposure Time ( 7%):
G
Center Area with Left Area, Center Area with Right Area,
and Left Area with Right Area.
All three Areas.
13.
Exit from the Go to User Mode screen by pressing the Manual

Calibration button and exit from calibration mode.
14.
Repeat the above steps for all the Ion Chambers installed with the
Generator.
31
Calibration
2.6.3
OPTICAL DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
Note
The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same

point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure.
The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with
relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to
center of the Film.
Illustration 2-2
How to measure the Film Optical Density
USEFUL BEAM
FILM
DENSITOMETER
32
CA-1036R2
Calibration
ION CHAMBERS WITH DETECTOR GAIN SWITCHES

OR WITH POTENTIOMETER
1.
Set the Detector Gain switches (or gain potentiometer) of the Ion
Chamber to mid range (refer to Ion Chamber documentation). (If the Ion
Chamber is provided with the Generator, this adjustment is Factory set.)
The following tables indicate the switch position for the Vacutec Ion
Chamber (Factory set).
VACUTEC ION CHAMBER -- BAK 70 151 with Amplifier 70 901

SWITCH POSITION
GAIN
SW1
SW2
SW3
0.1 V / Gy (10 V 100 Gy)
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.5 V / Gy (10 V 20 Gy)
ON
OFF
OFF
1 V / Gy (10 V 10 Gy)
OFF
ON
OFF
2 V / Gy (10 V 5 Gy)
OFF
OFF
ON
OUTPUT SIGNAL
SW4
Positive
ON
Negative
OFF
NORMAL FACTORY SELECTION: 1 V / Gy (10 V 10 Gy) - Positive
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
VACUTEC DIGITAL ION CHAMBER -- BAK 70 151 with Amplifier 70 902

SWITCH POSITION
GAIN
OUTPUT SIGNAL
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
0.1 V / Gy (10 V 100 Gy)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.5 V / Gy (10 V 20 Gy)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
1 V / Gy (10 V 10 Gy)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
2 V / Gy (10 V 5 Gy)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4 V / Gy (10 V 2.5 Gy)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Positive or Negative polarity of the ramp signal is selected with a switch at the Ramp Module.
The Ramp Module is a 9-pin Sub-D connector plugged to the Ion Chamber cable.
Positive polarity of the ramp signal is factory set.
NORMAL FACTORY SELECTION: 1 V / Gy (10 V 10 Gy) - Positive
CA-1036R2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
33
Calibration
2.
Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position A: JP3 for
3.
4.
5.

6.
E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The useful range for AEC
calibration numbers is from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.
7.

8.
9.
Note
34
back-up time.

Film/Screen.
necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA
station) and make the exposure again.

Reset Error button.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
10.
Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the

customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical
Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
11.
To change the density:

G
For Ion Chamber with Gain switches:

-- If the Optical Density obtained is 33% above of the desired
density, increase the gain with the switches. Repeat step-10.
-- If the Optical Density obtained is 33% below of the desired
density, decrease the gain with the switches. Repeat step-10.
-- If the Optical Density obtained is in between 33% of the desired
density, change the AEC calibration number. Exit from the Go to
User Mode screen by pressing the Manual Calibration button
and in calibration mode set the new AEC calibration number for the
respecetive Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23). The Optical
Density increases / decreases when the calibration number is
increased / decreased. Then enter in User Mode screen and
repeat step-10.
Note
CA-1036R2
For Ion Chamber with Master Gain potentiometer, adjust this

potentiometer until the desired density is obtained by repeating
step-10. If the adjustment is not achieved with the Master Gain
potentiometer, change the AEC calibration number. Exit from the
Go to User Mode screen by pressing the Manual Calibration
button and in calibration mode set the new AEC calibration
number for the respecetive Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or
E23). The Optical Density increases / decreases when the
calibration number is increased / decreased. Then enter in Go to
User Mode screen and repeat step-10.
The AEC accuracy is better in all the useful range as the AEC
calibration number is closer to 70.
12.
Generator.
13.

14.
Record all the values for the Memory Locations in the Data Book.
35
Calibration
ION CHAMBERS WITHOUT DETECTOR GAIN SWITCHES

OR WITHOUT POTENTIOMETER
Note
36
1.
Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position B: JP3 for
2.
Set to mid range, the following potentiometer on the AEC Control Board:
R10 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R22 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.
The density adjustment of ALL the Ion Chambers in the system are
affected by this potentiometer.
3.
4.
5.

6.
E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The useful range for AEC
calibration numbers is from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.
7.

8.

G
back-up time.

Film/Screen.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
9.
Note
CA-1036R2
necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change
the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final
Copper thickness and mA station selected.

Reset Error button.
10.

11.
Repeat the above steps for each Ion Chamber.
12.

13.

customer. Make an exposure (use the final Copper thickness and the
selected mA station noted before), develop the film and take note of the
Optical Density measured for each Ion Chamber.
14.

15.
Repeat steps 12. and 13. for each Ion Chamber.
37
Calibration
16.
Take the maximum and minimum value of the O. Densities measured

before, sum them and divide the result by two. Subtract this value from
density 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density) to obtain the O.
Density difference.
O.D. difference = O.D. customer preference --
O.D. max + O.D. min

2
Calculate the new O. Density by adding the O. D. difference (with its sign
+ or --) to the value of the O. Density measured for the Ion Chamber closer
to 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
new O.D. = O.D. mesured + (O.D. difference)
For this Ion Chamber, adjust the potentiometer (turning it clockwise will
decrease the O. Density) R10 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R22 for
Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 (at least one turn).
pressing the Go to User Mode button. Make another exposure, develop
the film and check the Optical Density. Repeat this action (adjusting the
potentiometer and making exposures) until the new Optical Density
(calculated before) for this Ion Chamber is obtained.
17.
The Optical Density for each Ion Chamber has to be adjusted to 1.0 (or
the customer preference O. Density).
Calibration button and in calibration mode select the AEC calibration
number for the respective Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23).
Change the AEC calibration number: The Optical Density increases /
decreases when the calibration number is increased / decreased. Then
enter in Go to User Mode screen.
Make another exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density.
Repeat this action (changing the respective Memory Location and
making exposures) until the desired Optical Density is obtained.
Note
38
The AEC accuracy is better in all the useful range as the AEC
calibration number is closer to 70.
18.
Repeat step-17. until the desired Optical Density for each Ion Chamber
is obtained.
19.

20.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.6.4
kV COMPENSATION
To maintain constant AEC Optical Density regardless of the kV at which a film
is exposed, the Generator provides kV compensation. (Refer to Illustration 2-3)
Perform the following steps to determine whether or not AEC Tracking of Optical
Density must be adjusted.
CA-1036R2
1.
Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Tracking number in E08,
E10 and E24 Memory Locations is 0. Exit from calibration mode.
2.

3.

G
back-up time.

Film/Screen.
4.
Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the
Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the
Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the
exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station
selected for 55 kV.
5.
Select 90 kV. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check
that the Exposure Time is higher than 20 ms. If necessary for that, change
the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the
selected for 90 kV.
6.
selected for 110 kV.
7.

customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper
thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop
the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures.
Check that the film variation range is the same 0.2 of the Optical
Density (20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR)
obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.6.3).
39
Calibration
If the variation value is not 0.2 of the Optical Density (20% of Image
Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) calculate the new value for the
AEC Tracking number in each Memory Location in the following manner:
8.
Note
If the Optical Density at 55 kV has to be decreased and the Optical

Density above 70 kV has to be increased then increase the
Tracking value in one.
If the Optical Density at 55 kV has to be increased and the Optical

Density above 70 kV has to be decreased then decrease the
Tracking value in one.
A tracking value of 10 will have no effect on AEC density (used in

solid state detectors).
a.

Calibration button and in calibration mode select the respective
Memory Location (E08, E10 or E24).
b.
Values for AEC Tracking range is from --10 to +10. Determine the
correct value for the needed AEC Tracking change.
AEC-kV
TRACKING
CURVE
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1
--1
--2
--3
--4
--5
--6
--7
--8
--9
--10
VALUE TO ENTER
IN THE MEMORY
LOCATION
10
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
247
246
c.
9.
Note
Enter the new value and store it. Enter in user mode inside
calibration mode by pressing the Go to User Mode button and
repeat this process from step-7. until the desired density
compensation is obtained.

customer. Make an exposure at 110 kV (use the final Copper thickness
and the selected mA station noted before for 110 kV), develop the film
and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures. Check
that the film variation range is the same 0.2 of the Optical Density
(20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) obtained before
at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.6.3). If the variation
value is not 0.2 repeat step-8.
Calibration of AEC Tracking at 110 kV modifies the adjustment
done at 55 kV and 90 kV. Repeat exposures of step-7. and check
that they are correct.
In case that the AEC Tracking at 110 kV places the adjustment at
55 kV and 90 kV out of range, choose the AEC Tracking value
more convenient for the application.
40
CA-1036R2
Calibration
10.
Generator.
11.

12.
Illustration 2-3
AEC kV Tracking Curve
250
DAC OUTPUT in byte (8 Bit) (U3-2 of AEC Control Board)
200
150
100
10
70
8
6
50
4
2
0
--2
--4
--6
--8
--10
--50
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
kV
CA-1036R2
41
Calibration
2.6.5
PHOTOMULTIPLIER RAD--AEC (DIGITAL RAD) ADJUSTMENT (OPTIONAL)

The Photomultiplier RAD--AEC adjustment can be performed in two ways: one
is the value stored in E23 Memory Location and the other is the high voltage
applied to the Photomultiplier Tube.
The recommended procedure for this adjustment is to store a constant value
in E23 Memory Location and adjust the high voltage applied to the
Photomultiplier Tube.
Note
Value in E23 Memory Location is a common data used for

Photomultiplier AEC Calibration or used for the Fourth Ion
Chamber Calibration (AEC-4).
Perform the following procedure:

1.
Enter in Manual Calibration mode selecting a Workstation configured

for DSI. Select E23 Memory Location and set a value of 127. Then enter
in user mode by pressing the Go to User Mode button.
2.
Set up a Dosimeter as close as possible to the Image Intensifier

Radiation Input to measure the Entrance Image Intensifier Exposure
Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the
entire active volume within the primary beam. Select the Field of View
for the Image Intensifier to have 9 FOV.
Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter).
Collimate the X-ray beam so it completely covers the Image Intensifier
field but does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.
42
3.
Place 2 mm of Copper (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the

Collimator Filter Holder. (1 mm Copper 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).
4.

G
back-up time.

Film/Screen.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
5.
Activate Digital Prep (--DIGITAL PREP signal = GND on TS3-7

Generator Cabinet). Hold Digital Prep and adjust the high voltage
applied to the Photomultiplier Tube with the potentiometer R12 for Board
A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R23 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 on the AEC Control
Board until measure --400 VDC between TS1--39 and TS1--42 (GND) in
the Generator Cabinet.
6.
The Dose is affected in the following manner:
7.
Note
Increases when the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier

Tube is decreased. (Example: if 100 R Dose is obtained with
--400 VDC, 200 R Dose may be obtained decreasing the high
voltage to --300 VDC).
Decreases when the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier

Tube is increased. (Example: if 100 R Dose is obtained with --400
VDC, 50 R Dose may be obtained increasing the high voltage to
--450 VDC).
Make an exposure and adjust the following potentiometer on the AEC

Control Board: R12 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R23 for Board
A3012--x6/x7/x9 on the AEC Control Board; until getting a Dose around
100 R per frame (at 9 FOV) (for more information refer to the Image
System documentation).
If the photo tube voltage required is too low, decrease the AEC
calibration number in the E23 Memory Location and repeat the
process.
8.
CA-1036R2
Record the E23 Memory Location in the Data Book.
43
Calibration
2.6.6
AEC OPTICAL DENSITY SCALE

AEC is calibrated with Density 0 selected (Normal Optical Density). The
Optical Density can be increased or decreased in several steps.
The variation percentage of the density scale is factory set at 25%. This
variation can be set according to the customer preferences by changing the
value stored in E12 Memory Location. This value applies to both tubes.
Depending on the Console model, the range of the scale is from --2 to +2 or
from --4 to +4 (optional ).
The following tables show some examples for the variation percentage of the
density scale with reference to the value stored in E12 Memory Location.
DENSITY SCALE FROM --2 TO +2 . VARIATION OVER NORMAL OPTICAL DENSITY (N)
E12 VALUE
--2
--1
+1
+2
N x 0.90
N x 0.95
N x 1.05
N x 1.10
10
N x 0.80
N x 0.90
N x 1.10
N x 1.20
25
N x 0.50
N x 0.75
N x 1.25
N x 1.50
NOTE: If the value stored in E12 Memory Location is 0, 25 or 255, the variation percentage is 25%.
DENSITY SCALE FROM --4 TO +4 (OPTIONAL) . VARIATION OVER NORMAL OPTICAL DENSITY (N)
E12
VALUE
--4
--3
--2
--1
+1
+2
+3
+4
N x 0.82
N x 0.86
N x 0.91
N x 0.95
N x 1.05
N x 1.10
N x 1.16
N x 1.22
10
N x 0.68
N x 0.75
N x 0.83
N x 0.91
N x 1.10
N x 1.21
N x 1.33
N x 1.46
25
N x 0.41
N x 0.51
N x 0.64
N x 0.80
N x 1.25
N x 1.56
N x 1.95
N x 2.44
NOTE: With scale from --4 to +4 the useful range for the value stored in E12 Memory Location is from 1 to 25 .
Record the value for E12 Memory Location in the Data Book.
44
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.7
FLUORO CALIBRATION
This generator uses Pulsed Fluoro at fixed or variable rate. This technique is
a series of short exposures at the TV frame rate (fixed rate) or at the selected
PPS (variable rate).
Fluoro exposures are controlled by kV with a constant filament current. The kV
values are manually (Manual mode) or automatically (ABC mode) adjusted to
obtain the desired brightness (entrance dose rate) on the Image Intensifier.
The Fluoro calibration consists of setting values in the corresponding Extended
Memory Locations for Fluoro use. The following table indicates the relationship
between Fluoro and Extended Memory Locations.
FUNCTION
MEMORY LOCATIONS
Fluoro Filament Setting
E17
Maximum Fluoro kV
E19
Fluoro mA Display Calibration at 50 kV
E25
E26
E27
The functions of these extended Memory Locations are:
E17 is used to store data that controls the Maximum Skin Dose Radiation
at the following maximum levels (Regulation limits) (1 Rad = 8.7 mGy).
G
5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) for systems working with Manual mode

(Non-ABC).
10 R/min (87 mGy/min) for systems working with Automatic mode

(ABC).
Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate must
be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to Dosimeter
calibration accuracy. (Refer to Table 2-2.)
Table 2-2
Rejection Limits Based on Meter Calibration Accuracy
REJECTIONS LIMITS
METER CALIBRATION
ACCURACY
FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
5%
4.75 R/min (41.3 mGy/min)
10%
15%
4.25 R/min (37 mGy/min)
CA-1036R2
45
Calibration
Note
E19 is used to set maximum Fluoro kV. This value is determined by the
type of TV camera and type of images desired. For general fluoroscopic
use with a conventional TV system, 120 kV is recommended. A lower
maximum setting will produce more contrast on the TV system but less
penetration for large patients.
E25, E26, E27 are used to calibrate the Fluoro mA Display. These values
will be shown on the Fluoro mA Display during Fluoro exposures
whenever maximum PPS are selected.
The Fluoro mA Display values entered into the Extended Memory

Locations E25, E26 and E27 are also used to calculate Heat Units.
It is important to enter accurate values.
Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps:

1.
Turn the generator ON.
Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly
warmed-up (at less 15 minutes).
2.
Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure

entire active volume within the primary beam.
Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly as close as possible to the
Table-Top, fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image
Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation input to Image Intensifier
with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration 2-4).
46
3.
Enter in Manual Calibration mode through a Fluoro workstation and

read the Filament Number at 120 kV / 10 mA. Divide this value by four
(4) and enter it as starting value for E17 Memory Location (Fluoro
Filament Setting).
4.
Select E19 Memory Location and set the maximum Fluoro kV at 120 kV
or more if it is possible.
5.

Mode button and select the Fluoro Menu.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Illustration 2-4
Fluoro Entrance Exposure Rate Test Set-up
DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE
ASSEMBLY
PROBE
SET AS CLOSE
AS POSSIBLE
30 cm
(12)
USEFUL BEAM
LEAD APRON (BLOCKER)
IMAGE SYSTEM
OVERTABLE SOURCE
IMAGE SYSTEM
SPOT FILM DEVICE
USEFUL BEAM
LEAD APRON (BLOCKER)
PROBE
TABLE TOP
DIAGNOSTIC
SOURCE
ASSEMBLY
UNDERTABLE SOURCE
CA-1036R2
47
Calibration
6.
Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode. Make a Fluoro exposure
at maximum kV that will be used in the system and measure the dose
applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for 10 R/min
(87 mGy/min) or 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) (refer to Table 2-2.).
In case that the value is not acquired, change the Fluoro Filament Setting
stored in E17 as required until it is correctly calibrated to that dose. Keep
in mind that radiation increases or decreases in accordance to value in
E17 is increased or decreased.
7.
The mA values displayed during Fluoro exposures are stored in E25, E26
and E27 Memory Locations. The method used to obtain the Fluoro mA
values is to measure the average mA using a mA meter in Fluoro.
During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in
DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the
HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the
banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.
Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode. Make the following
Fluoro exposures:
G
Make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV and take note below the mA

reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at minimum kV (E25).

reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at medium kV (E26).

reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at maximum kV
(E27).
FL mA value at 50 kV
(E25)
48
(E26)
(E27)
8.
Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).
9.
Exit from the User Mode screen by pressing Manual Calibration

button.
10.
Select E19 Memory Location if it is required to reduce the value for the
maximum Fluoro kV in the installation.
11.
Select the E25, E26 and E27 Memory Locations and store the respective
mA values noted before multiplied by 10 (a.e. if the mA value noted is
3.2, store the value 32 in the respective Memory Location).
12.
Record the new values in the Data Book.
13.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.8
ABC CALIBRATION
The purpose of the ABC System is to maintain an optimum constant Image
Tube Output Brightness by controlling the X-ray kV during Fluoro exams,
regardless of changes in the patient opacity viewed on the TV monitor.
The closed-loop ABC System can monitor the Image Tube Output Brightness
through two ways: Photomultiplier Tube or TV Camera.
2.8.1
ABC SYSTEM WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE
Note
This operation requires the AEC Control Board A3012--x6/x7/x9

(Digital version).
On this system the Photomultiplier current signal, which is proportional to the

Image Tube Output Brightness, is used as brightness signal PT Input for the
ABC circuitry of the Generator. (Refer to Illustration 2-5).
This analogic signal is converted to a voltage signal in the Photomultiplier
Amplifier Board and sent to a peak-detector in the AEC Control Board. The peak
signal obtained is then held through a Sample and Hold circuitry after a
synchronism pulse. The peak signal held is adapted to obtain finally the ABC
IN signal which is so the Photomultiplier signal-peak held between
synchronism pulses. This signal is then compared to a window reference.
Brightness error at the comparator output is sent as kV Up and kV Down to
the Generator where is used to drive the Fluoro kV control. The closed-loop
operation requires more or less brightness thru kV Up and kV Down demand
signals respectively. Patient Entrance Dose is automatically varied so that
optimum constant Image Tube Output Brightness is maintained.
CA-1036R2
49
Calibration
The optimum brightness level in ABC mode is set by adjusting Brightness

Control Resistor R13 on the AEC Control Board, which controls the output of
the Photomultiplier Tube High Voltage power supply on the Interface Control
Board (PT CRL plus 5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts
programs the output to approximately --1200 volts). The window comparator
requires an input range from 0 to +10 VDC for the ABC IN (the optimum
brightness level will be achieved with a value between 5 and 7 VDC).
Illustration 2-5
ABC System for Photomultiplier Tube
PT SPLY
(Photomultiplier Voltage supply)
VIDEO
MONITOR
AEC CONTROL PCB
BRIGHT. LEVEL ADJ.
TV
CAMERA
R13
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
AMPLIFIER
BOARD (A3168--xx)
LIGHT
FL
PT INPUT
(Brightness signal)
U2
BUFFER
U12
PT CRL
I/V
CONVERTER
U10
PEAK
DETECT.
SAMPLE
&
HOLD
WINDOW ADJ.
R11 -- R14
U8
WINDOW
COMPARATOR
CONTROL CONSOLE
IMAGE
TUBE
KV UP & KV DWN
PATIENT
X-RAY TABLE
HV
TRANSFORMER
X-RAY TUBE
50
HT CONTROL PCB
INTERFACE
CONTROL PCB
POWER MODULE
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Window reference could be adjusted first to set mid-way the brightness level
(+5 VDC), and second to increase or decrease the range of response and
sensitivity of the kV control to input variations (brightness changes). If oscillation
occurs during ABC fluoro exposure, increase the dead zone by adjusting
Resistors R11 and R14 on the AEC Control Board. (Refer to Illustration 2-6 for
ABC waveforms).
ABC IN
(U8--8)
window reference
Illustration 2-6
ABC Waveforms in AEC Control Board
--kV Down (J1--19)
DWN PT reference (R11)

Brightness level
(Gain adj.)
UP PT reference (R14)
High Logic
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp DOWN
Low
Logic
--kV UP (J1--6)
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp UP
Adjust the ABC system for Photomultiplier Tube as follow:

1.
Be sure that the Video System and the Image Intensifier are powered and
operating correctly.
2.

Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter), fully
open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light
beam.
CA-1036R2
51
Calibration
3.
Adjust TV Camera gain for 1 volt peak-to-peak composite video output.
4.
Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode.
5.

Collimator Filter Holder.
6.
Calculate the value of the optimum radiation (that will give optimum
brightness) usually is 2R/frame at 9 FOV (for more information refer to
Image System documentation).
Examples:
For 25 frame/second optimum radiation is 3 mR/min.
2 R/frame x 25 frame/s = 50 R/s.
50 R/s x 60 s/min = 3000 R/min = 3 mR/min.
For 30 frame/second optimum radiation is 3.6 mR/min.
60 R/s x 60 s/min = 3600 R/min = 3.6 mR/min.
The optimum radiation value should be measured at Image Intensifier
Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can not be
removed, this value should be multiplied by two or by the value specified
as Grid Absorption Factor.
7.
Note
52
Make a Fluoro exposure at 70 kV and measure the radiation. Optimum

radiation is obtained by modifying the Fluoro kV or the Copper thickness
in the Collimator Filter Holder. First modify the Fluoro kV, if it is more than
80 kV or less than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in 0.1 mm (or
0.2 mm). Note the value of Fluoro KV and Copper thickness used to
obtain the optimum radiation.
Radiation increases when kV is increased or Copper thickness is

reduced.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
8.
9.
CA-1036R2
Perform the following adjustments in the AEC Control Board:

a.
Adjust R13 in order to obtain 6 VDC on TP3 (ABC IN).
b.
Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and increase 2 kV and

check the increased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN) (if this value
has not been increased, increase 1 kV more). Note this value
(consider it as KV-DOWN-SEL).
c.
Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and decrease 2 kV and

check the decreased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN) (if this value
has not been decreased, decrease 1 kV more). Note this value
(consider it as KV-UP-SEL).
d.
Obtain in TP1 the same voltage noted as kV-DOWN-SEL

(DOWN PT) by adjusting the Potentiometer R11.
e.
Obtain in TP2 the same voltage noted as kV-UP-SEL (UP PT) by

adjusting the Potentiometer R14.
Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and ABC mode.
10.
Make a Fluoro exposure and check that the kV does not change.
11.
Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 40 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure and
check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.)
2 kV without System problems.
12.
Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 100 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure
and check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.)
53
Calibration
2.8.2
ABC SYSTEM WITH TV CAMERA

The ABC can be performed with an Analogic Signal Output (ABC OUT)
proportional to the brightness or with the Composite Video Signal Output from
the TV Camera.
The ABC OUT signal from the TV Camera is compatible with the Generator
when the range is from 0 VDC (dark image) to 10 VDC (bright image) and the
Optimum Brightness is achieved at around 6 VDC.
When a TV Camera without a direct ABC OUT signal is used, the Composite
Video signal (which amplitude is proportional to the image tube output
brightness) is sent to an RF Adaptation Board where it is transformed into an
ABC OUT analogic signal. In this case, the brightness level is taken from a
rectangular window from the center of the raster. (Refer to Illustration 2-7).
This analogic signal in the AEC Control Board (PT Input in Board
A3012--x1/x2/x5 and ABC OUT in Board A3012--x6/x7/x9) is filtered, and
compared to a window reference. Brightness error at the comparator output is
sent as kV Up and kV Down to the Generator where is used to drive the fluoro
kV control. The closed-loop operation requires more or less brightness thru kV
Up and kV Down demand signals respectively. Patient entrance dose is
automatically varied so that constant image tube output brightness is
maintained.
Illustration 2-7
ABC System for TV Camera
RF ADAPTATION BOARD
VIDEO OUT
MONITOR
TV
CAMERA
VIDEO IN
AEC CONTROL PCB
LIGHT
PT INPUT
(Brightness signal)
ABC OUT
FILTER
R5 -- C11
WINDOW
COMPARATOR
U8
WINDOW ADJ.
R11 -- R14
CONTROL CONSOLE
IMAGE
TUBE
KV UP & KV DWN
PATIENT
X-RAY TABLE
HV
TRANSFORMER
X-RAY TUBE
54
HT CONTROL PCB
POWER MODULE
CA-1036R2
Calibration
The optimum brightness level in ABC mode is set by adjusting the gain at R27
on the RF Adaptation Board. The ABC OUT signal requires an input range
from 0 to +10 VDC (the stabilized value will be between 5 and 7 VDC).
Window reference could be adjusted first to set mid-way the brightness level (+6
VDC), and second to increase or decrease the range of response and sensitivity
of the kV control to input variations (brightness changes). If oscillation occurs
during ABC fluoro exposure, increase the dead zone by adjusting R11 and R14
on the AEC Control Board. (Refer to Illustration 2-8 for ABC waveforms)
For system interface, refer to RF Adaptation Board. Adjust ABC System
according to the following procedures.
ABC IN
(U8--8)
window reference
Illustration 2-8
ABC Waveforms in AEC Control Board
--kV Down (J1--19)
DWN PT reference (R11)

Brightness level
(Gain adj.)
UP PT reference (R14)
High Logic
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp DOWN
Low
Logic
--kV UP (J1--6)
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp UP
CA-1036R2
55
Calibration
2.8.2.1
ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA COMPATIBLE WITH
THE GENERATOR
1.
2.

beam.
3.
4.
Set Jumper JP21 to position B on the RF Adaptation Board.
5.
6.

7.
Examples:
56
CA-1036R2
Calibration
8.
Note
CA-1036R2


reduced.
9.
Perform the adjustment for the window test as specified on the TV

Camera manuals. This window defines the area of the image where the
brightness will be captured for the ABC and it should be the 25% of the
image area.
10.
Adjust the TV Camera to obtain +6 VDC (or the voltage supplied by the
TV Camera as optimum brightness) on TP3 (ABC IN) on the AEC Control
Board (Refer the TV Camera manuals).
11.

a.

b.

c.
Obtain in TP1 the same voltage noted as kV-DOWN-SEL (DOWN

PT) by adjusting the Potentiometer R11.
d.

12.
Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and ABC mode.
13.
14.
15.
57
Calibration
2.8.2.2
ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH AN ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA NOT

COMPATIBLE WITH THE GENERATOR
1.
2.

beam.
3.
4.
Set on the RF Adaptation Board, Jumpers JP21 to position A and JP20

to position B (for negative ABC signal) or to position C (for positive
ABC signal).
5.
6.

7.
Examples:
58
CA-1036R2
Calibration
8.
Note

reduced.
9.
CA-1036R2

Perform the adjustment for the window test as specified on the TV

Camera manuals. This window defines the area of the image where the
brightness will be captured for the ABC and it should be the 25% of the
image area.
10.
Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and Non-ABC mode.
11.
Adjust R29 (OFFSET) on the RF Adaptation Board to have 0 VDC in TP7.
12.
Adjust gain at R27 (Gain) on the RF Adaptation Board to make the ABC
OUT signal equal to +6 VDC. Measure ABC OUT in TP-7 of RF
Adaptation Board or in TP3 (ABC IN) of the AEC Control Board.
13.

a.

check the increased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN). Note this
value (consider it as KV-DOWN-SEL).
b.

check the decreased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN). Note this
value (consider it as KV-UP-SEL).
c.

d.

14.
15.
16.
17.
59
Calibration
2.8.2.3
ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH NO ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA

1.
2.

beam.
3.
4.
Set on the RF Adaptation Board, Jumpers JP21 to position A and JP20

to position A.
5.
6.

7.
Examples:
60
CA-1036R2
Calibration
8.
Note


reduced.
9.
Perform the adjustment for the window test. This window defines the
area of the image where the brightness will be captured for the ABC.
a.
Calculate the image area r2 (clear circle on the monitor). (r=circle

radius).
b.
Calculate the 25% of the image area ( r2/4).
c.
Calculate the sides of the window: l =
d.
Mark the calculated area on the monitor (square).
e.
Position jumper JP18 of RF Adaptation Board in A. A window will

be displayed on the monitor.
f.
Adjust in the RF Adaptation Board the following potentiometers to

move the window under the frame marked on the monitor in
step--d:
-----
g.
CA-1036R2
r24 (I= side of square).
R1 potentiometer (vertical position)

R2 potentiometer (vertical width)
R3 potentiometer (horizontal position)
R4 potentiometer (horizontal width)
Once the window is configured, place JP18 in B again at RF

Adaptation Board.
10.
Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and Non-ABC mode.
11.
Adjust the gain at R27 on the RF Adaptation Board to make the ABC
OUT signal equal to +6 VDC. Measure ABC OUT in TP7 of RF
Adaptation Board or in TP3 (ABC IN) of the AEC Control Board.
61
Calibration
12.
62

a.

b.

c.

d.

13.
14.
15.
16.
CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.9
FINAL CHECKS
Verify that all Configuration and Calibration data have been properly stored in
memory.
1.
Enter in calibration mode and check that the values noted for the
Filament Current Numbers and Extended Memory Locations tables
of the Data Book are the same that the values displayed and stored in
memory. Press the Read button to read the stored values.
2.
Exit from calibration mode and Service mode.
3.
Turn the Generator OFF and verify position of dip switches on the HT
Controller Board are:
4.
CA-1036R2
Dip switch 3000SW2-2 in Off position (enables Filament and

Rotor Interlocks).
Dip switch 3000SW2-4 in Off position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
Set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in
Off position to place the Generator in normal operating mode.
63
Calibration
64
CA-1036R2
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
with Low or High Speed Starter
Troubleshooting
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
JAN 24, 2000
First edition
NOV 1, 2000
New edition
FEB 17, 2005
New error codes and procedures
APR 15, 2005
New Battery Charger
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
TR-1005R4
Alert readers on pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent

Troubleshooting
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Tools and Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
Low DC Voltage Power Supplies Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
Microprocessors and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
Replacement of Memory in ATP Console CPU Board

and/or HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures Related to the Push-button Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
APR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2
APR Re-initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
APR Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4
APR Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures Related to the Touch Screen Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2.5.2
Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2.5.3
External Backup of the APR Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Procedures Related to the Battery Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.6.1
Battery Charger Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.6.2
Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Procedures Related To the Capacitor Assisted Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
2.7.1
Procedure for Storage Capacitors Discharging and Voltage Testing .
23
SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
CENTRAL LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
5.1
HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
5.1.1
HT Controller Board (A3000--10/20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
5.1.2
HT Controller Board (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
2.6
2.7
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
Section
ii
Page
5.2
Filament Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
5.3
Interface Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
5.4
LVDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
5.5
Charge/Discharge Monitor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
5.6
Locks Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
5.7
ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
5.8
Fluoro CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
5.9
Fluoro -- RF Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
5.9.1
RF Adaptation Board (A3514--03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
5.9.2
RF Adaptation Board (A3514--04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
5.10 AEC Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
5.10.1 AEC Control Board (A3012--01/02/05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
5.10.2 AEC Control Board (A3012--06/07/09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
5.11 AEC Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
5.12 LF-RAC Board (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
5.13 LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
5.13.1 Delayed Switch-off Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
5.13.2 Control DRAC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
5.13.3 Interface DRAC--HF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
5.13.4 DRAC Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
5.14 Cabinet Miscellaneous for Line Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
5.15 Boards Related to Battery Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
5.15.1 Battery Charger Board (A3285--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
5.15.2 Isolated Stand-Alone Control Board (A3138--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
5.15.3 Energy Guard Board (A3264--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
5.15.4 Line Monitor Board (A3139--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
5.16 Boards Related to Capacitor Assisted Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
5.16.1 Capacitor Charger Board (A3517--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
5.16.2 Line Selector Board (A3525--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
5.16.3 Line Selector Board (A3525--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
5.16.4 Brake Board (A3567--01/02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
The Generator contains many self-diagnostic routines which greatly facilitate
troubleshooting. Self-diagnostic functions require that all microprocessors
function correctly. Each microprocessor contains LEDs that indicate its correct
operation.
As a general rule, the first step in any troubleshooting procedure is to verify
correct Power Supply Voltages and perform a visual inspection of all Boards
and Cable connections.
On arrival in the X-ray Room, the Service Engineer should carry out the
following operations:
If the Generator cannot be Powered up, run the troubleshooting for Error
Code E01.
If the Generator can be Powered up:

G
Check which Error Code is displayed on the Console and run the
troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.
If it is not, try to reproduce the failure in the conditions reported by

the Operator. It is possible that the Error Code displayed is
different from either that indicated by the Operator. In all cases,
run the troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.
When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube,

HV Transformer or Circuit Board, is replaced in the system,
perform the respective Configuration and Calibration
procedures.
If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are
Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the
values noted in the Data Book.
If the HT Controller Board is replaced in the Power Module,
transfer U3-EEPROM from the old Board to the new Board.
U3-EEPROM contains calibration data and if U3-EEPROM is
not transferred a complete Calibration must be performed.
Update and record in the Data Book any new data entered in
the Extended Memory Locations.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
1.1
1.2
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Standard service engineers tool kit.
Configuration and Calibration test equipment (refer to Installation

document).
Antistatic Kit.
Oscilloscope (Tektronics 486 or similar).
GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH

VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL
CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON
THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF,

IGBTS.

OF THE EQUIPMENT.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG.
WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS
POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED
IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE
UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED
ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON.
WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS
POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS
TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON.
KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME,
ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE
OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE
FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR
BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD
BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL
OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE
UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE
CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF.
USE CAUTION WHEN
WORKING IN THIS AREA.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON
UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM
ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS
POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV
INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES,
DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON
AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE
CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS
DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL
CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS
AREA.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 2
2.1
GENERAL PROCEDURES
LOW DC VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY TEST

The Generator operates from a Low DC Voltage Power Supply located in the
Front Panel (MOD. 3) of the Generator Cabinet. (Refer to Illustration 2-1).
Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:
P2-3 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage
at this point is +5 0.2 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the +5 VDC
Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
P2-2 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage
at this point is +12 0.1 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the
+12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
P2-1 (--) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage
at this point is --12 0.1 VDC (this voltage must be --12.7 0.1 VDC if
the Console is provided with a Graphic Display). If required, adjust
voltage with the --12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power
Supply Board.
Illustration 2-1
Power Supply in the Front Panel
R26
ADJ. +12 VDC
R25
ADJ. --12 VDC
R12
ADJ. +5 VDC
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
The ATP Console CPU Board operates from a 12 VDC Non-Regulated Supply
located in the Generator Cabinet that supplies to a 5 VDC Switching Regulator
located in the ATP Console CPU Board.
Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:
Note
2.2
TS1-30 (GND) and TS1-29 (+12 V Unr.) on the Generator Cabinet.

Check that the voltage at this point is +12 1.5 VDC.
TP GND and TP +5 on the ATP Console CPU Board. Check that the
voltage at this point is +5 0.2 VDC.
No adjustments are required for both voltage measures. The ATP

Console CPU Board may be located inside the Console or inside
MICROPROCESSORS AND GENERAL OPERATION

The following LEDs indicate the proper operation of each Microprocessor in the
Generator:
The LED DS1 located on the HT Controller Board blinks fast during
power up, then slows to a steady blink of about 2 per second, indicating
that the Microprocessor U5 is operating normally.
The LED DS2 located on the ATP Console CPU Board normally blinks
at the same rate as LED DS1 on the HT Controller Board, indicating that
the Console Microprocessor U30 is operating correctly.
The LED DS1 located on the Fluoro CPU Board only blinks in Fluoro
mode indicating that the Fluoro Microprocessor is operating correctly.
Also observe the following LEDs to facilitate general troubleshooting:
When LED DS1 located on the Interface Control Board is ON (lighting),

it indicates that the Generator is ON.
The LED DS1 located on the ATP Console CPU Board is normally ON
(lighting), indicating that the Watch-Dog Timer of the Console is
operating and insuring the correct timing of data communications with
the HT Controller Board.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
2.3
REPLACEMENT OF MEMORY IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND/OR

HT CONTROLLER BOARD
Before starting up the system, you have to set ON the switch A3024SW2--3 at
the ATP Console CPU Board to enable Service Mode. A few seconds after
pressing the ON button on the Console, you will see E10 (this is shown because
the EPROM U24 has been replaced).
Reset the error indication by pressing the respective button on the Console and
keep it pressed until the Error 10 disappears.
After this, the normal start up will take place.
We recommend setting this switch back to OFF once the installation has been
completed. This will not enable the operator to enter in Configuration or in
Calibration Mode (Service Modes).
2.4
2.4.1
PROCEDURES RELATED TO THE PUSH-BUTTON CONSOLES

APR OPERATION
APR techniques are factory pre-programmed to standard techniques sets. All
parameters of APR techniques may be manually rewritten as required by the
operator and stored in the APR working file for later use (refer to the respective
Operator Manual).
Note
This section only applies to Consoles equipped with Anatomical

Programmer (APR).
Illustration 2-2
APR Module version in Push-buttons Consoles
Display APR
TR-1005R4
Display APR
7
8
Troubleshooting
2.4.2
APR RE-INITIALIZATION
The APR re-initialization makes a new copy of the factory pre-programmed
parameters of the APR techniques in the U23-NVRAM of the ATP Console CPU
Board.
APR re-initialization set the APR techniques only for the selected workstation.
To re-initialize the APR techniques, exit the APR mode and press
simultaneously the push-buttons 5-6-7-8 on the APR module. (Refer to
Illustration 2-2).
The APR re-initialization deletes all the APR parameters and

related selections previously modified and stored by the
operator for both X-ray Tubes.
2.4.3
APR BACKUP
The APR backup makes a copy of the parameters and selections of the APR
techniques stored in the U23-NVRAM to the U18-E2PROM of the ATP Console
CPU Board. This action make a copy of all the APR techniques stored in the
APR working file to the APR backup file .
The APR backup is automatically performed when the equipment is turned
OFF/ON, whenever any APR technique has been modified and stored in the
U23-NVRAM by the operator.
To backup the APR techniques, exit the APR mode and press simultaneously
push-buttons 1-5-6 of the APR module. (Refer to Illustration 2-2).
2.4.4
APR RESTORE
The APR Restore makes a copy of the parameters and selections of the APR
techniques stored in the U18-E2PROM to the U23-NVRAM of the ATP Console
CPU Board. This action replaces the data stored in the APR working file by
the data stored in the APR backup file for all the APR techniques.
The APR Restore is automatically performed when the Console is turned
OFF-ON, whenever any problem had been detected during the U23-NVRAM
checksum.
To restore the APR techniques, turn the Console ON and with the APR mode
OFF press simultaneously the push-buttons 4-7-8 of the APR module. (Refer
to Illustration 2-2).
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
2.5
PROCEDURES RELATED TO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES
DESCRIPTION
The Console and the Generator

do not start up.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
Malfunction of the Power-ON button.
Check if the button works properly.
Cable connection or cable status.
Check that all the internal cable are

connected. (A7031--xx Cable)
Generator / Console is not connected to

mains.
Power ON the Generator / Console.

Check all the power connectors from/to the
power supply (power values are +5V and
+12V).
Power Supply does not work properly.

Check the power input selector, change the
power supply (Kit Power Supply) if the
selector is wrong.
Connect again this cable.
The Console starts but the
Generator do not start.
The Console beeps before start.
There is no image on the screen.
The operator application is not

launched
Upper fans are stopped
Touch panel. If you push a button,

and nothing happens, or another
button is selected
TR-1005R4
Cable A7067--xx is not properly connected
Check all the cables to the board. If the

problem persist, change the A3515--02
board (you should also check the
connection to the Generator)
BIOS error. If there is a problem with the

video chipset the beep code will consist of a
single long beep followed by three short
beeps
Disconnect the power connector. Wait ten

seconds and connect it again. Push the
power button and if the problem persists,
replace the mainboard.
BIOS error. If there is a problem with the

DRAM, the beep code will consist of a single
long beep repeatedly.
Check that the DRAM is connected right. If

so, try to reboot the system, and if the
problem persists, replace the mainboard.
The TFT inverter is not working properly.
First check that the fans are working. If so,

check that cable 55001042 is right
connected. Replace the inverter if the
problem persists.
Cable 55001042 is broken.
Try to move the cable. If the screen

suddenly bright, replace Kit TFT Screen
TPC 12.
Mainboard is broken.
Replace the mainboard. If the problem

persists, replace the whole Console.
The operating system is not working

properly.
Replace the Compact Flash Card.
Power cable is broken
Check the power cable. If it is broken,

replace the power supply
Fan broken
Change the kit fans Console
Calibration error of the touch panel controller
Check the calibration process.
Touch panel controller is broken.
Check that there is a blinking led in the

controller. If not, check the power supply.
If it is correct, replace the Controller.
When the panel is pushed, the led is on
continuously. If not, replace the kit TFT
Screen TPC 12. If the problem persists,
replace the Kit PC GESPAC.
Troubleshooting
2.5.1
SOFTWARE UPGRADE
If the Touch Screen Application is provided with a Software Upgrade button
on the Service Mode Menu, it is used to close the Application Program without
turning OFF the System. After pressing this button, the Console shows the PC
Desktop to enable the Application Software Upgrade, Language Configuration
of the PC Operating System or Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.
Note
To perform any of these operations, it is necessary to connect a

Keyboard to the connector labelled Kb on the back side of the
Touch Screen Console.
Please, make sure that the Keyboard connector is suitable
(MiniDin type).
2.5.2
TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION

If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can
not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed,
perform the next procedure:
10
1.
Enter in Service Mode and press the Software Upgrade button.
2.
On the PC Desktop, press theStart--Windows button on the keyboard

connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: Programs / UPDD
/ Calibrate.
3.
Execute the Calibrate program and follow the process clicking on the
indicated places.
4.
When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering

again in Start and select: Programs / Start up (select the first one) /
Console.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
2.5.3
EXTERNAL BACKUP OF THE APR TECHNIQUES

1.
Connect a Laptop (PC) to the Touch Screen Console with a serial cable
(DB9 with female pins on both ends; on one end Pin 2 connected with
Pin 3; on the other end Pin 2 connected with Pin3; Pin 5 connected with
Pin 5). Connect the serial cable to port COM4 of the Touch Screen
Console and any free port on the Laptop (PC).
2.
On the Laptop (PC):

a.
Select: StartMenu / Programs / Accessories / Communications

/ Hyperterminal / hypertrm.exe.
b.
Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Laptop (PC), configure

the connection. For that select on the Menu bar:
File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM * (selected free port)
Configure -->
Bits per second: 115200

Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
StopBits: 1
Flow Control: None
c.
Then press OK and OK.
d.
Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Receive File

on this window select:
Place received file in the following folder:
(choose a folder in the Laptop)
Use receiving protocol:
Xmodem
e.
3.
TR-1005R4
Let that window open without pressing Receive, by the moment.
On the Touch Screen Console:

a.
b.
Press the Start--Windows button on the keyboard connected to

the Touch Screen Console, then select: Programs / accessories
/ hyperterminal / PORT4.ht.
11
Troubleshooting
c.
Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Touch Screen Console,

configure the connection. For that select on the Menu bar:
File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM4
Configure -->
Bits per second: 115200

Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
StopBits: 1
Flow Control: None
d.
Then press OK and OK.
e.
Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Send File

on this window select:
Filename:
C:\ program files\Rad_Console (this name can be different)
\APR_English.ini (or APR_French.ini, or APR_Spanish.ini,
or
APR_German.ini,
or
APR_Italian.ini,
or
APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language
previously selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.)
Use sending protocol:
Xmodem
f.
12
Let that window open without pressing Send, by the moment.
4.
Press Reveice on the Laptop (PC) window. It will ask for the name to
save the file: Type APR_English.ini (or APR_French.ini, or
APR_Spanish.ini, or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or
APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language previously
selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.)
5.
Press Send on the Touch Screen window.
6.
Wait until the transference is complete (this can take a few minutes)
7.
When the transference is complete, close the Hyperterminal application

in the Laptop and Touch Screen Console. Disconnect the serial cable.
8.
On the Touch Screen, press theStart--Windows button on the keyboard

and select: Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console, to come
back to the Application.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 3
SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS
Some Console are provided with Self-Diagnosis indicators that identify a
malfunction in the system alerting operator about error existence that inhibits
exposure. During normal operation of the system, these indicators are directly
shown on the Console (depending on the Console model they can be shown
on the APR Display, Console Indicators, Warning Messages Area, etc).
DOOR
G.OVL
DOOR OPEN: Indicates the X-ray room door is open when the X-ray equipment
is in use. (Also refer to Error Code E35).
GENERATOR OVERLOAD: Indicates that the exposure has been interrupted

because during exposure has been produced arcing or bad function on the HV
circuitry (X-ray Tube, HV Transformer and/or HV Cables) or a failure of IGBT
module (overheated or defective IGBTs) has been detected. (Also refer to Error
Code E09).
It can be also shown making a high power and long exposure with the X-ray tube
cool (X-ray Tube has not been warmed-up).
T.OVL
TUBE OVERLOAD: Indicates that either the technique selected is beyond the
X-ray tube ratings or the present conditions of the X-ray tube inhibit the
exposure (anode overheated). Parameters for next exposure may be
temporally limited by the Generator (change the exposure values or wait for the
X-ray tube to cool). (Also refer to Error Code E37).
Check that heat units available are lower than the calculated for the next
exposure. Reduce exposure factors or wait for the X-ray tube to cool.
ROTOR
HEAT
TR-1005R4
ROTOR ERROR: Indicates that the X-ray tube anode is not rotating while
Prep is active, then exposures are inhibited. (Also refer to Error Code E18).
HEAT: Indicates that the X-ray Tube thermostat / pressurestat is open due to
overheating of the tube housing (housing is too hot, wait for the housing to cool)
or to a thermostat / pressurestat mal-function (housing is cool). Heat units may
raise to any value. (Also refer to Error Code E36).
25
Troubleshooting
TECHNIQUE ERROR: If it activates during exposure it means that:

TECH
The exposure has been interrupted by the Security Timer
because of a system failure. Call Field Service. (Also refer
to Error Code E34).
This error can also be shown:
26
after an APR technique selection to advise that exposure parameters

displayed on the Console are not the values stored for this APR
technique. Exposure parameters are adapted by the Generator to
another enable values. (Also refer to Error Code E34).
after the ABC selection, when ABC is not enable. (Also refer to Error
Code E34).
if a failure on the Automatic Collimator has been detected (blades are full
open or in movement during exposure, etc.). In this case the indicator
light will blink. (Also refer to Error Code E48).
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 4
ERROR CODES
ERROR CODE LIST

ERROR CODE
-- -- -- -- -- --
DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM FAILURE. FATAL ERROR.
E01
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE.

NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN HT CONTROLLER BOARD AND ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
E02
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. RAD GENERATOR CONFIGURED AS R&F GENERATOR.

NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND FLUORO CPU BOARD.
E03
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. ALL WORKSTATIONS ARE UNCONFIGURED.
E04
PREP SIGNAL RECEIVED WITHOUT CONSOLE ORDER.
E05
FLUORO SIGNAL ACTIVE WITHOUT REQUEST.
E06
PREP OR/AND EXPOSURE ORDERS ACTIVATED DURING POWER UP ROUTINE.
E07
WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-2.
E08
WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-1.
E09
GENERATOR OVERLOAD. ARCING OR IGBT FAULT.
E10
EEPROM CORRUPTED OR NO INITIALIZED IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD OR IN HT CONTROLLER

BOARD. WRONG DATA CALIBRATION.
E11
NO VOLTAGE IN CAPACITOR BANK.
E12
NO mA DURING EXPOSURE OR mA OUT OF TOLERANCE. WRONG FILAMENT CURRENT.
E13
NO kVp DURING EXPOSURE OR kVp OUT OF TOLERANCE.
E14
EXPOSURE SIGNAL WITHOUT X-RAY EXPOSURE CONSOLE COMMAND.
E15
NO CURRENT ON FILAMENT. WRONG SELECTION OF FOCAL SPOT DETECTED DURING PREP.
E16
INVALID VALUE OF: kVp, mA OR kW.
E17
COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND HT CONTROLLER BOARD.
E18
ROTOR RUNNING WITHOUT ORDER OR ROTOR ERROR.
E19
mA DETECTED WITHOUT EXPOSURE ORDER.
E20
kVp DETECTED WITHOUT EXPOSURE ORDER.
E21
WRONG TUBE-1 SELECTION.
E22
WRONG TUBE-2 SELECTION.
E23
CALIBRATION DATA NOT STORED.
E24
THE BUCKY HAS NOT BEEN DETECTED TO BE MOVING.
E25
BATTERY FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS.
E26
VOLTAGE FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS WITH STAND-ALONE.
E27
FAILURE IN CONSOLE EPROM. BAD CHECKSUM.
TR-1005R4
27
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE LIST

ERROR CODE
28
DESCRIPTION
E29
ALL CLEAR SIGNAL NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E30
RELAY K1 NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E31
LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT INITIATED -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E32
LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT CUT AFTER 3.2 SECONDS -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E33
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN GENERATOR AND SERIAL CONSOLE OR PC UNIT.
E34
TECHNIQUE ERROR.
E35
DOOR OPEN.
E36
HEAT UNITS. OVERHEATING.
E37
TUBE OVERLOAD.
E41
DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-1 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.
E42
DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-1 DOSIMETER.
E43
DOSIMETER -- TUBE-1 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.
E44
DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-2 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.
E45
DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-2 DOSIMETER.
E46
DOSIMETER -- TUBE-2 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.
E47
CAPACITOR ASSITED GENERATOR -- CAPACITOR NOT CHARGED WHEN PREP.
E48
COLLIMATOR ERROR.
E49
EXPOSURE CYCLE ERROR.
E50
INTERRUPTED EXPOSURE.
E51
DRAC -- CHECKSUM FAILURE OR EPROM CORRUPTED.
E52
DRAC -- MICROCONTROLLER RAM FAILURE.
E53
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT LOW LEVEL VOLTAGE (220 VAC).
E54
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC).
E55
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC OR 380 VAC).
E56
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE REFERENCE VOLTAGE.
E58
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E59
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E60
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E61
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E62
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E63
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E64
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E65
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE LIST

ERROR CODE
DESCRIPTION
E66
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E67
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E68
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E69
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E70
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E71
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E72
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E73
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E74
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E75
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E76
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E77
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E78
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E79
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E80
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E81
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E82
DRAC -- WRONG X-RAY TUBE SELECTION.
E83
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN DC BRAKE.
E84
DRAC -- INCORRECT TUBE SELECTION SIGNAL.
E85
E86
E87
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM
E88
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 3300 RPM
E89
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM
E90
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 10000 RPM
E91
DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IPRINC (CH2)
E92
DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IAUX (CH3)
E93
DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT ICOM (CH4)
E95
RAPID TERMINATION
E96
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE MISSING
E97
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE IN CAPACITORS NOT BALANCED
E98
DIP SWITCH 3024SW2-3 IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD SET FOR CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
MODE ACTIVE (SERVICE MODE).
TR-1005R4
29
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
-- - - - - -
DESCRIPTION :
System failure.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator must be switched off.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
This indication may appear at any time together with another Error Code on the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed.
ACTIONS
1.
ERROR CODE :
Turn the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds and turn it ON.
E01
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in power up routine.

No communication between HT Controller Board and ATP Console CPU Board.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that
a problem has caused a power off in the Console.

It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT
Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.
If Led 1 of the HT Controller remains lit, it means that HT Controller has not been started.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Console has been suddenly switched OFF by operator or by a shut-off on the line.
The Microprocessor U5 on the HT Controller Board has not started-up.
The communication between ATP Console Board and HT Controller Board is not reliable.
ACTIONS
30
1.
Check DC supplies.
2.
Check the software version in case of update or change the ATP Console or HT Controller
Boards. Check and replace if necessary U5 in HT Controller and U24 on ATP Console Board.
3.
Check continuity between terminals 2, 3, 5 and 6 on J3 of ATP Console Board and P1-4, P1-11,
P1-15, P1-10 of HT Controller Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
4.
Switch OFF, wait a few seconds and switch ON again to reset the Error Code.
5.
If not fixed after previous steps, check Led DS1 in HT Controller Board when powering the
equipment, if it has not turned off, replace HT Controller Board.
6.
If Led DS1 is off, check with an oscilloscope the following signals: HT-C CLK, HT-C DAT,
C-HT CLK and C-HT DAT in order to find a possible defective component at any of both Boards
(HT Controller and ATP Console). Replace the Board where the defective component is found.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E02
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in power up routine. RAD Generator configured as R&F Generator.

No communication between ATP Console CPU Board and Fluoro CPU Board.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.
APPEARS WHEN :

It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU
Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
A RAD Generator has been configured by mistake as a R&F Generator. See Configuration Section.
The communication between ATP Console Board and Fluoro CPU Board is not reliable.
The Fluoro CPU Board does not work properly.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check Communication Cable between J4 of ATP Console and J4 of Fluoro CPU Boards.
2.
Check and replace if necessary U12 in Fluoro CPU Board.
3.
If Fluoro values are not displayed on the Console, check DC supplies and Fluoro CPU Board.
Replace Fluoro CPU Board if necessary.
E03
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in power up routine. All workstation are unconfigured.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :

Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
All workstations have been configured as tube=0.
The EEPROM (U18) in ATP Console Board is defective.
The ATP Console Board is not able to communicate with U18.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.
2.
Change U18 and configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.
3.
If not fixed after previous steps, replace ATP Console Board and configure the workstations.
31
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E04
DESCRIPTION :
Prep signal received without Console order.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment once initialization phase is over.

Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator receives the Prep signal without a Console command.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check continuity between P1-3 in HT Controller Board and J3-4 in ATP Console Board. Check
with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
2.
If all is correct, check signal from P1-3 to U5 in HT Controller Board.
3.
If the signal is OK, replace HT Controller Board.
E05
DESCRIPTION :
Fluoro signal active without request.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with Power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase.

It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU
Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator receives the Fluoro signal without Console command.
Exp has been pressed in a Workstation not configured for standard R&F.
ACTIONS
32
1.
Check an unwilling press on the Fluoro pedal.
2.
If not the case, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board.
3.
Then, check signal -FL EXP in ATP Console Board.
4.
If the Signal is OK, replace the ATP Console Board.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E06
DESCRIPTION :
Prep or/and Exposure orders activated during power-up routine.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment once initialization phase is over.

Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator has been detected Prep or Exposure signals during initialization.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
In Generators equipped with Prep and Exposure keys on the Console, check that not object
is activating the function. Also check for possible damages on keys.
2.
Check damages on flat cable with connector J9.
3.
In Generators with external Handswitch, check contacts, cable and connectors.
4.
If the error remains, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board and
TS1-36 and J2-4 also in ATP Console Board.
5.
If not solved yet, replace the ATP Console Board.
E07
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong data for X-ray Tube-2.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :

Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-2.
Corrupted calibration data.
Data on Extended Memory Location E18 are larger than the maximum allowed.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check data in Extended Memory Location E18.
2.
If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.
33
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E08
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :

Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-1.
Corrupted calibration data.
Data on Extended Memory Location E02 are larger than the maximum allowed.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check data in Extended Memory Location E02.
2.
If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.
E09 - GENERATOR OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION :
Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During the exposure and In Stand-by,
This error may appear at the Console as E09 Error Code or as a Generator Overload
indication.
During exposure an over current on the IGBTs of the HV Inverter Module has been detected. This
may be produced by and arc or mal-function on the HV Circuitry.
In stand-by, the Console is continuously displaying E09 or Generator Overload due to a defective
or overheated IGBTs Module.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Symptom-1:
G
Defective X-ray Tube.
Defective HV Transformer or HV Cable.
Defective IGBT module.
Defective HT Controller.
Symptom-2:
G
34
Extremely high Duty Cycle on Rad and Fluoro operation.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ACTIONS
A.
PRELIMINARY
1.
Select minimum kVp , minimum mA, and 80 ms (for example 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms). Make
preparation and check that anode rotates in the X-ray Tube. If the anode is not rotating correctly,
check the starter and the Stator connections.
2.
In case the anode is rotating correctly, make an exposure:
3.
If 09 or Generator Overload appears follow procedure in paragraph B (Inverter Module

Test).
If not, follow step-3.
Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select the same mA and time. Make an exposure:
G
If E09 or Generator Overload appears, or the exposure is cut before 80 ms, then follow
procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).
If not, keep on increasing the kVp in 10 kVp steps (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125
kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp for 150 kVp HV Transformers)
making Exposures at each kVp selected.
--
If E09 or Generator Overload appears or the exposure is cut before 80 ms at any

kVp selected, follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).
--
If E09 or Generator Overload has not appeared at the maximum kVp or the
exposure was not cut before 80 ms , it means that HV Transformer and HV Cables are
OK. Then follow the procedure in paragraph E. In this case high mA causes E09 or
Generator Overload.
B.
INVERTER MODULE TEST
1.
Power off Generator and mains.
2.
Remove the cover from the Generator Cabinet.
3.
Wait for the DC Bus of the Inverter to be fully discharged. When it is fully discharged the Leds
on the Charge-Discharge Monitor Board will be completely turned off.
4.
When Leds are off make a jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC--BUS--. Make sure that there is
less than 10 VDC across the BUS. (Refer to Illustration 4-1 to see where to make the jumper).
5.
Measure with a Multimeter in Diode (or ohms) between C2E1 (positive polarity) and E2 or C1
(negative polarity) in both IGBTs (refer to Illustration 4-1 for more details). Repeat the measure
with different polarity between C2E1 (negative polarity) and E2 or C1 (positive polarity).
Voltage should be around 0.3 V (or the resistance must be a high impedance) for the IGBT to
be OK. Normally when an IGBT is broken the voltage is = 0 volts (or the resistance is zero Ohms)
or very close.
TR-1005R4
35
Troubleshooting
Illustration 4-1
Jumper and Measurement Points
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS--
E2
C2E1
3-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS--
E2
C2E1
1-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR, BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR OR CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR
36
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
6.
Note
Repeat the measurements done in point 5 for the other IGBT.
Dont forget to remove the jumper across the DC Bus after all measurements are
made, otherwise the Inverter will suffer serious damage.
7.
If any of the IGBTs are short-circuited, replace the IGBT.
8.
If both IGBTs are OK, remove both shielded cable that connect the Inverter to the HV
Transformer: P1, P3 and SHLD (P2) . Isolate the three wires completely from each other and
from the metal sheet or ground. Make sure that wires are perfectly isolated and that no
short-circuit is made otherwise serious damages could be produced.
9.
Set Dip-switch 3000SW2--2 in ON position at the HT Controller Board.
10. Turn ON mains and Generator.

11. Make an exposure:
Note
If E09 or Generator Overload appear or the exposure has not been cut before 80ms,
change (if possible) the whole Inverter. If it is not possible check capacitor C9 and choke
L1 of the inverter (normally placed at the backside of the inverter). If both seem OK, change
both IGBTS and IPM Drivers (Do not forget to re--connect both shielded cables to the HV
Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).
If E09 or Generator Overload does not appear and the exposure has not been cut before
80 ms, re--connect both shielded cables to the H. Voltage Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).
Follow the procedure in paragraph C (High Voltage Transformer Test).
At the end of an Exposure and right after releasing the Handswitch, error E13 is
shown on the Console (this is normal, reset and continue).
12. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-2 in OFF position at the HT Controller Board. Re-connect both
shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer P1, P3 and SHLD (P2).
TR-1005R4
37
Troubleshooting
Illustration 4-2
Flowchart for B: Inverter Module Test
TURN OFF GENERATOR

WAIT TILL INVERTER IS DISCHARGED
MAKE A JUMPER DC--BUS+ AND DC--BUS-MEASURE AND CHECK
NO
V 0,3V
REPLACE IGBT
YES
REMOVE JUMPER DC--BUS

REMOVE SHIELDED CABLES THAT CONNECT
INVERTER TO THE HV TRANSFORMER
SET 3000SW2-2=ON
TURN ON GENERATOR & MAKE EXPOSURE
E09 OR
EXPOSITION CUT ?
NO
RE--CONNECT H V TRANSFORMER AND INVERTER PERFORM C:HV TRANSFORMER TEST
YES
REPLACE INVERTER
38
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
C.
1.
HV TRANSFORMER TEST
Connect the scope as follows:
G
CH.1 on + mA (TP14) on HT Controller Board.
CH.2 on - mA (TP13) on HT Controller Board.
Base Time in 10 ms per division and 1 V per division
2.
Turn ON mains and Generator. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-4 in ON position at the HV Controller
Board. Select 50 kVp, 25 mA and 50 ms.
3.
Make an exposure and check that both waveforms are almost symmetric (a difference of 10%
is normal).
G
If it is OK, follow procedure in step-4.
If it is not OK, check:

--
that in the mA test point of the HV Transformer the jumper is securely placed and
tighten.
--
that connector J1 is well placed and tighten in the HV Transformer.
--
continuity between J1-D and P4-7, J1-E and P4-6, J1-B and P4-2, and J1-C and P4-1.
Check that they are well connected and tighten.
--
if after these actions the waveform is not OK, replace HV Transformer.
4.
Turn OFF Generator and mains.
5.
Remove HV Cables from the HV Transformer (anode and cathode) and fill the HV Receptacles
with oil.
6.
On the HT Controller Board, make a jumper FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).
7.
Turn ON mains and Generator. Select 50 kVp, 50 mA and 50 ms.
8.
9.
Connect the scope as following:

G
CH.1 on + kV (TP11) on HT Controller Board.
CH.2 on --kV (TP12) on HT Controller Board.
Base time in 10 msec. per division and 2 V per division.
Make an Exposure and check that both waveforms are symmetric.
10. Make exposures from 50 kVp to 110 kVp with the same Exposure Time and check that all kVp
waveform are symmetric and the values are similar according the table below.
TR-1005R4
Select
TP11 & TP12

on the HT Controller
(Compact Generators)
50 kVp
2.1 V
70 kVp
2.9 V
90 kVp
3.7 V
110 kVp
4.5 V
130 kVp (only for 150 kVp HV Transf.)
5.3 V
39
Troubleshooting
11. Select the maximum kVp allowed (depending of the tube type) and maximum Exposure Time
allowed but NEVER go over than 110--130 kVp. Make several Exposures and check that
waveforms are correct. If the waveforms are not symmetric within 10% at any point, replace
the HV Transformer.
12. Repeat the above procedure for the X-ray Tube-2 if the installation has two tubes.
13. If everything is OK, it means that HV Transformer is OK and the problem could be in X-ray Tube
or in the HV Cables. To know when the Tube begins to arc follow procedure in parragraph D.
In any case, X-ray Tube must be replaced.
14. Set in the HT Controller Dip-switch SW2 position 4 in OFF and remove jumper between FIL (TP8)
and + 5 V (TP2).
D.
X-RAY TUBE TEST
Although after the performance of the above referred test everything is found OK, the Service
Engineer may want to know the actual status of the tube. Perform the following procedure in order to
determine the point in which the X-ray Tube begins to arc, it is strongly recommended to replace the
tube as soon as possible to prevent potential damage to the Generator.
1.
Select minimum kVp and minimum mA and 100 ms.
2.
Make an exposure.
3.
Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select same mA and time. Make an exposure.
G
If E09 or Generator Overload appears follow procedure in step C.1 (HV Transformer
Test).
If not, keep on incrementing the kVp in steps of 10 kVp (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and
125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp HV Transformers) making
exposures at each kVp selected.
--
If E09 or Generator Overload appears at any kVp selected it means that the tube
has dielectric problems above the selected kVp.
If E09 or Generator Overload does not appear up to maximum kVp, it means that arcing may
be due to mA or kW, follow procedure in step-4.
4.
Select minimum kVp and minimum mA. Increment the mA one station and make an Exposure.
Keep on incrementing the mA station (making exposures) until E09 or Generator Overload
appears. This will give an idea of the maximum mA allowed by the tube without arcing. If E09
or Generator Overload does not appear follow step-5.
5.
If still the tube does not arc, the problem is related to kW=KV*mA. Make selections on the
Console at 100 ms incrementing kV and mA. A point will be reached in which E09 or Generator
Overload will appear. This will give an idea on the approximate value of kVp and mA that can
be handled by the X-ray Tube. Anyway, this value may change when the tube heats up.
E.
RANDOM E09 OR GENERATOR OVERLOAD
If everything is OK and random E09 or Generator Overload appears, check:
40
1.
That the signal IGBT FAULT on pin 3 of P5 on the HT Controller Board is not low (logic 0) in
stand-by and during the exposure. If there is noise, check loose connection between pin 3 of
P5 on HT Controller Board, and pin 4 of J2 in both IPM Driver Boards
2.
If IGBT FAULT is active during an exposure, try to isolate when it occurs. It may be due to noise
coming from any device outside the Generator (Bucky, Fluoro devices, etc.). Or it may occur
when selecting a high power Exposure and the voltage of the main line goes down more than
10% (in this case check the part number of the IPM Driver Board, it must be A3063-03 or greater).
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E10
DESCRIPTION :
EEPROM corrupted or not initialized in ATP Console CPU Board or in HT Controller Board.
Wrong data calibration.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error during power up (when EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board is corrupted or not
initialized).
Informative error during power up (when EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board is corrupted or not
initialized or when EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed). In both cases, E10
appears together with E34 Error Code or Technique Error indication.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
Generator does not continue with start up.
POSIBLE CAUSES
EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board corrupted or no initialized.
EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board corrupted or no initialized.
EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
If EPROM U24 in the ATP Console Board has been replaced, reset the Error Code to
acknowledge that the NVRAM has been initialized.
2.
If the error does not reset, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip-switch A3024SW2-3 in ON
position to allow Service Mode. Turn the Generator ON and enter in workstations configuration
and check as referred in Service Manual (do not forget to exit from Configuration mode to store
the workstation configuration).
3.
If the problem is still present, and E10 error appears together with E34 Error Code or
Technique Error indication, replace ATP Console Board.
4.
If the problem is still present and only E10 error appears on the Console, replace HT Controller
Board.
41
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E11
DESCRIPTION :
No voltage in the Capacitor Bank.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Prep is not allowed.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase or when pressing PREP.
It was not possible to perform Prep or Exp.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No voltage in the Capacitor Bank (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) of the Generator Cabinet.
Defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.
Precharge K6 contactor located inside the Generator Cabinet is not energized.
Main line fuses F3 and/or F4 are blown off.
--CHRG signal of pin 7 on connector P1 on HT Controller Board is not present.
Exposition parameters selected above IGBT maximum current (only software versions before
V2.R06)
Cables disconnected accidentally or damaged connectors.
Test Switch SW1 of the Generator Cabinet is in Test position (only for Factory use). This is only
applicable to old Generators.
ACTIONS
A.
IF LED DS1 IN CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR LIGHTS
Check Capacitors Voltage,
42
If it is OK, check that P1-7 in HT Controller is at logic level 0. (0.75 V for Generators with 1
Charge/ Discharge Monitor Board and 1.5 V for Generators with 2 Charge/Discharge Monitor
Boards).
G
If it is OK (logic level 0), replace HT Controller Board.
If it is not OK, check links between P1-7 in HT Controller Board and P1-2 in
Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-1 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and
P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #2,
--
If it is OK, replace defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.
--
If it is not OK, repair connection.
If voltage in capacitors is not OK, check VAC in AC1, AC2 and AC3 at Input Rectifier Board (for
Battery Powered Generators check battery voltage).
G
If VAC is not OK, verify input connections and input fuses.
If VAC is OK, disconnect BUS+ and BUS-- at Input Rectifier Board and check VDC.
--
If VDC is not OK, replace defective component (CR1, CR2, CR3) at Input Rectifier
Board.
--
If VDC is OK, check and replace defective component at Generator Cabinet.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
B.
IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS NOT A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.
Check input VAC in 6LF1,
G
If VAC is OK, replace a defective component at Input Rectifier Board (CR2, CR3 or CR1).
If VAC in 6LF1 is not OK, check that contactor 6K5 is ON.

--
If 6K5 is ON, check VAC in T1,T2 and T3 (in 6K5).

-- If voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
-- If voltage is not OK, replace the defective fuse (F3, F4 or F5).
If Contactor 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.

G
If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.
If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC,

--
if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.
--
If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board.
-- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10
and A in 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
C.
IF LED DS1 LIGHTS AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.
Check Contactor 6K5,
If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5.

G
If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.
If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.

G
If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console
Board,
--
if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.
--
If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board.
-- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10
and A in 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
D.
IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.
Check Contactor 6K5,
TR-1005R4
If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5.

G
If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.
If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.

G
If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console
Board,
--
If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and
A in 6K5.
--
If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
43
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E12
DESCRIPTION :
No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
After exposition.
Error 12 appears after the Exposure to alert the operator that the mA at the starting of the exposure has
not been correct. During the first 10 ms the Generator applies constant filament current to the tube.
This current is proportional to the current already calibrated for that mA station at the kVp selected for
that Exposure (filament numbers). Near the end of these 10 ms, the HT Controller reads the mA and if
they are found to be a 30% under or over of what has been selected, it sends error 12 to the Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Calibration data for kVp and mA that produces E12 are not correct.
The mA jumper on the HV Transformer is open, or it is not making good contact. The mA read at the
beginning of the exposure is 50% of the correct value (because one branch is open).
There is a problem on the reading of the mA.
No correct heating prior to the Exposure. The filament has not reached its correct temperature and
the mA at the starting of the exposure is low. It usually occurs when the Prep and Exp buttons are
pressed down at the same time.
Making an exposure immediately after getting out of calibration mode in extended memory.
+5 VDC , +12 VDC or --12 VDC Power Supplies of HT Control Board (mesured at TP2, TP3 and TP4
of this Board) have excesive ripple or VDC measured is not correct.
ACTIONS
1.
Connect a scope to the following Test Points in the HT Control Board and check that the voltage
is correct, if not adjust it with the respective Potentiometer in the Power Supply Board (refer to
Section 2.1 - Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test):
TP2 (+5 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R12 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
TP3 (+12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R26 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
TP4 (--12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R25 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
2.
Check calibration data for the mA Open Loop (filament numbers) as stated in the Service Manual
for all combination of kVp and mA when this error appears.
With a scope connected to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board check that the mA
read is within the ratio of 1V=100 mA ( 5%) for V2 and V3 software versions, for V4 and up the
ratio is 1V=10mA from minimum mA to 80 mA and 1V=100mA from 100 mA to the maximum
rating. If it is not, the cause could be that the mA second test is not measuring right, or a wrong
measurement performed in the Generator. (Refer to step 3).
44
3.
Check that the jumper in the mA test point of the HV Transformer is well placed and tighten.
4.
With a scope check that during the entire Exposure signals on the test point TP13 (--mA) and
TP14 (+mA) on the HT Control Board connectors are symmetrical ( 10%). If one is found
missing or not symmetrical, measure on pin 6 and 7 of J4 on the HT Control Board. If they are
symmetrical on both points, the problem could be in the HT Control Board. If they are not correct,
check that the connections made on the HV Transformer in J1-E, D, K terminals for Compact
Generators (in TB1, terminals 1, 4 and 5 for no Compact Generators) are well connected and
tighten. Also check that the GND wire is connected to the GND stud. If connections are correct
the problem is in the HV Transformer.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.
Connect a scope to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board. Check that when an
exposure is made by pressing at the same time the Prep and Exp controls, the mA at the
beginning of exposure is low. Check that when the exposure is made by pressing first the Prep
control and then the Exp control, the mA at the beginning of exposure is correct.
6.
For Low Speed Generators:

G
7.
For High Speed Generators:

G
ERROR CODE :
Reprogram the Rotor Acceleration and Filament Setting Time as stated in the Service
Manual, one step over the time as it was before (a.e.: if it was 1.2 seconds, reprogram for
1.8 seconds) and check if boosting is well configured.
When performing the test for High Speed Generators check that the self-maintaining mode
is not active. In order to check if the problem disappears, select the highest mA station for
Small Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA station (a.e. 40 kVp, 150 mA, SF).
Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the Prep and Exp controls; check that
the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct. Do the same for Large Focus
(a.e. 50 kVp, 500 mA, LF). If it is found not correct, reprogram a step over at the time for
each case, and test again.
E13
DESCRIPTION :
No kVp during exposure or kVp out of tolerance.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. May abort exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During and after exposures.
No kVp during exposure.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Note
This error assumes that the fault is not on the IGBT and is not due to arcing in the
X-ray Tube.
Defective HV Transformer.
Defective HT Controller Board.
Defective IPM Driver Boards.
Poor connection on the IPM Driver Boards.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check 5 VDC between P1-4 and P1-3 (GND) in both IPM Driver Boards.
2.
Check 115 VAC between pins 1 and 2 of connector P2 on the same Boards.
3.
If it is OK, check if the -kVp (TP12) and +kVp (TP 11) test points on the HT Controller Board are
symmetrical. If they are not, check signals -- kV and + kV (in Compact Generators between P4-1
and J1-B at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and J1-C at HV Transformer) (in no
Compact Generators between P4-1 and TB1-3 at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and
TB1- 4at HV Transformer) if they are OK, replace the HV Transformer.
4.
Check the connectors on the IPM Driver Boards. Check continuity in P3-1 (-kV DR1), P3-2
(--kVDR2) and those signals in IPM Driver Boards. Check with a scope in TP17 (1V=33.33kVp),
if value is OK, replace HT Controller Board; if value is not OK, replace IPM Driver Boards.
5.
If kVp value and time is OK and E13 appears, check that for software version V3 and up the
Dip-switches of A3024SW3 are all in OFF position at ATP Console Board.
45
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E14
DESCRIPTION :
Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During and after exposition.
Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Exp signal is grounding on the HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Remove the connector J1 on HT Controller Board and check grounding of pin 6 of P1.
2.
If so, replace the HT Controller Board.
3.
If it is not, remove the connector J3 on the Console, and check pin 1 on connector J3 on the
Generator Cabinet.
4.
If GND, replace the communication cable J3; if not, replace the ATP Console Board.
E15
DESCRIPTION :
No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected during Prep.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow Prep.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
No current detected on Focal Spot (Filaments Off).
POSIBLE CAUSES
A -- There is not supply in Filament Board or poor connection on the Cathode HV Cable or defective
Filament Transformer inside the HV Transformer or defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer
(if the system is equipped with two tubes)
B -- Wrong signal --FIL1 ACK
46
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ACTIONS
A.
THERE IS NOT SUPPLY IN FILAMENT BOARD, OR POOR CONNECTION ON THE
CATHODE HV CABLE, OR DEFECTIVE FILAMENT TRANSFORMER, OR DEFECTIVE HV
SWITCH.
Note
For Generators with two tubes:

- if the error appears in both tubes, go to step 1.
- if the error appears in only one tube, interchange HV Cables.
-
if error remains when selecting the same tube from Console, replace HV
Transformer, if does not appear go to step 8.
1.
Check through the X-ray tube window if the selected filament is On. Check both circuits to detect
which one is causing the error code.
2.
If none lit when selected, check in the DC output on the BR1 rectifier (324 Dc approx.) or input
voltage (220 VAC approx.). If input voltage is OK and output voltage is not OK, replace rectifier.
If it is OK go to step 3.
3.
Check if the Leds DS1 and DS2 are ON in the Filament Board. If they are not, replace the Board.
4.
If everything is OK, check DC voltage between P2-4 and P2-1 (324 DC approx.). If not enough
voltage detected, review circuit between BR1 and T2 transformer. Replace Filament Board if
defective.
5.
If it is OK, check the AC voltage between pin 4 on connector P3 on Filament Board Fil. Sup.) and
pins 15 or 16 (depending on filament selection) on connector P4 on Interface Control Board. The
range should be between 90 and 200 VAC.
6.
If not, check voltage in Pin 17 of connector P4 at Interface Control Board and Pin 4 of connector
P3 at Filament Board, also Check P14and 14 of connector P4. If not, replace the Interface Control
Board.
7.
If it is OK, check continuity between HV Transformer connector and Interface Board.
8.
If it is OK, check continuity of HV Cable connector (between common C and S (Small Focus)
and between common C and L (Large focus). The OHM value should be very low in both cases
( 0.01 approx.)
9.
If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. If it is not OK, check all connections from HV Cable to
the tube. Replace cable if necessary.
10. If HV Cable is OK, check tube filaments. Replace Tube if necessary.
TR-1005R4
47
Troubleshooting
B.
WRONG SIGNAL - FIL1 ACK
Perform the following diagnosis if after pressing Prep the Error Code E15 appears on the Console
and after reseting it, the Console displays Error Code E04.
START
link P1-8 HT Controller
Check --FIL1 ACK

at Interface Board in
P1-8 at HT Controller.
Is it ok?
YES
YES
& P4-22 Interface Board
NO
Replace
Press Prep
and check - FIL1 ACK at
Interface Board (P4-22).
Is it Low Level?
NO
Check and REPAIR
YES
HT Controller Board
Check if K7
is active when
selecting FIL1*.
Press Prep?
Is it active?
NOTES
NO
1) FIL1 is Small Focus in Tube1 and it is Large Focus in Tube2.

2) FIL1 SLC is activated when selecting FIL1 during Stand by
for RAD Tubes. For R&F Tubes it is activated at Prep.
Replace
YES
NO
Interface Board
Check signal
FIL1 SLC at P4-19
Interface Board.
Is it at Low Level when
selecting FIL1*?
Check and fix

link P1-13 in
HT Controller
with P4--19 in
YES
Check Signal --FIL1

SCL in P1-13 at HT
NO
Replace
HT Controller Board
Controll. Is it OK?
Interface Board
48
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E16
DESCRIPTION :
Invalid value of : kVp, mA or kW.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow Prep or Exp.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
In Prep
Selected mA or kVp are not correct.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong maximum kVp configuration.
Wrong software compatibility on the Generator Cabinet and Console.
When pressing Prep during calibration of Open Loop mA with a technique that overpasses the
Generator power kVp/mA.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check the switch 5 of SW2 on HT Controller Board (125 kVp in open position and 150 kVp in
closed position).
2.
Check the software version on U5 of HT Controller Board and U24 of ATP Console Board.
3.
Set calibration data manually as per calibration procedure table mA calibration number change
at calibration section in this manual.
E17
DESCRIPTION :
Communication error between ATP Console CPU Board and HT Controller Board.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Once initialization phase is over at any moment.
No communication between Console and Generator Cabinet.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Defective communication cable between Console and Generator Cabinet (J3).
Noise on the bucky circuitry.
Defective HT Controller Board or defective ATP Console Board.
The Prep signal from Console to HT Controller is short--circuited to ground.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Turn Generator OFF/ON.
2.
If E01 appears, follow procedure for E01.
3.
If E01 does not appear, it is an intermittent error due an external device, install a R--C filter in the
power supply and at bucky start circuitry.
4.
If error persists, replace HT Controller or ATP Console Boards.
49
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E18 OR ROTOR ERROR
DESCRIPTION :
Rotor running without order or Rotor error.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
The X-ray tube is not rotating while Prep is active, then the exposures are inhibited or the X-ray
tube anode is rotating without Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Defective relay K1 (solid State) on the low speed module.
Signal RTR on HT Controller Board is active.
Defective HT Controller or Low Speed Control Boards.
12 VDC power supplies missing on HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
In Stand-by:
1.
Check if the signal RTR test point (TP6 on HT Controller ) is logic 0. If yes, check if K1 works
properly.
2.
If it is OK, check if the 12 VDC power supplies are correct.
3.
If it is OK, replace the H. T. Controller.
4.
If not logic 0 check K1 at Low Speed Module.
5.
If K1 defective, replace.
In Prep: (Rotor error/E18).

When Console has not Rotor Error indication , E18 Appears.
50
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
IF E18 OR ROTOR ERROR APPEARS IN PREP (ONLY FOR LF-RAC)
VISUALLY CHECK
THAT ANODE IS
TURNING WHEN
PRESSING PREP
DOES IT TURN?
CHECK
TUBE STATOR
YES
VERIFY STARTER IS CONFIGURED TO

CORRECT TUBE AND CAPACITOR
INSTALLED.
+
VERIFY AT SIGNAL DELAYED +24V THAT
LINE VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW -- THAT MAY
CAUSE ROTOR ERROR OR E18.
+
CHECK WITH THE SCOPE SIGNAL RTRI
AT TP6 HT CONTROLLER. SEE
ILLUSTRATION BELOW.
NO
2.2 V
YES
PREP
CHECK
LINK
FROM TS2
TO TUBE
STATOR
IS IT OK?
YES
0.8
CHECK VAC IN TS2 -CONNECTIONSSTATOR
running
PRESSING PREP IS IT
OK?
t
NO
REPAIR CONNECTIONS
tprep
NO
YES
REPLACE FUSE 6F6
CHECK SIGNAL
+24 DELAYED
IS IT OK?
NO
REPLACE K1 OR
LF--RAC BOARD
TR-1005R4
YES
CHECK IF -START &--ACC

ARE AT LOW LOGIC LEVEL WHEN
PRESSING PREP
NO
REPEAT CONFIGURATION OF
FOR LOW SPEED
51
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E19
DESCRIPTION :
mA detected without Exp command.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. It is necessary to turn
off the equipment.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
In stand-by or during initialization.
Current in tube without Prep command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
12 VDC power supplies missing on the H. T. Controller Board.
Defective H. T. Controller.
mA signal on H T Controller is active.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check 12 VDC power supplies.
2.
Check a level logic 0 in TP5. Check also a level logic 0 in TP13, TP14 connector P4-6 y P4-7.
3.
If it is OK, replace the HT Controller or Filament Drive Boards one by one.
E20
DESCRIPTION :
kVp detected without Exp command.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
In stand-by or during initialization.
kVp detected without Exp command.

When E20 appears on Console (E20) means that the error can not be solved without turning off the
equipment.
POSIBLE CAUSES
--12 VDC power supply missing.
Defective HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
52
1.
Check --12 VDC power supply.
2.
Check logic level 0 in TP7 and TP11, TP12, P4-1 and P4-2.
3.
If it is OK, replace HT Controller Board.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E21
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong Tube-1 selection.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
Wrong tube 1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The HT INTLK is not grounding (tube 1 selection).
Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option).
The --HT INTLK is missing.
ACTIONS
Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators):
1.
Check signal HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1
selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 . If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not 0 in J3-13, check link
between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = 0 and E21 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for one tube option (Compact Generators):

1.
Check the HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be 0 VDC in tube 1 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check Jumper between 6J3-13 and 6J3-16 (GND).
3.
If 6J3-13 = 0, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.
4.
If not 0 in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = 0 and E21 appears, replace
ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators):

1.
Check the HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1
selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 . If not replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console.

a.
If it is not OK, check between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.
b.
If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):
TR-1005R4
1.
Check logic 0 in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if 0 VDC, replace ATP Console Board.
2.
If not 0, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between
J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.
3.
If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.
4.
If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.
53
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E22
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong Tube-2 selection.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
Wrong tube 2 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The HT INTLK is not high logic level 5V (tube 2 selection).
Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option).
The --HT INTLK is grounding.
ACTIONS
Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators):
1.
Check signal HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2
selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite . If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not 1 in J3-13, check link
between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = 5 and E22 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for one tube option (Compact Generators):

1.
Check the HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be 5 VDC in tube 2 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check that 6J3-13 is not grounding.
3.
If 6J3-13 = 5, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.
4.
If not 5 in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = 5 and E22 appears, replace
ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators):

1.
Check the HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2
selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite . If not replace the HV
Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console.

a.
If J2-13 is not OK, check 5V between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.
b.
If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):
54
1.
Check logic 5 in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if 5 VDC, replace ATP Console Board.
2.
If not 5, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between
J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.
3.
If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.
4.
If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E23
DESCRIPTION :
Calibration data not stored
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative although it is almost impossible to find if not provoked.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When trying to save a calibration data.
Calibration data not stored. Calibration value intended to be stored has not been properly
recorded.
POSIBLE CAUSES
This problem may be shown randomly.
This problem is continuos or occurs frequently and the communication between the Generator
Cabinet and the Console is too noisy.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Store data again.
2.
Check communication cables.
3.
Route communication cables in different way.
55
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E24
DESCRIPTION :
The Bucky has not been detected to be moving.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At the beginning of exposition.
Wrong Exposure signal from Buckies.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Malfunction of the bucky.
Wrong wiring of the bucky.
Wrong bucky selection.
ACTIONS
CHECK
- DRCMA AT PREP
IS IT AT LOW
NO
REVIEW WORK STATION

CONFIGURATION
IS IT OK?
NO
CONFIGURE
CORRECTLY
LEVEL?
YES
REPAIR
NO
CONNECTION
CHECK K2 FOR
BUCKY 1 & K3 FOR
BUCKY 2
ARE THEY ON?
YES
YES
CHECK
J3-14,J3-11 AT
ATP CONS.
IS IT OK?
NO
REPLACE
ATP CONSOLE BOARD
YES
CHECK AND REPAIR
LINK J3--14 //P4-12 AT
YES
REPLACE
INTERFACE BOARD
CHECK-BUCKY
MOTION 1&2 AT
INTERFACE BOARD
P4-11 & P4-10 AT LOW
LEVEL IS IT OK?
INTERFACE BOARD
J3--11 / P4-13 AT
INTERFACE BOARD
NO
PROBLEM AT BUCKY
56
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E25
DESCRIPTION :
Battery failure in Battery Powered Generators.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Battery Powered Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At Prep in any Battery Powered Generators and at any moment in Generators with Stand-Alone.
Batteries charge level is momentarily low or some batteries are discharged or damaged.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Batteries are discharged.
Some Battery Charger Sector is not working properly or some Batteries are damaged.
ACTIONS
A.
PRELIMINARY
E25 appears when the Generator has not been used for a period of time, it usually allows 2 or 3
exposures and then E25 appears.
If this is the case, charge Batteries and perform exposures until the batteries are totally discharged,
then charge again and perform exposures again to discharge, repeat the procedure 5 or 6 times. This
is the way to charge batteries fully and safe.
B.
TR-1005R4
BATTERIES FULLY CHARGED AND E25 APPEARS
1.
Check Corrosion in metal contacts of Batteries.
2.
Check charger Leds on Battery Charger. Green Leds and LED DS1 should be ON.
3.
Check voltage in J1 of Battery Charger Board: J1-16 & J1-15, J1-14 & J1-13...... , J1-2 & J1-1.
With Generator OFF and disconnected from Mains, the voltage to be found is: 26.6 VDC.
With Stand-Alone mode, disconnected the Generator from Mains and with the Generator turned
On, the voltage should be: 25.4 VDC.
G
If voltage is not OK, check the batteries status and replace defective batteries if needed
(refer to Section 2.6.2 - Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries).
If total voltage is correct and E25 appears, check the measure circuit.
--
In Generators with Stand-Alone check links between J1-18 (HT Controller) & J3-5
(Stand-Alone), J1-19 (HT Controller) & J3-6 (Stand-Alone), J1-20 (HT Controller) &
J3-7 (Stand-Alone). If links are OK and batteries voltage is OK but signals are below
minimum required (that is --BATST3 is 0, BATST2 is 0 and BATST1 is 1), check
HT Controller Board and Stand-Alone Board, replace the defective Board found.
--
For Generators without Stand-Alone check that signal -BAT FAULT at P5-2 of
HT Control Board is at High Level.
If -BAT FAULT is at High Level, replace HT Controller Board.
If -BAT FAULT is at Low Level, check J2-2 in Battery Charger Board. If not Low
Level replace cable. If Low Level replace the Battery Charger Board.
57
Troubleshooting
C.
1.
LEDs CHECKING ON THE BATTERY CHARGER BOARD

GREEN LEDS ARE ON BUT LED DS1 IS OFF
Check that 24 V are present in J2-1 of Battery Charger Board.
If it is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.
If it is not OK, check 24V in J2-7 Line Monitor.
2.
If it is OK, repair links between J2-1 of Battery Charger Board & J2-7 of Line Monitor Board.
If it is not OK, check 20 VAC between J2-5 and J2-6 at Line Monitor Board.
--
If it is OK, replace Line Monitor Board.
--
If it is not OK, check voltage from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer to the Line Monitor
Board and replace it if necessary.
SOME GREEN LEDS ARE NOT ON AND DS1 IS ON.
Check Fuses F7 to F21(2A, 250 VAC) (Charger Sectors) of the Battery Charger Board.
Check VAC at J6 and J4 in Battery Charger Board (connectors J6 and J4 must be plugged in the
Board), it should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16,
and also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14).
If VAC is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.
If VAC is not OK, unpplug connectors J6 and J4 from the Battery Charger Board and repeat the
measure checking VAC from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer at connectors J6 and J4, it
should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16, and
also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14). Check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer and
replace it if necessary.
3.
NONE LED IS ON
Check that Generator is Powered ON.

If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board and DL2 and DL3 are OFF:
Check VAC between J2-1 and J2-3 at Line Monitor Board.

G
If no VAC found, replace Line Monitor Board.
If VAC found, check VAC in 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.

--
If no VAC found, check and fix connection at 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
--
If VAC found, check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board while DL2 and DL3 are ON (any of them):
Check Line VAC +/- 15%.

G
If Line VAC is not OK, it is an external problem.
If Line VAC is OK, review the Line Monitor Board adjustment.

Line Monitor Board Adjustment: Configure SW1 at Line Monitor Board according to
Power Line Voltage (refer to Installation chapter in Service Manual). Measure the Power
Line Voltage with a Digitalmeter and adjust VDC in TP2 with POT1 at Line Monitor Board
as per the following formula:
V measured
2.5 = VTP2
V nominal
Example:
V(measured:220V)
V (nominal:230V)
2.5 = VTP2(2.4VDC)
V measured is the real voltage obtained with polymeter.

V nominal is the SW1 configuration Voltage.
If all Leds are off at Line Monitor Board:
58
Check VAC in J2-1 / J2-2 at Line Monitor Board.

G
If VAC is OK, review configuration of Jumper SW1.
If VAC is not OK, check (Magnetothermic ) 1SW1 is ON and external VAC power.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E26
DESCRIPTION :
Voltage failure in Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. System shut down.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.
APPEARS WHEN :
At the beginning of exposition.
System failure
POSIBLE CAUSES
No voltage detected at Stand Alone.
Shutdown
DC is below or over specifications
HT Controller cables are accidentally grounded.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check that DL4 is ON, if it is OFF, Stand Alone Board is not powered.
2.
Check that DL3 is OFF, if it is ON, a shutdown has occurred.
3.
Check that DL5 is OFF, if it is ON, DC is below or over specifications.
4.
Check that battery voltage cables connected to HT Controller are not grounded.
E27
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in Console EPROM. Bad checksum.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator does not start.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During Console initialization.
The Console performs a checksum procedure of EPROM when it has been configured to a
non-allowed calibration and it has found this value to be incorrect.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Console has been configured in a non communication mode.
The non volatile RAM does not calculate and compare the Console checksum.
The EPROM (U24) has been corrupted.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check if dip--switch SW2 on ATP Console is well configured per Service Manual.
2.
If error remains, replace the non--volatile RAM (U23) on ATP Console.
3.
If error remains, replace the EPROM (U24) on ATP Console.
59
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E29
DESCRIPTION :
ALL CLEAR signal not active.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow Prep.
APPLICABLE TO :
Nucletron Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When pressing Prep in P00 mode.
Exposure is not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
All Clear signal is not ready after 5 seconds with Prep activated.
ACTIONS
Release the exposure controls, press the System Reset button and check the system.
ERROR CODE :
E30
DESCRIPTION :
Relay K1 not active.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow Prep.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
When pressing Prep in P00 or P03 mode.
Test--scan not started.
POSIBLE CAUSES
MOSTA signal is not received at system or relay K1 is not active.
ACTIONS
Release the exposure controls, press the System Reset push-button and check the system.
60
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E31
DESCRIPTION :
Long exposition is not initiated.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow long Exp.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During exposition phase in P00 mode.
Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds.
The system is not ready to make the exposure or the operator has aborted the exposure.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
E32
DESCRIPTION :
Long exposition is not cut (after 3.2 seconds) as relay K3 was not detected.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Cut exposition at 3.2 seconds of buckup.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During exposition phase in P00 mode.
Signal from K3 is not received.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Signal from K3 is not received.
Exposure not completed, time is longer than 1.6 seconds.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
61
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E33
DESCRIPTION :
No communication between Generator and Serial Console or PC Unit.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Serial Console.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
Serial Communication Error.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Connecting cable between Console and Generator is loosen or damaged.
Damaged ATP Console CPU Board or Serial Console.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check connection cable between connector J7/J8 from ATP Console CPU Board to connector
J5 of Compatibility Module (as per Generator model) and then check cable from J5 to Serial
Console.
2.
If error remains, check ATP Console CPU Board and Serial Console, replace defective part
found.
E34 -- TECHNIQUE ERROR
DESCRIPTION :
Technique error.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative without acoustic alarm or Fatal after exposition. It does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment after parameter selection or after exposition.
Indicated with warning Technique error in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of
Consoles E34 appears in display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The calibration for that parameters is wrong.
ACTIONS
62
1.
If it occurs with time parameters close to 1mS, it means that the cable capacity is excessive for
a short exposition. Also the calibration for that parameters is wrong. Check Service Manual
Section: Exposure Time Adjustment.
2.
If it happens at Fluoroscopy mode with ABC, it means that the equipment is not able to perform
that operation. Perform Jumper W1 in Fluoro CPU.
3.
If it happens after exposition, it means a failure in exposition timer and backup has been
cut. Dangerous. Reset APR and reconfigure values.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E35 -- DOOR OPEN
DESCRIPTION :
Door Open.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. It may inhibit Exposition depending on the configuration of SW1.2 at Console.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
Indicated with warning Door Open in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles
E35 appears in display. Does not allow Prep and Exp.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Door open or cable disconnected or cable not installed.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Close door.
2.
If that is not the reason for the error, check Jumper TS1-22 & TS1-23. See Installation Manual
Section: Door Interlock Signal.
E36 -- HEAT UNITS
DESCRIPTION :
Heat Unit. Overheating.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow expositions.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
Indicated with warning Heat Unit in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles
E36 appears in display. Does not allow Prep and Exp.
POSIBLE CAUSES
If it appears at initialization means that the thermostat of the selected tube is connected or it does not
exist, if so connect to ground the correspondent signal.
If it appears at any other moment is because the tube thermostat has been activated.
It also may appear during the calibration process due to the high number of starting.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check correct installation of signal Thermostat/Presostat. See Installation Manual. If tube has
not this signal, perform a Jumper indicated in Installation Jumper.
2.
Wait until temperature is lowered.
63
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E37 - TUBE OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION :
Tube Overload.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow Exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
After Exp due to Tube overheating. After changing radiographic parameters. In some Consoles
this error may not appear as they are provide with an automatic blocking that disable parameters
above tube capacity.
Indicated with warning Tube Overload in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of
Consoles E37 appears in display. Exposures are not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
1.
Parameters selected for a new exposition are above tube capacity. (Heat Units or Rating).
2.
Capacity Line frequency is wrong. (see SW1.1 at Console) or Tube selected in extended position
E02 or E18 is not correct.
1.
Wait for Tube to cool and Heat Units available increase or modify Exposition parameters.
2.
If Heat Units of tube are 100% and E37 or Tube Overload warning appear: Check 3024SW1.1
in ATP Console. See Configuration Chapter in Service Manual and Test Switches or verify the
X-Ray Type Selection: E02 for Tube 1 and E18 for Tube 2 in Configuration Chapter of Service
Manual.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
E41
DESCRIPTION :
Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-1 Dosimeter and Generator.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1.
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-1.
ACTIONS
64
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E42
DESCRIPTION :
Autotest error on Tube-1 Dosimeter.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-1.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
2.
3.
If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-1.
E43
DESCRIPTION :
Tube-1 Ion Chamber status check error.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-1. Ion Chamber not operative.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
2.
3.
If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-1.
65
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E44
DESCRIPTION :
Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-2 Dosimeter and Generator.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-2.
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-2.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
2.
E45
DESCRIPTION :
Autotest error on Tube-2 Dosimeter.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-2.
ACTIONS
66
1.
2.
3.
If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-2.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E46
DESCRIPTION :
Tube-2 Ion Chamber status check error.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-2. Ion Chamber not operative.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
2.
3.
If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-2.
E47
DESCRIPTION :
Capacitors not charged when PREP.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Capacitor Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
Indicated with warning E47.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No power in line.
Defective Capacitor or circuit.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2.
Wait one minute for Capacitor Charging before activating PREP control.
67
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E48
DESCRIPTION :
Collimator Error.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow exposure.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
Showed as Technique Error in Consoles with this light indicator. For the rest of Consoles E48
appears displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Collimator blades closed or in motion during exposure.
Defective Collimator.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check collimator blades.
2.
If it is OK, check the TS3-20 is at low level.
If it is not at low level : Problem in Collimator.
If signal at low level, check J2-6 in ATP Console

G
if it is at low level, replace ATP Console Board
If is at high level, check and fix link between J2-6 and TS3-20.
E49
DESCRIPTION :
Exposure Cycle Error.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow exposure.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with two X-ray Tubes for RAD only with Exposure Cycle feature (a.e. Brandis).
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposure is not performed or it is aborted.
E49 appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Operator releases EXP button before exposure time has ended.
Exposure order is interrupted.
ACTIONS
1.
68
2.
Repeat the exposure.
3.
If error remains, check Handswitch or EXP button and replace what is wrong.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E50
DESCRIPTION :
Interrupted Exposure.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When operator releases EXP button before exposure time has ended.
E50 appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Operator releases EXP button before exposure time has ended.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
2.
Repeat the exposure.
3.
If error remains, check Handswitch or EXP button and replace what is wrong.
E51
DESCRIPTION :
Checksum failure or EPROM corrupted.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
After self-test.
At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E51 is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
DRAC program memory corrupted.
ACTIONS
1.
TR-1005R4
Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.
69
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E52
DESCRIPTION :
Microcrontroller RAM failure.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Exposure is not allowed.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN :
After self-test.
At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E52 is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
U17 in Control DRAC Board is defective.
ACTIONS
1.
ERROR CODE :
Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.
E53
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC).
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
E53 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are low or absent.
Voltage at TP18 is < 1.1 VDC.
ACTIONS
70
1.
Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 200 VDC.
2.
If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.
3.
If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
4.
If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
5.
If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.
6.
If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC
PCB.
7.
If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E54
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (480 VAC).
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, is low (out of range).
Voltage at TP18 is < 2.48 VDC.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 447 VDC.
2.
If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.
3.
If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
4.
If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
5.
If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.
6.
If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC
PCB.
E55
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 or 380 VAC.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are high (out of range).
Voltage at TP18 is > 4.92 VDC.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check the input voltage to the Generator at TS2--20, TS2--21 and TS2--22, it must be according
to specifications max. 480 VAC + 10%. If it is not OK, check Input Power Line.
2.
If Power Input is OK, check the DC Voltage between J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB,
it should be less than 890 VDC.
3.
If Voltage is < 890 VDC replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
4.
If voltage is > 890 VDC, switch OFF and disconnect J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC . Switch
ON and measure voltage in DC BUS +/--.
5.
If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC.
6.
If not OK, check Power Module and FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. Replace defective part.
( Power Module or FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB).
71
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E56
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive reference voltage.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive reference voltage.
ACTIONS
72
1.
Check voltage at TP15, it must be 0V.
2.
If not 0V, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E58
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E58 is displayed and it is not possible to make
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS
1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube
Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective,
replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator
specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB
in the following way:
G
Note
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the
generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these
points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
7.
TR-1005R4
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:

P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse
N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If
any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press PREP
a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of

Control DRAC and Press PREP.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
73
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E59
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
74
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E60
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
G
Note

TR-1005R4
75
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E61
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
G
Note

76
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E62
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
TR-1005R4
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
77
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E63
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E63 is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
78
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E64
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

TR-1005R4
79
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E65
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

80
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E66
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During running of the anode at low speed, E66 is displayed and it is not possible to make
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
TR-1005R4
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
81
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E67
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
82
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E68
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

TR-1005R4
83
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E69
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

84
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E70
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During running of the anode at high speed, E70 is displayed and it is not possible to make
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
TR-1005R4
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
85
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E71
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
5.
6.
G
Note

7.
86
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E72
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

TR-1005R4
87
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E73
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

88
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E74
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E74 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the

specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If
winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

6.
TR-1005R4
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
89
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E75
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the

specifications.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

6.
90
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E76
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.

specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

TR-1005R4
91
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E77
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.

specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

92
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E78
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E78 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.

specifications.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

6.
TR-1005R4
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
93
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E79
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
3.

specifications.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

6.
94
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E80
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.

specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

TR-1005R4
95
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E81
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at high Speed.
During braking operation of the anode at high peed, E81 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.

specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note
X-ray Tube Stator

96
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E82
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong X-ray Tube selection.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
When changing Tube selection.
Changing the tube selection, E82 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No tube selected.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check that the Dip switch 3243--SW4--6 is in on position (tube selection inhibited).
2.
Check delayed switch off.
E83
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in DC Brake.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode braking in DC voltage.
During braking operation of the anode with DC voltage, E83 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in main or auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
2.
3.
specifications.
4.
97
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E84
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect Tube selection signal.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Changing the tube selection E84 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No tube selected. X-Ray selection Signal is not correct on the Control DRAC PCB.
ACTIONS
1.
ERROR CODE :
Check that the Dip Switch 3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC PCB is in ON position.
E85
DESCRIPTION :
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
98
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E86
DESCRIPTION :
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
2.
Check the connection of common wire.
3.
Check the voltage at TP36 in Control DRAC Board.
E87
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During acceleration of Anode at Low Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in common wire is detected.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
99
Troubleshooting
5.
G
Note

ERROR CODE :
E88
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Running the Anode at Low Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

100
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E89
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
During acceleration of the Anode at High Speed.
E89 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

TR-1005R4
101
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E90
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
Running the Anode at High Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
1.
2.
specifications.
3.
4.
5.
G
Note

102
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E91
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2).
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
In Stand-by situation.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS
1.
ERROR CODE :
Check the voltage at TP1 and TP17 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
E92
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3).
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
In Stand-by situation.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The system is detecting current through auxiliary wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS
1.
TR-1005R4
Check the voltage at TP3 and TP16 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
103
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E93
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4).
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
APPEARS WHEN :
In Stand-by.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS
1.
ERROR CODE :
Check the voltage at TP1, TP3 and TP36 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
E95
DESCRIPTION :
Rapid Termination
ERROR TYPE :
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with Rapid Termination application Installed.
APPEARS WHEN :
While Exposure. (after 10ms from exposure or after 10% of the exposure back-up time whatever
is first).
POSIBLE CAUSES
The selected Ion Chamber or the selected parameters (short backup time) are not appropriate for an
exposure with AEC
Switch SW1--3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in ON position.
ACTIONS
104
1.
2.
Select appropriate Ion Chamber or modify parameters.
3.
if error remains check SW1-3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in OFF position.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E96
DESCRIPTION :
Voltage missing at PCB A3517--01.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
Capacitor Powered Generators only.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any time.
E96 appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Failure in Power supply of PCB A3517--01.
Failure in reference voltage 10V.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Turn Off Generator and wait for the DC Link Capacitors to discharge. For that, refer to Capacitor
Discharge Procedure.
2.
Replace A3517--01 PCB.
E97
DESCRIPTION :
Voltage in capacitors not balanced.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
Capacitor Powered Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
E97 appears at Console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
1.-- Failure at measurements circuitry of PCB A3517--01.
2.-- Failure in Resistors 8R1 and 8R3 (voltage regulating resistors).
3.-- Failure in DC Link Capacitors.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
For Cause 1: Replace PCB A3517--01.
2.
For Cause 2: Replace resistors 8R1 and 8R3.
3.
For Cause 3: Replace all DC Link Capacitors.
105
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E98
DESCRIPTION :
Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode Active.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. It allows normal operation.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
After turning on the Control Console.
E98 appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set in ON position.
ACTIONS
1.
Reset the error condition by pressing the respective button on the Console.
Keep in mind that this error will appear each time the Generator is turned OFF/ON during service
procedures (configuration, calibration, etc.) whenever Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console
Board is in ON (closed) position (for service mode allowed).
2.
106
When servicing is finished and the Generator is ready for normal operation, turn the Generator
OFF and set Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board in OFF (open) position (operation
mode).
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 5
5.1
CENTRAL LISTING
HT CONTROLLER BOARD
5.1.1
HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--10/20)

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
SW2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
JP1
A
B
A3000--10 VERSION
A3000--20 VERSION
JP2
A
B
A3000--10 VERSION
A3000--20 VERSION
BOARD CONFIGURATION
LEDs
LED
DS1
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
YELLOW
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN

CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE.
LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL
CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH
OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R29
10K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER
R49
20K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
R51
10K, 1/2w
DEAD TIME CONTROL FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
--12 VDC SUPERVISOR
TR-1005R4
107
Troubleshooting
5.1.2
HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so)

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
SW2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST
JP1
COMPATIBLE WITH OLD

LOW SPEED STARTER
COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW

SPEED STARTER) AND
DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
COMPATIBLE WITH OLD

LOW SPEED STARTER
COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW

SPEED STARTER) AND
DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
JP2
BOARD CONFIGURATION
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN

CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE.
COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL
CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH
OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
DS2
YELLOW
EXPOSURE INDICATOR
DS3
YELLOW
PREPARATION INDICATOR
POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R29
10K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER
R49
20K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
--12 VDC SUPERVISOR
108
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.2
FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
JP1
A
B
DESCRIPTION
A3004--05 VERSION
A3004--04 VERSION
BOARD CONFIGURATION. JP1-A FOR NORMAL APPLICATION
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
DS2
GREEN
FILAMENT DRIVER STATUS INDICATOR:

BOTH LEDs ARE OFF: 220VAC POWER SUPPLY IS MISSING
ONLY ONE LED IS OFF: THE BOARD IS DEFECTIVE
5.3
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
W1
2--1
2--3
AUXILARY BUCKY SUPPLY

NORMAL
EXPOSURE ENABLE RELAY ( K4 ) CAN BE SUPPLIED FROM

INTERNAL +24VDC ( NORMAL ), OR FROM EXTERNAL
VOLTAGE ( AUXILIARY BUCKY SUPPLY ).
W2
2--1
2--3
NORMAL
LOGIC LINE SYNC
FLUORO EXPOSURE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH AC LINE

DIRECTLY ( NORMAL ), OR THRU A LOGIC CIRCUITRY.
W3
A
B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY

NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W4
A
B

W5
A
B

W6
A
B

W7
A
B

W8
A
B

W9
A
B

W10
A
B

TR-1005R4
THE OUTPUT OF THE PHOTO TUBE/ION CHAMBER HIGH

VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CAN BE SELECTED AS :
-- POSITIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- A )
-- NEGATIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- B )
109
Troubleshooting
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
GENERATOR POWER ON INDICATOR
POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R29
5K, 1/2w
ION CHAMBER POSITIVE HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUST
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1 -- POWER ON
+6VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
GENERATOR POWER ON
K2 -- BUCKY 1
BUCKY 1 DRIVE
K3 -- BUCKY 2
BUCKY 2 DRIVE
K4 -- BUCKY MOTION
BUCKY EXPOSURE ENABLE
K5 -- SOL DR
HV TRANSFORMER SOLENOID DRIVE
K6 -- TUBE 1
TUBE FILAMENT PREHEAT SELECTION
K7 -- SM SPOT (RAD)
SMALL/LARGE FILAMENT SELECTION
K8
DELAYED +24VDC AND +5VDC
K9
BUS DC DISCHARGE WITH POWER OFF
K10
ROOM LIGHT CONTACT
K11
PhotoMOS Relay, SPST
FILAMENT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
110
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.4
LVDC POWER SUPPLY

POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R12
2K, 1w
+5 VDC ADJUST
R25
2K, 1w
--12 VDC ADJUST
R26
2K, 1w
+12 VDC ADJUST
5.5
CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARD

LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
CHARGE INDICATOR OF THE HT INVERTER CAPACITORS:

LED OFF: NO CHARGE
LED ON: CHARGE ACCORDING TO BRIGHTNESS
5.6
LOCKS BOARD
FUSES
FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F14
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
24 VAC
LOCKS/LAMP
F15
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
24 VAC
LOCKS/LAMP
TR-1005R4
111
Troubleshooting
5.7
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
JP1
POS A COMM--COL1
POS B COMM--COL0
JP2
POS A PREP--ROW5
POS B PREP--ROW1
JP3
POS A EXP--ROW4
POS B EXP--ROW0
JP4
POS A LINE SYNC

POS B CAM SYNC
SET ALWAYS IN POSITION B.
JP5
POS A VD SELECTION
POS B IC4 SELECTION
POS C PT INPUT SELECT.
POS. A -- SELECTION OF IC REFERENCE OUTPUT

POS. B -- SELECTION OF AEC ION CHAMBER (IC4) OUTPUT (NORMAL MODE).
POS. C -- SELECTION OF PHOTOMULTIPLIER (PT INPUT) OUTPUT FOR ABC.
JP6
POS A 27C512/27C1001/274001
JP7
POS A RS485
POS B RS422
JP8
POS A RS485
POS B RS422
JP9
POS A RS232
POS B RS422 & RS485
JP10
POS A RS232
POS B RS422 & RS485
JP11
POS A RS232
POS B RS422 & RS485
JP12
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JUMPER FACTORY NOT CONNECTED (SET ONLY FOR A3024--31 BOARD)
JP13
JUMPER ALWAYS FACTORY SET.
JP14
JUMPER FACTORY SET FOR NORMAL MODE. REMOVED FOR MOBILE APPLICATION.
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JUMPER FACTORY SET IN A POSITION (SER IN B ONLY FOR A3024-32 BOARD)
JP21
JP22
JP21, JP22 :
POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS.
POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
SW1
SW2
TEST
SW3
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED -- ALL SWITCHES IN OFF POSITION
SW4
NOT USED
4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED
112
POS B 27C256
POSITION B FOR APPLICATION MODE.
MEMORY SELECTION. SET ALWAYS IN POSITION A.
JP7, JP8 :
POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS.
POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
JP9, JP10, JP11 :

POS. A -- RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS. B -- RS422 & RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
JUMPERS FACTORY REMOVED FOR NORMAL MODE.

MODE SET FOR MOBILE APPLICATION
APPLICATION.
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
WATCH--DOG TIMER OPERATION INDICATOR :

LED ON INSURES THE MICROPROCESSOR AND SOFTWARE IS
WORKING CORRECTLY
YELLOW
CONSOLE MICROPROCESSOR OPERATION INDICATOR :

COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE HT CONTROLLER
AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2
PER SECOND.
DS2
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
PREP ORDER
K2
EXP ORDER
K3
AUTO OFF
K4
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPDT
DIGITAL SYSTEM PREP -- EXTERNAL

SYNCHRONISM SELECTION
5.8
FLUORO CPU BOARD

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
W1
ABC SELECTION
W1 JUMPER INSTALLED FOR ABC DISABLE

W1 JUMPER REMOVED FOR ABC ENABLE
W2
W2 JUMPER ALWAYS INSTALLED
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
FLUORO MICROPROCCESOR OPERATION INDICATOR :

FLASHING WHEN TUBE-2 IS SELECTED AND THERE IS
COMMUNICATION WITH CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
TR-1005R4
113
Troubleshooting
5.9
FLUORO -- RF ADAPTATION BOARD
5.9.1

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER
JP1, JP3, JP4,
JP8 JP9,
JP8,
JP9 JP10,
JP10
JP12, JP13, JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
114
POSITION
DESCRIPTION
Remove all
jumpers
Set only JP1,

JP8 and JP12
Set
Removed
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera sync.
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (digital, etc.)
For ABC OUT signal from the video in
For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal
For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal
ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal
ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System
Set
When JP21 in position A
Removed
When JP21 in position B
Set
Removed
Normal position
To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.9.2

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER
JP1, JP3, JP4,

JP8,, JP9,, JP10,,
JP12 JP13,
JP12,
JP13 JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
TR-1005R4
POSITION
DESCRIPTION
Set all jumpers
+24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Remove all
jumpers
Set only JP1,

JP8 and JP12
Set
Removed
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera video.
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (TV Camera, digital, etc.)
For ABC OUT signal from the video in
For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal
For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal
ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal
ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System
Set
When JP21 in position A
Removed
When JP21 in position B
Set
Removed
Normal position
To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry
Normal position
For Fluoro order enable
115
Troubleshooting
5.10 AEC CONTROL BOARD

5.10.1
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
JP1
A
B
C
FOR TV CAMERA
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
JP2
A
B
FOR TV CAMERA
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP4
A
B
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC

FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG
JP3
A
B

FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
NOTE:
A3012-05:
A3012
05: JP1
JP1-C,
C JP2-A
JP2 A AND JP4
JP4-B
B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
ATS DIG
A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA
A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R10
10K, 1/2w
LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT
R11
10K, 1/2w
KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R12
10K, 1/2w
KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
116
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.10.2
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
JP1
A
B
C
FOR TV CAMERA
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
EXTERNAL kV CONTROL
JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA

JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL
JP2
A
B

FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
JP3
JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4
JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)
NOTE:
POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R10
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR CINE MODE
R11
10K, 1/2w
KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R12
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR RAD OR DSA MODE
R13
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR FLUORO MODE
R14
10K, 1/2w
KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R22
10K, 1/2w
LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT
R23
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR DSI MODE
TR-1005R4
117
Troubleshooting
5.11 AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
ION CHAMBER TYPE
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4
IC1 = IC2 = IC3
IC1 = IC2
IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
118
JUMPERS POSITION
JUMPERS POSITION
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

TP1 -- R11
TP2 -- R8
TP4 -- R2
TP12 -- R5
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.12 LF-RAC BOARD (LOW SPEED STARTER)

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
TB2 -- T1
TUBE 1 STATOR SUPPLY

VOLTAGE SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR

TB2 -- T2
TUBE 2 STATOR SUPPLY

VOLTAGE SELECTION

TB3 -- T1
TUBE 1 STATOR SHIFT

CAPACITOR SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 F SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY

TB3 -- T2
TUBE 2 STATOR SHIFT

CAPACITOR SELECTION

TB4 -- T1
TUBE 1 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--21, 22, 23 : 115 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 FAN
TB4 -- T2
TUBE 2 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
ROTOR ACCELERATION STATUS INDICATOR
DS2
YELLOW
TUBE 2 SELECTION INDICATOR
DS3
YELLOW
ROTOR BRAKE STATUS INDICATOR
DS4
YELLOW
ROTOR CURRENT STATUS INDICATOR :

HIGH BRIGHTNESS WHEN THE ROTOR ACCELERATION, AND
NORMAL BRIGHTNESS IN THE ROTOR RUN STATUS
FUSES
FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F1
6 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
ROTOR
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1 / KACC
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 2 Fom C
ROTOR ACCELERATION
K2 / KCT
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Form C
TUBE 2 SELECTION (FROM HT CONTROLLER)
K3 / KBR
ROTOR BRAKE
K4 / KCTR
TUBE 2 SELECTION (COILS)
K5 / KCTRR
TUBE 2 SELECTION (FANS & HV TRANSF--SWITCH)
TR-1005R4
119
Troubleshooting
5.13 LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)

5.13.1
DELAYED SWITCH-OFF BOARD

RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
SWITCH-OFF DELAYED
K2
SWITCH-OFF MAINTAINED
5.13.2
CONTROL DRAC BOARD

JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DL1
RED
ERROR STATUS
DL2 (flashing)
YELLOW
CODE STATUS
DL3 (ON)
YELLOW
READY
DL4 (ON)
YELLOW
TUBE 1 SELECTED
DL5 (ON)
YELLOW
TUBE 2 SELECTED
DL6 (ON)
YELLOW
DC BRAKE
DL7 (ON)
YELLOW
BUS DC+
DL8 (ON)
YELLOW
BUS DC--
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
RL2
READY
120
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.13.3
INTERFACE DRAC--HF BOARD

LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
BUS DC
FUSES
FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F1
0.5 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 SUPPLY
F2
0.5 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 SUPPLY
F3
15 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
BUS DC--
F4
15 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
BUS DC+
5.13.4
DRAC MISCELLANEOUS
RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
RELAY
TUBE 1 SELECTED
K3
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA
DC BRAKE
KT1
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA
TUBE 1 SELECTED
TR-1005R4
121
Troubleshooting
5.14 CABINET MISCELLANEOUS FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS

FUSES
FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F2
1.5 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 VAC SUPPLY
LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL
F3
50 A, 600 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE -- L1
LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME
F4
50 A, 600 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE -- L2
F5
50 A, 600 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE -- L3
F6
3 A, 250 V, S.B.
19 VAC
+24V SUPPLY
F7
3 A, 250 V, S.B.
10.4 VAC
+12V UNR SUPPLY
F8
3 A, 250 V, S.B.
115 VAC
115 VAC SUPPLY
F9
0.4 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 VAC LVDC
F12
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
INPUT TRANSFORMER
F13
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
INPUT TRANSFORMER
F14
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE OUTPUT -- U
F15
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE OUTPUT -- V
F16
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE OUTPUT -- W
LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL
LOCATION -- FRONT PANEL

LOCATION -- BACK PANEL
LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME
NOTE.-- FUSES F14, F15, F16 ARE ONLY INSTALLED IN VERTICAL GENERATOR CABINET, NEVER IN COMPACT MODEL.
RELAYS
RELAY
K1
SOLID STATE RELAY
K3
RATING
DESCRIPTION
+24VDC INPUT, 10A/250V OUTPUT
ROTOR START RELAY
110VAC COIL, 12A/250V CONTACT, 4PDT
POWER INPUT RELAY
K5
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE
LINE CONTACTOR
K6
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE
CHARGE CONTACTOR
122
TR-1005R4
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
Maintenance
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
APR 1, 2001
First edition
DEC 20, 2001
Text revision
APR 15, 2005
Review of Maintenance procedures
DEC 12, 2005
Reference to Calibration Chapter
MAR 26, 2008
Calibration of Touch Screen Sensor
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
MA-1004R4

Maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
2.3
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2
Internal Cabinet Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3
Internal Touch Screen Console Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
Ground Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2
AC Power Supply in X-ray Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Console Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1
Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6
HV Transformer Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2.7
X-ray Tube Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2.8
Radiographic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
2.8.1
Test for kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
2.8.2
Test for Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
2.8.3
Test for Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
AEC Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.9.1
Optical Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2.9.2
kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2.9.3
ATS Digital AEC (RAD) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.10 Fluoro Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2.11 ABC Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
21
3.1
Battery Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
3.2
Battery Charger Test and Battery Condition Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2.4
2.5
2.9
MA-1004R3
Maintenance
ii
MA-1004R3
Maintenance
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Periodic Maintenance is to assure continued safe
performance of the X-ray Generator, to increase serviceability, to reduce the
costs (down time, repairs, etc.) and to assure the safety (personal risk).
The following checks and maintenance procedures, together with the
suggested intervals, are the manufacturers recommendation for the most
effective Periodic Maintenance schedule for this Generator.
Service tasks here described must be performed exclusively by service
personnel specifically trained on medical X-ray Generators.
The first Periodic Maintenance Service should be performed six (6) months
after installation, and the subsequent services every twelve (12) months.
Periodic Maintenance Service depends on the working load of the Generator
and X-ray Tube.
Note
MA-1004R4
Take note in the Data Book all the periodic maintenance services
carried out and the data changes made during any maintenance
service.
Maintenance
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
SECTION 2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube,

HV Transformer or major circuit board, is replaced in the
system, perform the respective Configuration and
Calibration procedures.
Update and take note in the Data Book any new data entered
in memory.
If the HT Control Board or the ATP Console CPU Board is

Extended Memory data with the values noted in the Data
Book.
Before starting the periodic maintenance procedures, it is recommended to

make a test exposure using the same operating factors and conditions as a
typical exposure.
Perform the X-ray tube warm-up procedure if the tube has not been in use for
approximately one hour. (Refer to Operator Manual of the Console).
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT
The tools and test equipment required to perform the Periodic Maintenance
Service are the same as specified in Installation document.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.2
GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH

VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL
CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON
THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF,

IGBTS.

OF THE EQUIPMENT.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG.
WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS
POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN
THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT
IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS
POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS
TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE
FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR
BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD
BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL
OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE
UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL
AREA.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON
UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM
ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS
POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV
INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES,
DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON
AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE
CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS
DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL
AREA.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.3
GENERAL CLEANING
NEVER ATTEMPT TO CLEAN OR HANDLE ANY PART OF THE
X-RAY GENERATOR WHEN IT IS TURNED ON. SWITCH OFF
THE GENERATOR MAIN DISCONNECT BEFORE CLEANING
OR INSPECTING.
2.3.1
EXTERNAL SURFACES
Clean external covers and surfaces frequently, particularly if corroding
chemicals are present and specially parts in contact with the patient, with a cloth
moistened in warm water with mild soap solution. Rinse wipe with a cloth
moistened in clean water. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind.
Clean Console keyboard and displays with a cloth dampened in warm water.
Rinse wipe with a cloth dampened in clean water.
Also check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.
2.3.2
INTERNAL CABINET CLEANING

Remove the external access cover from the Generator Cabinet.
Visually inspect all major components for dust or foreign items. Search carefully
to detect objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections.
If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Generator Cabinet using a dry
brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and the vent
holes of the cabinet are not obstructed.
2.3.3
INTERNAL TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE CLEANING

MAKE SURE THAT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS
POWERED OFF OR UNPLUGGED.
Remove the front cover of the Touch Screen Console.
Visually inspect internally for dust or foreign items. Search carefully to detect
objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections.
If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Touch Screen Console using
a dry brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and
the vent holes are not obstructed.
Clean the Touch Screen sensor with an isopropyl alcohol and water solution
ratio of 50:50 , always damp the lint-free cloth and then clean the screen. Spray
the cleaning liquid onto the cloth, never spray directly on the screen.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.4
CABLE CHECKS
CAREFULLY HANDLE ALL INTERNAL PARTS OF THE UNIT.
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and that all cable
clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Also check that connectors do not have
exposed wire-veins and check cable sheaths (cable cover) for wear and fraying.
Check that all cables are correctly routed.
2.4.1
GROUND CABLE CONNECTIONS

The central reference ground of the X-ray System and Generator is located at
Check the ground lead interconnections continuity using a multimeter at its
lowest ohms range.
2.4.2
AC POWER SUPPLY IN X-RAY ROOM

Measure the value of AC power supply between all phases, neutral and ground.
Check that these values comply with the tolerances established at the original
installation.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.5
CONTROL CONSOLE CONDITION

Check the proper connection and condition of the cables connected to the
Console.
If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch cable
and its connection to the Console are in good condition.
Check correct operation of the buttons, displays and indicators by performing
the following test:
1.
Turn the Generator / Console ON.
2.
If the Console is a Touch Screen Console, touch on different points of the

operator application on the Touch Screen to check that the Touch Screen
Sensor is properly calibrated. If it is not calibrated, perform the procedure
described in Section 2.5.1 -- Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.
3.
If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch

cable and its connection to the Console are in good condition.
4.
Select a radiographic technique and observe:

G
Indicators of the selected workstation and Focal Spot.
Technique parameters are displayed on the Console. Change

technique parameters and observe that changes are correctly
displayed.
Select the parameters for an usual exposure. Press Prep and

verify that the Ready indicator is activated. Release Prep and
observe that the Ready indicator is deactivated.
Make the exposure, and verify that radiographic exposure signal

sounds and the Prep and X-ray On indicators are activated
during the exposure.
5.
If AEC is installed, select a technique with AEC and observe that the
indicators of the selected AEC controls are activated.
6.
If APR is installed, select an APR technique and observe:

G
Indicators of the selected Patient Size are activated and the Body
Region / Anatomical Views are shown on the APR Display and its
corresponding parameters are shown on the RAD Display.
Change the APR technique and observe that selection and

parameters changes on both Displays.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
7.
2.5.1
If Fluoro is installed, select a workstation for Fluoro operation and

observe:
G
Fluoro parameters are displayed on the Fluoro Display.
Change the Fluoro kV and observe that changes are correctly

displayed.
Check selection of another functions related to Fluoro if they are

present (ABC, PPS, etc.).
TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION
Note
This calibration procedure only applies to Touch Screen Console.

If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can
not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed,
perform the next procedure:
CALIBRATION FOR AN ELO TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR
1.
2.
Press the Start--Windows button on the keyboard connected to the

Touch Screen Console, then select (double-click):
Settings / Control Panel / EloTouchscreen.
3.
Execute the Align program and follow the process touching on the
indicated places. Click on Yes and OK, then close the Control Panel.
4.
Return to the Application through Start and select: Programs / Start up

(select the first one) / Console.
CALIBRATION FOR A 3M TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR
MA-1004R4
1.
2.
On the PC Desktop, press theStart-Windows button on the keyboard

connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: Programs / UPDD
/ Calibrate.
3.
Execute the Calibrate program and follow the process clicking on the
indicated places.
4.
When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering

again in Start and select: Programs / Start up (select the first one) /
Console.
Maintenance
2.6
HV TRANSFORMER CONDITION
The HV Transformer contains Shell Diala AX oil.
Check that there is not oil leakage. If found, remove the oil fill plug from the top
of the HV Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4) of the
top surface of the HV Transformer. If necessary add oil Shell Diala AX.
Note
This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transfromers (black

aluminium HV Transformers).
Make sure that:
2.7
HV oil in the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence of

arcing.
HV Cable terminal rings are tight.
X-RAY TUBE CONDITION

Make sure that:
10
All parts are mechanically secure with no oil leaks.
HV grease on the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence

of arcing.
HV Cable terminal rings are tight.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.8
RADIOGRAPHIC PARAMETERS
With the generator power OFF, connect:
Note
2.8.1
Non-invasive kV Meter to measure kV.
mAs Meter to the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer

to measure mA or mAs (connect the mAs Meter for Digital mA
Loops calibration).
Test points on the HT Controller PCB can also be used to monitor

the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the
unit. These test points must be checked with scope. (Refer to
Calibration chapter -- Section 2 Calibration Procedures, for test
points and scale factors).
TEST FOR kV LOOP

1.
Verify that dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board is in Off

position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
2.
Turn the Generator ON and select the Direct (No Bucky) workstation in
one of the X-ray Tubes.
3.
Select 80 kV, 200 mA (or the first mA station for Large Focus), 100 ms.
Make an exposure and note the kV at the end of the exposure.
4.
Check that the kV value read on the kV Meter must be 80 1 kV.

If the kV value does not comply with the above value, perform the
respective Calibration procedures.
MA-1004R4
11
Maintenance
2.8.2
TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN

1.
Note
Set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in On

position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).
Only for Generators with LF-RAC (LSS):

-- When the mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in On), the
rotor runs for two minutes after release the handswitch
push-button from Preparation position.
-- When the mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in Off),
the Tube will brake after release the handswitch push-button from
Preparation position.
2.
Enter in Manual Calibration selecting the Direct (No Bucky) workstation

of the corresponding X-ray Tube.
3.
Select 80 kV and the following mA stations. Make an exposure and note

the mAs values read on the mAs Meter.
4.
Minimum mA for Small Focal Spot.
Maximum mA for Small Focal Spot.
Minimum mA for Large Focal Spot.
Maximum mA for Large Focal Spot.
Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs
displayed on the Console with a tolerance of 6% mAs.
If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the
respective Auto-Calibration procedures.
12
5.
Repeat this test for the second X-ray Tube.
6.
Turn the Generator OFF and set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT
Controller Board in Off position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.8.3
2.9
TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED

1.
Turn the Generator ON and select the Direct (No Bucky) workstation in
one of the X-ray Tubes.
2.
Select the following parameters, make an exposure and note the mAs
values read on the mAs Meter.
G
80 kV, 100 ms, 50 mA.
80 kV, 100 ms, 200 mA.
3.
Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs
displayed on the Console with a tolerance of 4% mAs.
4.
If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the
respective Auto-Calibration procedures.
5.
Turn the Generator OFF.
AEC CHECKS
Note
For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the
customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium
Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed
has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (a.e. 200--Slow,
400--Medium, 800--Fast).
Note
When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital

Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density:
-- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software
tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation).
-- or measure the Dose level:
-- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber.
-- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with
the Grid removed.
MA-1004R4
13
Maintenance
2.9.1
OPTICAL DENSITY
Note
The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same

point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure.
The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with
relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to
center of the Film.
USEFUL BEAM
FILM
DENSITOMETER
14
1.
2.
3.

4.
Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the

Console:
G
back-up time.
AEC Menu: Central

Film/Screen.
Area,
Density
and
Medium
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.9.2
5.
necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA
station) and make the exposure again.
6.

customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical
Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
7.
If the Optical Density is not as required, perform the respective AEC

Calibration procedure.
8.
Generator.
kV COMPENSATION
1.
MA-1004R4
Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the

Console:
G
back-up time.

Film/Screen.
2.
Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the
Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the
Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the
selected for 55 kV.
3.
selected for 90 kV.
15
Maintenance
2.9.3
selected for 110 kV.
5.

customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper
thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop
the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures.
Check that the film variation range is the same 0.2 of the Optical
Density (or 20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR)
obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.9.1).
6.
If the variation values is not as required, perform the respective AEC

Calibration procedure.
7.
Generator.
ATS DIGITAL AEC (RAD) (OPTIONAL)
Note
16
4.
If the Generator is interfaced with an ATS Digital System, Digital

AEC test has to be performed as explained in the ATS Digital
System documentation.
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.10 FLUORO CHECK
Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps:

1.
Turn the Generator ON.
Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly
warmed-up.
2.
Note
Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure

entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator
Assembly as close as possible to the Table-Top, fully open the Collimator
Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation
input to Image Intensifier with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration in
Fluoro Calibration).
Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate
must be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to
Dosimeter calibration accuracy.
REJECTIONS LIMITS
METER CALIBRATION
ACCURACY
FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
5%
10%
15%
3.
For testing the Dose, make a Fluoro exposure at maximum kV and

measure the dose applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for
5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) or 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) (refer to the above
table).
In case that the value is not acquired, perform the respective Fluoro
calibration process.
MA-1004R4
17
Maintenance
4.
The Fluoro mA values are obtained by measuring the average mA using

a mA meter in Fluoro.
During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in
DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the
HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the
banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.
5.
For testing the mA, make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV, 80 kV and 110 kV.
Check that the mA values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mA
displayed on the Console with a tolerance of 10 % mA. If the mA value
does not comply with the above values, perform the respective
Calibration procedures.
6.
Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).
2.11 ABC CHECK
Note
If the Generator is interfaced with an ATS Image System, ABC

testing procedure has to be performed as explained in the Image
System documentation.
1.
2.

beam.
3.
18
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
4.
Select ABC mode.
5.

6.
Make a Fluoro exposure and check that Fluoro kVp displayed on the
Console is between 80 kVp and 60 kVp. If it is more than 80 kV or less
than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in steps of 0.1 mm (or 0.2 mm)
and make Fluoro exposures until the kVp is within the range.
7.
Calculate the value of the optimum dose rate (that will give optimum
brightness) to obtain 2R/frame at 9 FOV.
Examples:
For 25 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3 mR/min.
For 30 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3.6 mR/min.
The optimum dose rate (dose rate) value should be measured at Image
Intensifier Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can
not be removed, this value should be multiplied by the value specified as
Grid Absorption Factor.
MA-1004R4
8.
Make a Fluoro exposure and measure the dose rate. The dose rate read
on the Dosimeter must be the same as the previously calculated with the
tolerance specified by the Dosimeter accuracy. If the dose rate does not
comply, perform the respective Calibration procedures.
9.
10.
19
Maintenance
20
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
SECTION 3
Note
3.1
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO

This Section only applies to Battery Powered Generators and

must be performed at least once a year.
BATTERY STORAGE CONDITIONS

This generator should be stored at a dry environment around 20oC (68oF). The
recommended operating temperature is 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF).
During normal storage conditions (dry environment at 20oC (68oF) the internal
resistance of the batteries will cause a discharge rate of 15% per six month
period. Storage above 30oC (86oF) should be avoided, since it will cause
excessive battery voltage loss.
Within the recommended operating temperature and under optimum float
conditions, the batteries service life is expected to exceed 5 years.
The batteries of the Unit are fully charged when delivered from the factory. If the
Unit is going to be stored or has been stored for a period longer than six months,
batteries must be fully charged during eight hours before operation or service
tasks.
If the unit has not been used or it has been stored for six
months, it should be installed and/or energized to prevent
deep discharge of the batteries. A deep discharge will cause
permanent damage to the batteries. Perform the following
Maintenance Tests.
3.2
BATTERY CHARGER TEST AND BATTERY CONDITION TEST

Refer to Section 2.6 Procedures related to the Battery Powered Generators
of the Troubleshooting document in the Service Manual and perform all the
indicated procedures to carry out a correct maintenance of the Battery Charger
Board and Batteries.
MA-1004R4
21
Maintenance
22
MA-1004R4
SC-1005R0
Schematics
Schematics
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE

Refer to each schematic
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
SC-1005R0

Schematics
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sch. No.
Scheme
POWER CABINET
54302010
Compact Generator (for 2 Tubes or HS with LV-DRAC)
A3274--01
Delayed Switch-Off PCB (only used with HS generators)
A3000--xx
HT Controller PCB (12 bits)
A3004--xx
Filament Control PCB
A3009--xx
Interface Control PCB
A3063--03
IPM Driver PCB
A3212--01
Charge / Discharge Monitor PCB
A3024--xx
ATP Console PCB -- Console CPU PCB
A3012--01/02/05
AEC Control PCB
SC-1005R0
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER

6T2
44
connect
according
with the
input line
10
9
440 VAC
415 VAC
400 VAC
230 VAC
POWER
LAMP
115 VAC SW
115 VAC 18
3K3
115 VAC
6NL1 4
2
3
4
3F9
T 0.4A
+5V
7
10
8
9
jumper
jumper
+5V
+12V
+12V
--PWR OFF
6J2
4
5
--PWR ON
--12V
--12V
GND
9
2
8
6
7
1
0 VAC
17
21 VAC 15
LVDC POWER SUPPLY

3PS1
13
( S3,S4--B3)
0 VAC
3LF3
14
B
( S3,S4--C4)
240 VAC SW
480 VAC
3F8
T 3A
Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on

sheet 2 of the schematic for input line below 400 VAC
3F2
T 1.5A
240 VAC 20
530 VAC
3F6
T 3A
--PWR OFF
--PWR ON
+12V
--12V
+12V UNR
+12V UNR
GND
GND
GND
3TS1
0 VAC 14
40
110 VAC
11 VAC 12
1 ohm
4w
+24V--PSU
3F7
T 3A
-11
3BR4
--
3BR2
10
17
16
3K3
3C6
2400 MF
3C7
2400 MF
54
+24V
15
0 VAC 11
28 VAC
26 VAC
24 VAC
22 VAC
20 VAC
16 VAC
14 VAC
12 VAC
0 VAC
3
3
60 VAC
2
1
0 VAC
26
240 VAC SW
35
34
16
33
32
31
30
19
13
-12
24 VAC TR
3BR1
( S5--F2)
0 VAC TR
27
115 VAC SW
240 VAC SPLY

+24V
--12 V
+12 V
240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
+SUPPLY
( S3,S4--E1)
--SUPPLY
Shield Stud
T3
L3
0 VAC RTR
60 VAC RTR
230 VAC RTR
6F13
T 10A
6R1
20 ohm
100w
6F12
T 10A
6F3
T 50A
6F4
T 50A
L2
6F5
T 50A
L3
L1
T1
L2
T2
L2
T2
L3
T3
L3
T3
C3
1 nF
LOAD
L1
AC2
CR1
C4
470 nF
C12
470 nF
C7
1 nF
GND
NEUTRAL
C8
470 nF
Note.- 12TS4, 12F14, 12F15,
and 12F16 are optional
12TS4
N
U
DELAYED
+24V
12F14
12F16
T 15A
6J3
10
AC3
A2(B)
T 15A
--LINE CONT
AC1
6LF1
MAINS
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO THREE PHASE GENERATOR
( S8--F4)
12F15
A1(A)
T 15A
A2(B)
A1(A)
6K6
6K5
--LINE CONT
( S3,S4--B4)
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
F. GARCIA
12/12/02
A
F
REV
CN 02/197
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
R3
33 ohm
CR3
R5
33 ohm
C1
470 nF
C5
470 nF
C9
470 nF
C2
470 nF
C6
470 nF
C10
470 nF
R2
33 ohm
R4
33 ohm
R6
33 ohm
--
C11
1 nF
--CHRG DR
( S3,S4--D4)
+24V--PSU
R1
33 ohm
CR2
BUS +
( S5--F2)
BUS -( S5--F2)
INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD

5A5
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SHEET / OF
1/8
DWG:
54302010
C
02/08/05
DATE
SEDECAL
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC

GENERATOR
REV
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER

6T2
connect
according
with the
input line
240 VAC
240 VAC 20
D
Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on sheet 1
of the schematic for input line greater than 240 VAC
3F2
T 1.5A
115 VAC SW
115 VAC 18
4
POWER
LAMP
115 VAC
3K3
6NL1
230 VAC
0 VAC
17
4
21 VAC 15
21
23
3
+5V
7
10
8
9
jumper
jumper
+12V
+12V
--PWR ON
--12V
--12V
GND
9
2
8
6
7
1
3F6
T 3A
--PWR OFF
--PWR ON
+12V
--12V
+12V UNR
+12V UNR
GND
GND
GND
3TS1
0 VAC 14
120 VAC
110 VAC
11 VAC 12
1 ohm
4w
+24V--PSU
3F7
T 3A
-11
3BR4
--
3BR2
10
54
17
16
3K3
3C6
2400 MF
3C7
2400 MF
+24V
15
0 VAC 11
100 VAC
28 VAC
26 VAC
24 VAC
22 VAC
20 VAC
16 VAC
14 VAC
12 VAC
0 VAC
60 VAC
2
1
2
3
4
3F9
T 0.4A
+5V
6J2
4
5
208 VAC
3
9
A
--PWR OFF
0 VAC
8
22
LVDC POWER SUPPLY

3PS1
13
( S3,S4--B3)
5
3LF3
14
B
( S3,S4--C4)
240 VAC SW
6
3F8
T 3A
0 VAC
26
240 VAC SW
35
34
16
33
32
31
30
19
13
-12
24 VAC TR
3BR1
( S5--F2)
0 VAC TR
27
115 VAC SW
240 VAC SPLY

+24V
--12 V
+12 V
240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
+SUPPLY
( S3,S4--E1)
--SUPPLY
Shield Stud
L1
T1
0 VAC RTR
60 VAC RTR
230 VAC RTR
6F13
T 10A
Note.- For Two Phases, replace

Neutral Cartidge (L2/N) by Fuse 6F4.
6F3
T 50A
L1
Neutral or 6F4
Cartridge T 50A
N / L2
L1
T1
L2
T2
6R1
20 ohm, 100w
C7
1 nF
6LF1
L2
T2
Note.- 12TS4, 12F14

and 12F15, are optional
AC3
DELAYED
+24V
12F15
T 15A
12F14
T 15A
+24V--PSU
A1(A)
6J3
--LINE CONT
10
A1(A)
6K5
R5
33 ohm
C5
470 nF
C9
470 nF
C6
470 nF
C10
470 nF
R4
33 ohm
R6
33 ohm
--
6K6
BUS -( S5--F2)
INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD

5A5
--LINE CONT
( S3,S4--B4)
BUS +
( S5--F2)
--CHRG DR
( S3,S4--D4)
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATOR

F
C11
1 nF
R3
33 ohm
CR3
A2(B)
A2(B)
1
CR2
C8
470 nF
GND
12TS4
AC2
LOAD
MAINS
6F12
T 10A
( S8--F4)
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
12/12/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
2/8
DWG:
54302010
C

GENERATOR
REV
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH

HT TRANSFORMER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES
--12V
+12V
+5V
2 +12V
3 +5V
4 GND
5 GND
6J3
PT CRL
--KV UP
--KV DWN
HT--C DAT
HT--C CLK
--EXP
C--HT DAT
C--HT CLK
--PREP
7
15
8
3
--FIL1 SCL
--START
--PRE CHRG
--CHRG DR
--KV UP
2 --KV DWN
6 --EXP
6
1
2
--TUBE 3
4 C--HT DAT
5 C--HT CLK
5
4
P4
3
RTR I
( S8--F1)
8
4
BUCKY SPLY
BUCKY SPLY
AUX BUCKY SPLY
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
--BUCKY 2 MOTION
BUCKY 1 DR
BUCKY 2 DR
0 VAC
0 VAC
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN
GND
BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
GND
SUPPLY (BUCKY 1)
SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)
--FIL DR1
--FIL DR2
GND
RTR I
FIL I
See NOTE 2
1 --KV
2 +KV
3TS1
2
9
--RTR RUN
--ACC
--BRAKE
--HS SCL
--RTR RDY
6 --MA
7
+MA
5
GND
46
-- IGBT FAULT
-- AUTO OFF INH
HI MA
12
13
14
15
16
17
P3
6
1
2
4
--TUBE 2 SCL
( S8--F1)
--T2 SCL
( S8--F1)
+12V
--START
( S8--F1)
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
( S5--F3)
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
5
3
+5V
+24V
+24V
+24V
DELAYED +24V
PT CRL
--LINE CONT
+5V OUT
--ON
GND
DISCHARGE 1
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
DISCHARGE 2
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
+12V
GND
GND
+24V
GND
GND
LINE SYNC
P4
12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
9
BUCKY SPLY
5 AUX BUCKY SPLY
11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION
PT SPLY
IC SPLY 1
IC SPLY 2
IC GND
--ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION
ROOM LIGHT SW
8
BUCKY 1 DR
ROOM LIGHT SUP
7
BUCKY 2 DR
18
--TUBE 2 SCL
19
--BUCKY EXP
--FIL 1 SCL
17
115 VAC
FIL PREHEAT
14
0 VAC
FIL RTN
115 VAC SW
22
--FIL 1 ACK
FIL 1 RTN
See NOTE 1
FIL 2 RTN
P5
5
7
6
9
4
3
1
10
4
2
1
ERROR DRAC
( S3--A2 )
--KV DR2
--PWR ON
--PWR OFF
P3
+24V
--CHRG DR
( S1, 2--E1 )
--KV DR1
2
1
-- IGBT FAULT
( S5--D3)
SOL DR
P5
6
8
5
16
+5V
+24V
+24V--PSU
DELAYED +24V
2
1
4
12
14
13
10
9
DISCHARGE 1
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
DISCHARGE 2
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
J1
K
A
0 VAC
6
13
DELAYED
+24V
14
+5V
1
8
+SUPPLY
--SUPPLY
P1
5
FIL PREHEAT
--FIL DR1
FIL RTN
6
--FIL DR2
FIL SUP
3
+5V
8
DELAYED +24V
7
FIL I
1
GND
P2
4
1
P3
2
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
C
D
E
1
4
+SUPPLY
FILAMENT
DRIVER
BOARD
--SUPPLY
3A3
--TUBE 2 SCL
(S8--F1)
HT SW CONTROL
10A2
J2
1
2
3
+24V
F
H
J1
1
G
N
3TS1
39
--ROOM LIGHT
(S5--B4)
4
5
0 VAC
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation )
E
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
B
A
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
CN 02/197
240 VAC SW
--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version
--ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and
--TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version
--HT INTLK
NAME
DATE
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
GND
115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
0 VAC
3
15
115 VAC SW
NOTE 1.-- For Generators with HT

Transformer for two Tubes:
Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN
(P4--16) are factory inverted on the
INTERFACE CONTROL
16
20
--BRAKE
(S8--F1)
6J1
+24V
10
ERROR DRAC
( S3--D3 )
+ 24V
--RTR RUN
--TUBE 2 RTR
--HS SCL
P1
HT DR1
( S5--C4 )
P3
HT DR2
( S5--C4 )
SEDECAL
--TUBE 1 RTR
( S5--B4)
3/8
DWG:
--SF PREP
7
12
--FL EXP
--PREP
11
--PREP
( S5--F3)
COM
( S5--E2 )
SHEET / OF
--RTR RDY
--SF PREP
--FL EXP
ERROR DRAC
mA
SHLD
DRAWING
ROOM LIGHT SUP
18
P4
6
ROOM LIGHT SW
47
SW1
SW2
IC GND
48
Black
SW COM
PT SPLY
42
7
2
test
] posts
FIL SUP
GND
Red
FIL 2 RTN
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
16
--BUCKY EXP
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
11
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
P2
1
HT TRANSFORMER
9HT1
HI MA
GND
GND
+KV
--KV
+MA
--MA
FIL 1 RTN
LINE SYNC
14
--ACC
(S8--F1)
11
6J3
9
12
P3
3
10
--LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 )

+5V OUT (S5--F3)
12
NOTE 2 :
4
3
See NOTE 2
11
--PWR OFF
P1
10
( S1, 2--B3 )
1
ERROR DRAC
--KV DR1
--KV DR2
3 --PREP
9
GND
7
--CHRG
8
--FIL 1 ACK
--CHRG
( S5--A2)
HT--C CLK
HT--C DAT
--TUBE 2 SCL
P1
1
--PREP
( S3--A1)
HT CONTROL BOARD
3A1
--12V
P1
7
--PWR ON
( S1, 2--A4 )
P2
1

3A2
(S5--A2)
GND
6J3
13
--HT INTLK
54302010
C

GENERATOR
REV
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH

HT TRANSFORMER FOR ONLY ONE X--RAY TUBE
( S1, 2--A4 )
--12V
+12V
+5V
P2
1
2 +12V
3 +5V
4 GND
5 GND
6J3
PT CRL
--KV UP
--KV DWN
HT--C DAT
HT--C CLK
--EXP
C--HT DAT
C--HT CLK
--PREP
7
15
8
3
--FIL1 SCL
--START
--PRE CHRG
--CHRG DR
--KV UP
2 --KV DWN
6 --EXP
6
1
2
--TUBE 3
4 C--HT DAT
5 C--HT CLK
5
4
P4
3
RTR I
( S8--F1 )
8
4
BUCKY SPLY
BUCKY SPLY
AUX BUCKY SPLY
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
--BUCKY 2 MOTION
BUCKY 1 DR
BUCKY 2 DR
0 VAC
0 VAC
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN
GND
BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
GND
SUPPLY (BUCKY 1)
SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)
ERROR DRAC
--KV DR1
--KV DR2
3 --PREP
9
GND
7
--CHRG
8
--FIL 1 ACK
--CHRG
( S5--A2 )
HT--C CLK
HT--C DAT
--TUBE 2 SCL
P1
1
--PREP
( S4--A1 )
HT CONTROL BOARD
3A1
--12V
--FIL DR2
GND
RTR I
FIL I
See NOTE 2
1 --KV
2 +KV
3TS1
2
--FIL DR1
--BRAKE
--HS SCL
--RTR RDY
6 --MA
7
+MA
5
GND
46
--RTR RUN
--ACC
-- IGBT FAULT
-- AUTO OFF INH
HI MA
P1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
P3
6
1
2
4
See NOTE 2
--T2 SCL
( S8--F1 )

3A2
P1
7
--PWR ON
4
3
--TUBE 2 SCL
( S8--F1 )
+12V
--START
( S8--F1 )
4
2
1
ERROR DRAC
( S4--A2 )
--KV DR2
( S5--F3 )
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
GND
DISCHARGE 1
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
DISCHARGE 2
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
+12V
GND
GND
+24V
GND
GND
LINE SYNC
PT SPLY
IC SPLY 1
IC SPLY 2
IC GND
--ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION
ROOM LIGHT SW
8
BUCKY 1 DR
ROOM LIGHT SUP
7
BUCKY 2 DR
18
--TUBE 2 SCL
19
--BUCKY EXP
--FIL 1 SCL
17
115 VAC
FIL PREHEAT
14
0 VAC
FIL RTN
115 VAC SW
22
--FIL 1 ACK
FIL 1 RTN
See NOTE 1
FIL 2 RTN
P5
5
7
6
9
4
-- IGBT FAULT
( S5--D3 )
SOL DR
P5
6
8
5
16
+5V
+24V
+24V--PSU
DELAYED +24V
14
13
10
9
DISCHARGE 1
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
DISCHARGE 2
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
J1
K
A
0 VAC
6
13
DELAYED
+24V
14
+5V
1
8
P1
5
FIL PREHEAT
--FIL DR1
FIL RTN
6
--FIL DR2
FIL SUP
3
+5V
8
DELAYED +24V
7
FIL I
1
GND
P3
2
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
C
D
E
1
4
F
H
G
N
+SUPPLY
--SUPPLY
P2
4
1
+SUPPLY
FILAMENT
DRIVER
BOARD
--SUPPLY
3A3
V
J
NOTE 2 :
--ROOM LIGHT
( S5--B4 )
4
6
115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
0 VAC
3
15
115 VAC SW
NOTE 1.-- Only for one FL tube :

Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2
RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted on
the INTERFACE CONTROL board,
and 6J3--13 unconnected to J1--J of
the HT TRANSFORMER
16
20
--BRAKE
( S8--F1 )
--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version
CN 05/109
--ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and
--TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version
C
B
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation )
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
12/12/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
F. GARCIA
6J1
+24V
10
ERROR DRAC
( S4--D3 )
COM
( S5--E2 )
--HT INTLK
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SHEET / OF
4/8
DWG:
( S5--B4 )
--RTR RUN
--TUBE 1 RTR
--TUBE 2 RTR
--HS SCL
--RTR RDY
--SF PREP
--FL EXP
--SF PREP
7
12
--PREP
( S5--F3 )
--FL EXP
--PREP
11
GND
6J3
OPEN -- for Fl tube
GND -- for RAD tube
13
--HT INTLK
54302010
C
02/08/05
DATE
SEDECAL
ERROR DRAC
HT DR2
( S5--C4 )
SHLD
DATE
+ 24V
HT DR1
( S5--C4 )
SW1
30/09/02
GND
P3
NAME
ROOM LIGHT SUP
18
P4
6
ROOM LIGHT SW
47
mA
P1
F. GARCIA
IC GND
48
Black
DRAWING
PT SPLY
42
7
2
FIL SUP
SW2
GND
3TS1
39
test
] posts
SW COM
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
16
Red
FIL 2 RTN
--BUCKY EXP
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
11
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
P2
1
HT TRANSFORMER
9HT1
HI MA
GND
GND
+KV
--KV
+MA
--MA
FIL 1 RTN
LINE SYNC
14
--ACC
( S8--F1 )
11
6J3
9
12
P3
3
10
--LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 )

+5V OUT
( S5--F3 )
1
4
12
12
( S1, 2--B3 )
--LINE CONT
+5V OUT
--ON
P4
12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
9
BUCKY SPLY
5 AUX BUCKY SPLY
11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION
DELAYED +24V
PT CRL
P3
+24V
--CHRG DR
( S1, 2--E1 )
--KV DR1
2
1
3
1
10
--PWR OFF
--PWR ON
--PWR OFF
+5V
+24V
+24V
+24V
( S5--A2 )

GENERATOR
REV
A
3TS1
HT DR2
( S3,S4--B1 )
5C11
2 MF
5C10
2 MF
5C8
2 MF
J1 1 2 3
E2
C2E1
J2 1 2 3
DR1
DR2
GND
+5V
5A1
J1 1 2 3
J2--3
J2--20
2 3 4 1 5
J2 1 2 3
J2--5
to J2 connector of the
ATP CONSOLE board
--IGBT FAULT
( S3,S4--D2 )
DC +
remove 5L2 for Single Phase Generator
--THERM. 1
--THERM. 2
THERM. COM
J2--4
J2--17
to J2 connector of the
ATP CONSOLE board
J2--13
J2--24
J2--9
10/11J7--5
10/11J7--6
( S6,S7,S8--F1 )
10/11J7--7
--SFC
ABC OUT
( only required for DSI option)
FL DSI
CAM SYNC
--
To Three Phase Generator
5C3
3900 MF
5C4
3900 MF
5C1
3900 MF
5C2
3900 MF
DC -TB7
1
7A3
F14
T 10 Amp
3
4
24 VAC
0 VAC
To Lamp
(Collimator)
F15
T 10 Amp
+
R1
1K5
2w
C8,9,10,11
2200uF
35V
+24 VDC
5C1
3900 MF
5C2
3900 MF
5C3
3900 MF
NAME
DATE
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
C
B
A
D
REV
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
CN 03/46,55,58,60
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
DISCHARGE 1
( S3,S4--B4 )
--CHRG
( S3--F3 )
P1
2
1
P2
2
1
5A3
P2
2
1
CHARGE /
DISCHARGE
MONITOR #1
BOARD
P1
2
1
2
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
DISCHARGE 2
( S3,S4--B4 )
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
DISCHARGE 1
( S3,S4--B4 )
--CHRG
( S3,S4--F3 )
DC --
0 VDC
F. GARCIA
+24V
GND
5C4
3900 MF
To Locks
8
6
--
DRAWING
CHARGE /
DISCHARGE
MONITOR #2
BOARD
+
5A4
TS4
--
P1
2
1
--
DC +
FANS POWER SUPPLY
CHARGE /
DISCHARGE
MONITOR #1
BOARD
For Single Phase Generator
7
BR5
5A3
P2
2
1
TB7
LOCKS BOARD
--READY
20
DC +
COM
( S3,S4--B1 )
0 VAC TR
53
19
To Single Phase Generator
DC --
BUS -( S1, 2--A1 )
( S1, 2--D3 )
PT INPUT
--ALOE
J2--18
J2--8
For Three Phase Generator

5L2
200 uH
24 VAC TR
51
52
18
J2--11
J2--15
--KV DR1
--KV DR2
BUS +
( S1, 2--A2 )
--FL EXP
J2--16
J2--14
115 VAC SW
0 VAC
+5V OUT
GND
( S3,S4--D3 )
37
J2--19
4TS3
FAULT
2 3 4 1 5
36
--ROOM LIGHT
--SF PREP
( S3,S4--A1 )
SNR-CNI-VNC--GND
VNI--VCC
FNO--FAULT
SPR--+5 REG OUT

CPI--CONTROL
VPC--GND
VPI--VCC
FPO--FAULT
IPM DRIVER 1
J4
115 VAC
0 VAC
C1
E2
SNR-CNI-VNC--GND
VNI--VCC
FNO--FAULT
5A2
FAULT
DR1
DR2
GND
+5V
IPM DRIVER 2
2 3 4 1 5
J3
115 VAC
0 VAC
2 3 4 1 5
J4
DOOR RTN
24
( S3,S4--A1 )
5C9
40 MF for Single Phase Generator
10 MF for Three Phase Generator
5IGBT 1
--DOOR
23
( S3,S4--B3 )
HT DR1
( S3,S4--B1 )
5IGBT 2
SPR--+5 REG OUT

CPI--CONTROL
VPC--GND
VPI--VCC
FPO--FAULT
C1
C2E1
J3
5L1
5R2
1 Mohm, 2w
22
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
5/8
DWG:
54302010
C

GENERATOR
REV
CONTROL DRAC PCB

( A3243 -- 03 )
11A1
4
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
J4
1
ERROR DRAC
2
3
--RTR RDY
4
5
6
GND
7
8
9
10
11
12
+24 VDC 13
--SF PREP 14
15
--FL EXP 16
17
--HS SCL 18
19
--RTR RUN 20
21
22
23
--TUBE 2 RTR 24
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
6J1--8
6J1--5
6J1--11
6J1--10
6J1--6
6J1--7
6J1--4
6J1--1
6J1--3
GND
ERROR CODE
NC
RDY1
RDY1 OUT
+15 VDC
RDY1 RTN
NC
SPARE2
SPARE2 RTN
SPARE1
SPARE1 RTN
SF
SF RTN
FL
FL RTN
HS
HS RTN
ST
ST RTN
T3
T3 RTN
T2
T2 RTN
Ferrite
Core
J3
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
--15 VDC
VUNR
VUNR
PRECH IF
PRECH IF
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
T3 IF
T3 IF
T2 IF
T2 IF
T1 IF
T1 IF
P
1
COM
12
R2
10
3
8
1
SHL
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11K2
R1
R2
7
P
R1
V-V+
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector

+24V DELAYED
GND
240 VAC SW
( S5--B3 )
115 VAC SW
--THERM. 1
4TS3--1
THERM. COM
4TS3--3
0 VAC
F
1
2
COM T1
AUX T1
MAIN T1
11K2
3
12
R4
R4
11K3
R3
R3
MAIN T1
1 (9)
AUX T1
2 (10)
COM T1
3 (11)
--THERM. 1
4 (12)
THERM. COM
5 (13)
See Note FAN 1
6 (14)
0 VAC
7 (15)
GND
8 (16)
115 VAC SW
17
240 VAC SW
18
3
Note:
Connect FAN to 11TS2--17
or 11TS2--18 as required
+24 VDC
K1
Note
K3
11K3 A1
A2
A2
1
2
3
Note :
Connections to 11TS2 of
the Generator Cabinet
Ferrite
Core
from DC voltage Bus

( S5--D2 )
11K2 A1
J4
11J7
1
11TS2
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
--15 VDC
VUNR
VUNR
PRECH IF
PRECH IF
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
T3 IF
T3 IF
T2 IF
T2 IF
T1 IF
T1 IF
2
4
3
MAIN
TRANSFORMER
Ferrite
Core
Connections ( ) for
only one FL tube
11A2
J5
1
J2
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
11K3
VR1
V480LA20A
PRIN
Ferrite
Core
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB

( A3240--05 )
J1
CLAMPING
AUXILIARY
TRANSFORMER
Ribbon Cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
J1
AUX
J2
5
4
3
2
1
240 VAC SW
0 VAC
J3
1
2
to 11TS2
--DC OUT
+DC OUT
GND
+DC IN
--DC IN
1
+24 VDC
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER

FOR ONE X--RAY TUBE
3
4
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
2
5
to 11TS2
7
8
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
B
A
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02
REV
CN 02/197
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
6/8
DWG:
54302010
C

GENERATOR
REV
CONTROL DRAC PCB

( A3243 -- 03 )
11A1
4
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
J4
ERROR DRAC
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
6J1--8
--RTR RDY
6J1--5
GND
6J1--11
6J1--10
6J1--6
+24 VDC
--SF PREP
6J1--7
--FL EXP
--HS SCL
6J1--4
--RTR RUN
6J1--1
--TUBE 2 RTR
6J1--3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
ERROR CODE
NC
RDY1
RDY1 OUT
+15 VDC
RDY1 RTN
NC
SPARE2
SPARE2 RTN
SPARE1
SPARE1 RTN
SF
SF RTN
FL
FL RTN
HS
HS RTN
ST
ST RTN
T3
T3 RTN
T2
T2 RTN
Ferrite
Core
J3
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
--15 VDC
VUNR
VUNR
PRECH IF
PRECH IF
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
T3 IF
T3 IF
T2 IF
T2 IF
T1 IF
T1 IF
P
1
12
R2
10
COM
SHL
R1 R2
R1
V-V+
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector

+24V DELAYED
240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
GND
4TS3--1
( S5--B3 )
4TS3--2
4TS3--3
F
+24 VDC
11TS2
18
17
tube 2
54
R4
11K3
R3
R4
6
7
61
FAN 2
53
FAN 1
to 11TS2
to 11TS2
B
A
8
E
REV
TUBE 2 SCL
TUBE 1 SCL
TUBE SCL COMM
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02
DESCRIPTION
THERM. COM
FAN 1
0 VAC
GND
MAIN T2
AUX T2
10
COM T2
11
--THERM. 2
12
THERM. COM
13
FAN 2
14
0 VAC
15
GND
16
+24 VDC
11KT1 A1
11K2 A1
J4
11K3 A1
A2
A2
K1
A2
2
3
K3
J5
1
Note
R3
MAIN T2
MAIN T1
ISSUED BY
DATE
240 VAC SW
J3
1
0 VAC
Note
Ferrite
Core
for
external
interface
CN 05/109
3
4
11KT1
R3
R4
11KT1
COM T1
--THERM. 1
J2
5
4
3
2
1
DC+
DC--
to 11TS2
--DC OUT
+DC OUT
GND
+DC IN
--DC IN
11KT1
72
84
71
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER

FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES
83
tube 1
--THERM. 2
62
Note
COM T1
COM T2
11J7
0 VAC
AUX T2
AUX T1
from DC voltage Bus

( S5--D2 )
--THERM. 1
THERM. COM
R1
11A2
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
--15 VDC
VUNR
VUNR
PRECH IF
PRECH IF
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
T3 IF
T3 IF
T2 IF
T2 IF
T1 IF
T1 IF
11KT1
MAIN
TRANSFORMER
Ferrite
Core
1
2
AUX T1
2
4
3
J2
R2
11TS2
MAIN T1
11K2
12
7
P
11K3
VR1
V480LA20A
10
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
Note :
Connections to 11TS2 of
the Generator Cabinet
PRIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11K2
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB

( A3240--05 )
J1
Ferrite
Core
CLAMPING
AUXILIARY
TRANSFORMER
AUX
Ribbon Cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
J1
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
7/8
DWG:
54302010
C

GENERATOR
REV
NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and

10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO LOW SPEED STARTER
10C5--1
15uF
NOTE.-- Use tube 2

connections for Fl tube
47
2w
10T3
100 nF
1 KV
10LF2
10K1
2
T1
6
7
Tube 1
9
10
220V
KCT
K2--1
1
0V
TB2
T2
KCT
K2--3
Tube 2
TB2
330V
T2
F1
T 6A
3
10RC1
TB3
0 VAC RTR
15 16
6
7
T2
T2
Tube 2
Tube 1
CR6
KBU4J
KBR
K3--1
IMAIN
from HT CONTROL board
115 VAC SW
+24V DELAYED
GND
--START
--ACC
--T2 SCL
--BRAKE
RTRI
--TUBE 2 SCL
( S5--B3 )
0 VAC
4TS3--1
4TS3--2
4TS3--3
+
KCTRR
K5
LF--RAC BOARD
10A1
R1
L
4K75
CR1
R2
1N4007 KACC 4K75
K1
R3
4K75
TUBE 2 SCL
TUBE SCL COM
5
13
THERM. COM
TP2
Q2
2N4401
--THERM 1
12
--THERM 2
18
10
19
1
9
16
J1
+24V
C4
100uF
35V
TP1
GND
R7
1K5
KCTRR
K5--2
FAN 2
COM T1
COM T2
0 VAC
0 VAC
THERM. COMM.
THERM. COMM.
--THERM 1
--THERM 2
AUX T1
AUX T2
MAIN T1
MAIN T2
GND
GND
+24V DELAYED
GND
Q1
2N4401
3
KACC
K1--2
DS4
HLMP1700
CR3
1N4007 KBR
K3
+24V
R8
1K5
R4
6K19
DS3
HLMP1700
DS2
HLMP1700
J1
CR2
1N4007 KCT
K2
15
CR7
1N4007
C2
100nF
DS1
HLMP1700
GND
FAN 1
CR8
1N4007
CR9
VM48
+24V
10
R6
475
R5
4K75
TP3
RTRI
C1
22uF
11
12
13
14
8
--THERM. 1
--THERM. 2
THER. COM
CR5
1N4007
240 VAC SW
+24V DELAYED
11
T1/T2 COMM
20
CR12
1N4007
C3
100nF
KCTR
K4--3
115 VAC SW
12
17
CR11
1N4007
+24V
10J7
4
KCTR
K4--2
KCTRR
K5--3
CR4
1N4007
KCT
K2--2
T1
KCTR
K4--4
CR10
VM48
240 VAC SW
10 11
14
TB1
J1
TB4
Tube 1
10K1
10R5
475
2w
28
KCTR
K4--1
+24V
KCTRR
K5--1
Tube 2
KCTR
K4
27
KBR
K3--2
9
10
T1
IAUX
T1
TB4
T1/T2 COMM
(to 10TS2)
+24V DELAYED
24 25 26
21 22 23
TB3
60 VAC RTR
14
10TS2
0 VAC
KACC
K1--1
12 13
230 VAC RTR
( S1, 2--D2 )
11
10
TB1
TB1
15uF
10J8
30uF
TUBE 1 SCL
10R4--2
1 Mohm, 2w
NOTE.-- 10J7 and 10J8 are

aerial connectors
115 VAC SW
10R4--1
1 Mohm, 2w
240 VAC SW
for external interface

10C5--2
30uF
NAME
DATE
0 VAC
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
--THERM. 1
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
--THERM. 2
to 10TS2
C
B
A
THERM. COM
E
REV
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
CN 03/46,55,58,60
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF
8/8
DWG:
54302010
C

GENERATOR
REV
CONTROL DRAC BOARD
+15VDC
+15VDC
J1
J4
6
+15 VDC
RDY1 OUT
GND
22
24
+15V
TP3
R1
10K
C4
100nF
14
R2
1M
CR1
1N3595
C1
470uF
25V
OFF
DLY
GND
TP5
CR6
1N3595
CR5
1N3595
C3
3,3uF
2
3
ADD JUMPER
T3 RTN
T2 RTN
U1
ICM7556
C2
100nF
GENERATOR
CABINET
U1
ICM7556
PWR OFF
R4
10K
2
6
12
CR9
1N3595
K1
K2
OFF
MANT
OFF MANT
TP2
13
C5
3,3uF
R5
1K5
7--8
CR2
1N3595
PWR OFF
TP6
14
R8
1M
10
R3
1M5
Q1
2N4401
CR7
1N3595
CR8
1N4148
R9
150K
11
OFF COND
TP4
OFF COND
C7
1uF
CR3
1N3595
R7
30K1
R6
10K
DELAYED SWITCH--OFF BOARD

( A3274--01 )
+15VDC
CR4
1N3595
C8
10uF
J1
8
OFF DLY
TP1
K1
+15VDC
J2
4
21
23
R10
1K5
C9
100nF
C6
100nF
7--8
K2
CN 00/183
F. GARCIA
06/09/00
CN 99/003
F. GARCIA
13/01/99
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
05/05/98
REVISED
A. DIAZ
05/05/98
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL
INNERSCAN
1/1
DWG:
A3274--01
C
DELAYED SWITCH--OFF
REV
C5
100nF
C2
33pF
+12V
+5V
(*) Use jumpers only for A3000-34 and 35
C6
100nF
(*)
+5V
+5V
Q3
2N4401
C1
1uF
+5V
EA/VP
R77
4K99
C4
100uF
D1
1N4148
R6
825
R4
825
-DESEQ
16
P1.3
-KV SAFETY
P1.4
-mA SAFETY
P1.5
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
P1.6
P1.7
P3.0
P3.1
P3.2
P3.3
P3.4
P3.5
RP1
470
P1
U1
2501
-KV UP
K1
C1
16
-KV DWN
K2
C2
14
K3
C3
12
K4
C4
10
-PREP
C-HT DAT
3
4
7
RP2
470
1
-EXP
K2
C2
14
-CHRG
K3
C3
12
C4
10
DS3
EXP
R70
475
C57
100nF
+5V
R71
475
BATST 1
BATST 2
BATST 3
GND
-IGBT FAULT
1
2
3
A0
A1
A2
TEST
K1
C1
K2
C2
14
K3
C3
12
K4
C4
10
SCL
SDA
R22
K1
C1
16
K2
C2
14
K3
C3
12
K4
C4
10
-BATT FAULT
-AUTO OFF INH
L1
47uH
+5V
GND
GND
GND
C72
100nF
U8
74HCT574
VCC
28
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
R15
3K3
-HS SCL
-ACC
-BRAKE
-RTR RUN
9
7
6
5
RP8
22
1
3
5
7
11
1
R9
56K2
C7
3n3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
U9
ULN2803
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
CLK
OC
2
4
6
8
10
8
HI mA
-BAT TEST
RP5
22
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
1
3
5
7
P1
2
4
6
8
17
10
11
12
13
-TUBE3
HT-C CLK
HT-C DAT
-TUBE2 SCL
-FIL 1 SCL
2
4
6
8
14
15
16
-START
-PRE CHRG
-CHRG DR
RP6
22
1
3
5
7
R12
2.7
D23
+12V
1N4148
A
B
C
1
2
3
A8
A9
A10
G2A
G2B
G1
4
5
6
A13
R10
475
R13
1K5
R82
R14
1K5
D2
1N4148
C81
1uF
100K
Q2
2N4403
C11
100nF
D3
1N4148
+5V
RP12
10K
U13
74HCT541
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C20
100pF
U12
74HCT541
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
G2
G1
19
1
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
19
1
G2
G1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
RP9
10K
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SW2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
C27
100nF
-RD
FAULT
TP3
+12V
+12V
TP4
-12V
R65
1K
-12V
R45
1K
TP2
+5V
L3
R30
1K
47uH
+5V
NAME
TP1
GND
6-9
6
C13
100uF
475
+5V
P2
C10
2n2
U14
74HCT138
-L DAC
2
4
6
8
Vref
C8
510pF
-CS DAC
P5
1
3
5
7
(*)
Q1
IRLZ14
U16
2501
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
6
1
VREF
CAZ
Z8
BZX55C5V1
D6
1N4148
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
DATA BUS
16
475
+12V
CLK
OC
U15
2501
RP11
470
-12V
23
11
1
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
+5V
47uH
CLK
A11
A12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DS1
LED
RP10
470
L2
24
25
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
R11
2
4
6
8
18
19
20
9
+5V
A0
A1
C9
100nF
C58
100nF
RTR I
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
RP7
22
+5V
P5
-RTR RDY
R8
681
D7
1N4148
RP3
3K3
P3
ERROR DRAC
AIN3
100nF
P1
17
4
3
2
1
FIL I
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
C19
100nF
1
3
5
7
C18
1nF
DS2
PREP
P3.7
P3.6
P1.2
P1.1
P1.0
BYSL
RD
WR
CS
-12V
U3
24C16
R64
1K
R63
1K
C1
R7
1K21
+5V
K1
16
K4
30
21
18
20
19
-EXP
-FIL 1 ACK
ALE/P
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
AIN2
+5V
C-HT CLK
29
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
KVP
-WR DAC
U2
2501
A4
PSEN
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
P2.6
P2.7
AIN1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
U11
ULN2803
Z1
BZX55C8V2
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
GND
31
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
U10
74HCT574
mA
RESET
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U4
AD7582
AIN0 2
GND
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AGND
R3
100K
XTAL1
XTAL2
RP15
10K
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
DGND
18
19
R1
1K
U5
87C51
XT1
20MHz
VDD
C3
33pF
R5
1K
VSS
R2
6K81
Q4
2N4403
27
+12V
C12
100nF
Z3
1N4744
C17
100uF
C16
100nF
K1
2-13
Z2
1N4744
C15
100uF
C14
100nF
TP9
GND
TP10
GND
DATE
NC 05/061
F. Daz
01/04/05
DRAWING
F. Daz
26/05/05
NC 05/027
F. Daz
08/02/05
REVISED
A. Daz
26/05/05
I
H
NC 04/202
AC 01/04
F. Daz
02/12/04
F. Daz
NC 03/216
F. Daz
21/09/04
18/12/03
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
D
SHEET / OF
1/3
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
K
HT CONTROLLER
E
REV
HV TANK
JP3
JP4
JP5
R73
16K5
JP6
U3
24C16
+5V
VERTICAL
U5
80C32
Vcc
COMPACT
+5V
U8
74HCT574
40
Vcc
+5V
U10
74HCT574
20
Vcc
+5V
20
Vcc
1
JP6
R20
36K5
TP16
C31
100nF
GND
KVP
C21
100pF
KV -
C29
100nF
(3)
C30
100nF
20
GND
C32
100nF
10
GND
10
GND
KV +
R16
1K
P4
TP12
KV-
(3)
TP11
KV+
TP7
R18
100K
U18A
TL084
-KV
+KV
3
R17
1K
1
JP3
RTR I1
RTR I2
R19
100K
C24
1nF
10nF
Z4
U12
74HCT541
KVP
D16
1N4148
R66
10K
1V=16.6 KVP for A3000-36
C28
10nF
C22
1nF
10nF
C23
100pF
R21
36K5
+5V
1
C25
100nF
Vcc
10
GND
C36
100nF
+12V
C35
100nF
8
GND
+5V
A2
A3
U2
2501
1
A1
D15 -12V
1N4148
+5V
16
C34
100nF
U1/U15/U16
2501
1N4744 1N4744
D14
1N4148
U14
74HCT138
(3)
Z5
+12V
+5V
20
Vcc
10
GND
R72
16K5
U13
74HCT541
C33
100nF
JP5
C76
+5V
20
Vcc
KVP
JP4
C75
1V=33.3KVP
E7
15
E6
13
E5
11
E4
A4
-12V
A1
A2
A3
E7
15
E6
13
E5
11
E4
C37
100nF
R25
274K
BR1
VM48
-
AC2
C79 100pF
6 -
C26
100nF
5 +
R81
1K
R27
10K
JP1
34K
6
5
1
C38
4nF
D22
1N4148
TP6
(1)
R28
49K9
16
15
3
2
1
RTR I
2
C64
100nF
9
10
C66
100nF
5
6
8
6
4
2
C40
100nF
C77
10nF
R76
100K
Vref
+5V
R33
1K
D18
D4
1N4148
1N4148
Z9
R32
3K3
R78
1K
-KV SAFETY
5V1
D5
-EXP
D20
-12V
TP15
U17A
LM319J
4
5
12
1N4148
Q5
IRLZ14
-DESEQ
R79
FAULT
R31
100K
22
1
C68
100nF
R59
10K
R57
3K01
(1) The value of R28 is 86K6 for A3000-35

(2) (REV)1 - Remove D19 for three phase generators
(3) R16, R17 = 4K02, and R20, R21 = 69K8 for A3000-36
(7) Adjust R29 to have a period of 48 us at U19-5
for A3000-43
-12V
10
4K75
R56
10K
C65
100nF
R58
10K
RP13
1K
7
5
3
1
(2)
1N4148
U17B
LM319J
R55
1K65
R51
3K01
U7B
LF353
KV +
C69
100nF
E1
E2
REF
DC
DT
9
10
14
13
4
R50
10K
R52
10K
8
11
-KV DR 1
-KV DR 2
1
2
C1
C2
D19
1N4148
U18C
TL084
R54
-12V
C44
100nF
12
U19
TL594
P3
6
8
+5V
R53
10K
KV -
C67 +12V
100nF
11
+12V
U7A
LF353
+2
-2
FB
-1
+1
5
7
+12V
C63
100nF
C41
10nF
R75
49K9
RT
CT
C78
1nF
KV DEM
RTR
RP14-A
22
U20-B
ULN2803A
R23
R74
6K04
C39 +12V
100nF
(7)
12
+12V
D21
1N4148
14
5
R29
10K
R80
10K
C80 100pF
U18B
TL084
FREQUENCY
JP2
U20-A
ULN2803A
R24
4K99
AC1
V+
R26
1M
3
GND
NAME
DATE
NC 05/061
F. Daz
01/04/05
DRAWING
F. Daz
26/05/05
NC 05/027
F. Daz
08/02/05
REVISED
A. Daz
26/05/05
F. Daz
02/12/04
NC 04/202
AC 01/04
F. Daz
NC 03/216
F. Daz
21/09/04
18/12/03
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
D
SHEET / OF
2/3
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
K
HT CONTROLLER
E
REV
(4) R38, R39 = 226K, and R60, R62 = 25K5 for A3000-36
U24B
DG300
+12V
C73
100nF
+5V
R61
10K
(8) Remove Z6 and Z7 for A3000-44
R60
12K7
1V = 100mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)

11
13
R34
1K
(5)
13
+mA
12
(5)
(8)
C42
100nF
250V
C46
100nF
R37
100K
R39
113K
Z6
1N4757A
D17
1N4148
(5)
C74
100nF
R40
10K
mA
14
-12V
U18D
TL084
(8)
Z7
1N4757A
U24
DG300
C52
10nF
R67
10K
R35
1K
R38
113K
R36
100K
-mA
C43
100nF
250V
A3000-44
(4)
TP13
mA -
C48
10nF
P4
1V = 200mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)
TP14
mA +
1V = 20mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
TP5
mA
A15
4
14
1V = 10mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
(5) R36, R37 = 200K, and R40 = 2K21 for A3000-44
C45
100nF
R62
12K7
C47
10nF
U24A
DG300
(4)
R41
8K87
(4)
2
D9
-12V
1N4148
+12V
C50
1uF
C49
10nF
VIN
8
7
ID
BI
CAV
9
10
C53
100nF
+12V
-12V
+VS
14
VD
-VS
TP8
FIL
FIL I
-12V
RL
G
C51
100nF
C70
100nF
-12V
6
Vdd
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
A0
A1
Vss
7
2
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
VrefA
VrefB
-L DAC
LDAC
WR
CS
U6
AD7837
RfbB
VoutB
RfbA
VoutA
2
4
C59
10nF
AGDNA
AGNDB
5
8
6
5
V22
LM336AZ
16
15
3
1
2
KV DEM
R48
10K
+12V
7-8
RP14-B
22
3
1
18
P3
4
2
-FIL DR 1
-FIL DR 2
4
5
FREQUENCY
R47
49K9
C56
100nF
RT
CT
+2
-2
FB
+1
-1
U23
TL594
C1
C2
8
11
E1
E2
REF
DC
DT
9
10
14
13
4
RP4
1K
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
R68
10K
C62
100nF
C71
100nF
11
14
13
1
DGND
DATA BUS
R49
20K
3
10
12
9
C60
100nF
(6)
C55
100nF
1-14
U20-D
ULN2803A
R46
4K99
C54
100nF
K1
16
3
R44
10K
R43
1K54
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
A11
A12
U20-C
ULN2803A
GND
+12V
12
FIL I
U21
AD536
V+
R42
1K
GND
D8
1N4148
+12V
3
C61
100nF
-WR DAC
R69
205
-CS DAC
-mA SAFETY
(6) Adjust R49 to have a period of 150 us at U23-5

NAME
DATE
NC 05/061
F. Daz
01/04/05
DRAWING
F. Daz
26/05/05
NC 05/027
F. Daz
08/02/05
REVISED
A. Daz
26/05/05
I
H
NC 04/202
AC 01/04
F. Daz
02/12/04
F. Daz
NC 03/216
F. Daz
21/09/04
18/12/03
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
D
SHEET / OF
3/3
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
K
HT CONTROLLER
E
REV
NOTE 1: W1-A for version A3004-10/11/12, W1-B for version A3004-09

NOTE 1: W1-A para versin A3004-10/11/12, W1-B para versin A3004-09
NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms for A3004-09/10
R11= 1K4 ohms for A3004-11
R11= 1K ohms for A3004-12
R13
1 5W
NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms para A3004-09/10

R11= 1K4 ohms para A3004-11
R11= 1K ohms para A3004-12
D
R12
+15V
+24V
R6
3K74
R4
10K
8
D5
UF4006
R5
2K
D4
UF4006
10
12
U2
HCPL2232
TP8
10K
11
R17
1K
D8
HIN
U1
HO
R2
100
VB
VS
VCC
LO
COM
LIN
SD
10K
C7
C8
330uF/450V
C3
1uF
C6
470nF/630Vdc
C2
IR2113
P3
4
3
2
1
T1
D1
1N4148
FIL SUP
FIL PREHEAT
FIL RTN
Pulse. PE-67300. 1 : 300

4
1uF
U5
H11AA1
R18
Q2
SGP23N60UFD
330uF/450V
2
BZX55C18V
Green
D3
UF4006
R16
2
3
D7
100nF
R3
10K
R8
2K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C4
100nF
R19
33
C1
TP2
VSS
TP7
TP1
VDD
+5V
13
P1
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
-FIL DR1
-FIL DR2
FIL I
DELAY
+24V
D2
1N4148
+5V
+24V
R7
3K74
100K 3W
R1
100
Q1
SGP23N60UFD
R10
2K43
A
W1
NOTE 1
1V=0.31 Arms
D6
1N4007
TP4
+24V
R9
10
+15V
U3
11
C13
10uF/50V
10uF/50V
IN
OUT
GND
C12
100nF
TP5
C14
R15
10K
C15
100nF
TP6
10uF/50V
10
13
4
3
2
1
EC4A13
-SUPPLY
C5
U4
LM7805
1
R11
NOTE 2
+SUPPLY
P2
C9
1.5uF/250V-X2
R14
10K
+5V
TP3
L1
C11
10nF/250V-Y2
C10
10nF/250V-Y2
Ground stud
A
PCB 90068-03
NAME
DRAWING
REVISED
Cb1
NC 05/112
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. Daz
A. Daz
DATE
26/10/04
26/10/04
SEDECAL
ISSUED BY
SHEET / OF
1/1
A3004-09/10/11/12
Cb1
Ab1
b2
b1
Filament Driver HC
DATE
2
Bb1
REV
P6
GND
+11V PERM
-PWR ON
-PWR OFF
4
3
2
1
P3
DS1
P4
1
3
115 VAC
K1
13
6
3
D16
R15
15
4
DB104
-PWR OFF
-PWR ON
R14
1K5
C4
470uF
P1
K1
D
Q1
MTD3055
R12
10
D14
R11
3K3
C3
100nF
C2
10nF
K1
D11
13
(4)
13
K4
K5
(4)
-BUCKY 2 MOTION
10
-TUBE 2 SCL
-FIL 1 SCL
FIL PREHEAT
FIL RTN
18
19
17
14
K3
14
K5
13
K6
14
13
14
D13
K7
BUCKY 1 DR
BUCKY 2 DR
-BUCKY EXP
1
5
12
K7
C6
2.2nF 400V
1
K9
12
5
+24VDC
L1
500uH
4
8
16
FIL 2 RTN
15
FIL 1 RTN
22
-FIL 1 ACK
21
SPARE
20
SOL DR
12
L2
500uH
5
K4
K6
K7
14
D12
D17
1N4738
D18
DB104
C5
2.2uF
R17
499
R16
1K
U2
AQV210EH
2
11
14
13
D9
12
K3
L3
500uH
D10
K4
-BUCKY 1 MOTION
12
12
13
P4
K5
-BUCKY 1 DR CMD
-BUCKY 2 DR CMD
GND
12
+24VDC
+24 VDC
GND
C22
100nF
C23
470uF
R8
3K3
W1
AUX BUCKY SPLY
W2
11
8
ON
R7
15K
U1
ULN2803A
P4
BUCKY SPLY
+24 VDC
+24VDC
+24VDC
D3
14
OFF
R13
27
D15
115 VAC 5W
5
2
0 VAC
LINE SYNC
3
D4
T2
13
K9
D19
14
P5
2
DISCHARGE 2
13
DISCHARGE 1
12
+24 VDC
16
12
K8
P5
1
2
5
K8
10
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
14
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
SPARE
DELAYED +24 VDC
SPARE
+5 VDC
4
8
14
R9
GND
+24 VDC
+5 VDC OUT
+24 VDC
-LINE CONT
K8
D7
13
47
+24VDC
+24VDC
C1
100uF
1
D1
R3
3K3
D2
1N4733
R2
10K
16
D6
D5
BZX55C10V
R4
10K
U1
ULN2803A
U1
ULN2803A
2
R6
100K
5
K2
4
8
K2
13
U1
ULN2803A
R5
10K
14
D8
12
12
K2
VERSION
USED FOR
A3009-09
RAD + HV
COMPONENTS ON SHEET 2
REQUIRED
L1, L2, L3, K6

NOT REQUIRED
A3009-10
R&F
NOT REQUIRED
REQUIRED
A3009-11
ONLY RAD
NOT REQUIRED
NOT REQUIRED
A3009-12
A3009-15
R&F + HV
REQUIRED
REQUIRED
MAMO
NOT REQUIRED
NOT REQUIRED
17
R1
2M2
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. Daz
30/01/06
REVISED
A. Daz
30/01/06
SEDECAL
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
NOTES:
1.2.3.4.-
FILAMENT 1 IS SMALL FOR RAD AND LARGE FOR SF

HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ON AEC OR ABS UNITS ONLY
LI, L2, L3 AND K6 NOT USED ON RAD SYSTEM
K5 AND D11 NOT PRESENT IN A3009-15
1.2.3.4.-
FILAMENTO 1 ES FINO PARA RAD Y GRUESO PARA SF

1
LA FUENTE DE ALTA TENSION SOLO PARA UNIDADES CON AEC O ABS
L1, L2, L3 Y K6 NO SE USAN EN SISTEMAS RAD
K5 Y D11 NO SE MONTAN EN A3009-15
NOTAS:
SHEET / OF
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
1/2
Jb1
I b1
INTERFACE CONTROL
DATE
I b2
REV
+24VDC
R10
56
5w
U3
W7
T1
PE6189
In1
Out1
In2
Boot1
Out2
9
11
P1
+12 VDC
+12 VDC
PT CRL
R42
22
R41
C21
100uF
C15
100nF
R28
6K8
C14
2,2nF
1N4148
C20
100nF
R43
10K
R29
22K1
C16
100nF
R30
2M2
GND
CT
12
8
11
16
+2
E1
E2
9
10
15
-2
REF
14
FB
DC
13
+1
DT
-1
GND
R31
100K
2
C9
2.2 uF
2.2uF
63V
GND
R35
1M
1w
W6
8
A
C18
1KV
10nF
R34
1M
1w
RT
PT SPLY
1
+Vref
3
R24
10K
R26
10K
R19
10K
R32
47K5
W4
R22
10K
C19
10nF
1KV
R33
33K
1w
D21
FR107
R18
10K
A
GND
C8
10
R23
10K
-ON
C10
2.2 uF
P2
V+
C1
C2
R40
1K
Boot2
U5
TL594
D23
En
GND Sense
R39
10K
6K04
Vref
L6203
W8
B
Vs
D22
FR107
R25
10K
B
C13
100nF
R27
332
7
C17
100pF
A
2
R38
4M75
B
W5
R37
4M75
12
+Vref
C12
100nF
+24VDC
A
R21
10K
6
U4A
TLV2460
K10
K10
ROOM LIGHT SW
-ROOM LIGHT
13
W3
8 7
ROOM LIGHT SUP
R36
4M75
K10
D20
14
SD
R20
5K
3
4
C11
100nF
NOTE.- BE SURE THAT THE VALUE OF THE PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT IN P2-1
IS THE REQUIRED BEFORE CONECTING THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT ( P2-1)

+500 VDC OR +300 VDC : JUMPERS W3 TO W8 IN POS "A", AND ADJUSTING WITH R20
NOTA.- ASEGURESE DE QUE EL VALOR DE LA SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY EN P2-1
VARIABLE NEGATIVE OUTPUT : JUMPERS W3 TO W10 IN POS "B"

1
ES EL REQUERIDO ANTES DE HACER LA INTERCONEXION DEL SISTEMA

1
SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY (P2-1)

+500 VDC O +300 VDC : PUENTES W3 A W8 EN POS "A",Y AJUSTAR CON R20
SALIDA NEGATIVA VARIABLE : PUENTES W3 A W10 EN POS "B"
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. Daz
30/01/06
REVISED
A. Daz
30/01/06
SEDECAL
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
SHEET / OF
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
2/2
Jb1
I b1
INTERFACE CONTROL
DATE
I b2
REV
NOTE.- TWO TRANSFORMER FORMATS CAN BE USED, USA AND ROW.

NOTA.- LOS TRANSFORMADORES PUEDEN TENER DOS FORMATOS, USA Y ROW.
U2
HCPL4503
REG1
7815
2
VI
C1
470uF
CR3
1N4007
6
3
C3
470uF
8
R2
6K81
C7
100nF
C2
100nF
VO
COM
BR1
VM48
SEE NOTE
T1
J2
115 VAC
115 VAC RTN
U1
HCPL4503
J3/J5
2
SPR (+5V INPUT 1)
CP1 (-KV DR1)
VPC (GND 1)
VPI (+15V OUTPUT 1)
FPD (-FAULT 1)
-FAULT
BR2
VM48
REG2
7815
1
C6
470uF
VI
2
VO
CR4
1N4007
6
3
COM
C5
470uF
R3
6K81
C8
100nF
C4
100nF
IPM
DRIVER
1
U4
HCPL4503
U3
HCPL4503
8
J1
+5VDC
-DR1
2
-DR2
GND
+5VDC
-DR1
-DR2
GND
115 VAC
115 VAC RTN
1
C9
100nF
R5
332
J4/J6
2
SNR (+5V INPUT 2)
CN1 (-KV DR2)
VNC (GND 2)
VNI (+15V OUTPUT 2)
FND (-FAULT 2)
R6
332
J1
4
1
2
3
J2
IPM
DRIVER
2
1
2
1
3
-FAULT
4
NAME
NC 04/195
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. Daz
ISSUED BY
DATE
DRAWING
F. Daz
26/11/04
REVISED
A. Daz
26/11/04
SEDECAL
23/11/04
SHEET / OF
A3063-03
1/1
IPM DRIVER
DATE
REV
R2
100K 3W
R3
10K 15W
R4
10K 15W
R5
10K 15W
R1
39K 15W
R6
27K 4W
CR2
BZX85C56V
TO MAIN STORAGE
CAPACITORS
Q1
IRF840
DS1
CR3
BZX85C56V
CR1
1N4733A
U1
H11B1
1
R7
3M9
6
P1
CHRG
GND
P2
2
DISCHARGE RTN
DISCHARGE
CN 98/114
F.GARCIA
10/10/98
CN 98/057
F.GARCIA
29/04/98
CN 96/033
F.GARCIA
06/03/96
CN 95/080
F.GARCIA
10/05/95
REV
A
CN 95/74
DESCRIPTION
F.GARCIA
25/04/95
ISSUED BY
DATE
ENG
CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR
F. GARCIA
CHK
A. DIAZ
REV
CN99/80 (22/07/99)
3212-01
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
REV.
REV.
DATE
D
REV.
11/01/95
from J2-14
EXT SYNC
14
JP4
A
LINE SYNC
from J3-9
K4
CAM SYNC
ABC IN
TPx
1, 14
7, 8
13
K4
-DS PREP
RP16
470
5
U33C
74HCT32
-INTEN
+5V
U28
71084C
R9
10K
CR7
1N4148
4
6
C50
10uF
16V
RDY1 RDY
RDY2 CLK
11
3
7
13
15
1
AEN1
AEN2
F/C
X2
ASYN
CSYNPCLK
X1
5
8
R28
330
XT1
10MHz
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
+5V
12
C43
33pF
33
23
MN/MX
T
A15
A16
A17
A18
HLD
NMI
GND
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
39
38
37
36
31
17
1
C
OE
11
1
25
ALE
18
INTR
R18
10K
-INTA
24
DEN
26
DT/R
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
27
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
K1
C1
K2
C2
14
K3
C3
12
C4
10
11
CLK
RST
CLK 500
to U29-19
9
7
6
5
3
2
4
13
12
14
15
1
11
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A19
INTA
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
35
U38
74HC4040
10
CLK
11
RST
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
19
20
A1
22
RD
23
WR
21
CS
-IORD
9
7
6
5
3
2
4
13
12
14
15
1
-IOWR
A8
R21
100
18
15
9
11
14
16
C36
1nF
A0
CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
G0
G1
G2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
IR1
20
IR2
21
22
23
IR3
IR4
IR5
24
IR6
25
A9
A0
2
3
UART RQ
-IOWR
-INTA
OUT0
OUT1
OUT2
G
DIR
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
-IORD
INTR
DATA BUS
-INTEN
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Vcc
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
11
1
C
OE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
U31
74HCT573
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
11
1
C
OE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
TMR 1
to U29-24
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
20
27
22
CS
WR
OE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
12
CS
CAS1
13
27
A0
CAS2
15
WR
RD
EN
16
INTA
INT
17
A16
+5V
14
Vcc
GND
Vcc
U20
74HCT245
+5V
20
GND
U23
MK48T08
+5V
16
+5V
28
U28
71084C
+5V
18
Vcc
26
GND
11
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C41
100nF
8
Q4
MTD3055
U30
8088
Vcc
GND
+5V
40
GND
U31
74HCT573
Vcc
C46
100nF
20
+5V
20
24
C18
100nF
12
+5V
32
C26
100nF
16
U29
8259A
+5V
28
GND
GND
C45
100nF
14
U32
74HCT00
GND
+5V
C27
100nF
7
to U34-17 (sheet 1)
A17
A18
to U34-16 (sheet 1)
U33
74HCT32
Vcc
GND
ATP CONSOLE
+5V
14
C28
100nF
7
U34
74HCT573
+5V
20
Vcc
Vcc
C47
100nF
10
GND
U38
74HC4040
GND
+5V
16
C61
100nF
8
ENG
CHK
F. GARCIA
A. DIAZ
SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
A3024-XX
A15
to J12A-16, J12B-16 and U34-19
SEDECAL S.A.
D
14
PAGE 1 OF 4
U32D
74HCT00
GND
Vcc
C48
100nF
10
DWG
REV.
REV.
REV.
DATE
A
+5V
U24
27C256
Vcc
C44
100nF
9
G
S
+5V
E2
REV
R13
22
GND
Vcc
C25
100nF
14
GND
U21
8253
Vcc
C20
100nF
10
Vcc
C22
100nF
10
+5V
20
Vcc
C17
100nF
7
U22
74HCT573
D
CR6
1N4148
CAS0
U26
74HC4040
U24
27C512/27C1001/27C4001
12 A0
D0 13
11 A1
D1 14
10 A2
D2 15
9 A3
D3 17
8 A4
D4 18
7 A5
D5 19
6 A6
D6 20
5 A7
D7 21
27 A8
26 A9
23 A10
NC 30
25 A11
4 A12
PGM 31
28 A13
29 A14
3 A15
+5V
2 A16
24 OE
Vpp 1
22 CE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
12
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
13
-EXPT
IR7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
+5V
A1
SPK
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
U19
74HCT14
U23
MK48T08
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
10
13
17
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
26
GND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CONNECTED TO PIN 14
FOR A3024-50/90 VERSION
19
-EXPT
TMR 1
A0..........A7
U21
8253
A1
IR0
CLK 500
DATA BUS
13KHz
6.5KHz
A0
U19D
74HCT14
8
U29
8259A
18
U20
74HCT245
10
U22
74HCT573
500Hz
11
U19E
74HCT14
10
C55
100nF
-IOWR
-IORD
CLK
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
13
C60
100nF
9
6
U19F
74HCT14
12
-MWR
-MRD
U26
74HC4040
10
K4
U32C
74HCT00
U32B
74HCT00
16
16
13
INTR
1.665 MHz
IO/M
WR
RD
C42
33pF
U34
74HCT573
A15
A16
A17
A18
RESET
READY
CLK
U33D
74HCT32
28
29
32
17
+5V
21
22
19
R7
2K55
10
R14
10K
U30
8088
R6
10K
U27
2501
+5V
C51
1nF
R5
10K
C59
100nF
U33B
74HCT32
MASTER RESET
R34
1K
K5
FL-C CLK
U33A
74HCT32
U32A
74HCT00
1
AEC STOP
+5V
K5
+12V ISO
CR15
1N4148
HT-C CLK
+5V
from J4-9
7, 8
10/10/00
J15
2
3
4
1
V ON
K3
K2
1, 14
7, 8
1, 14
7, 8
+12V ISO
1, 14
13
4
K1
CR5
1N4148
CR4
1N4148
1
2
3
4
R4
330
13
13
K2
K3
CR3
1N4148
R3
330
JP1, JP2, AND JP3 ON

POSITION "A" FOR
NOVEL CONSOLE
A
B
JP1
COMM
V ON
JP2
PREP
V ON
J9
3
11
10
RD
A12
22
CS
POWER OFF
39-40
POWER ON
37-38
33-34
2
3
35-36
31-32
4
5
A0
21
CLK
3
38
39
1
2
5
6
7
8
+5V
1
U2E
MC14050B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
4
37
36
SL0
SL1
SL2
SL3
32
33
34
35
1
2
3
A
B
C
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
+5V
23
G1
G2A
G2B
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
OA0
OA1
OA2
OA3
OB0
OB1
OB2
OB3
RL0
RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
RL7
RESET
+12V UNREG
TP9
-COL0
-COL1
-COL2
-COL3
-COL4
-COL5
C3
100uF
C4
100nF
+12V ISO
TP10
R33
1K
REG2
C9
470uF
CR2
1N4733
+Vin
+Vout
-Vin
-Vout
27
26
25
24
31
30
29
28
REG1
78SR105
+Vin
C54
470uF
+12V
TP7
R32
1K
+12V ISO
TP11
GND UNREG
C56
470uF
-12V
TP8
R35
1K
+5V
R36
1K
+12V
C2
100nF
C57
2200uF
C1
10uF
C6
10uF
C5
100nF
TP6
PT CRL
C7
10uF
C8
100nF
J12A-J12B
PT CRL
A0
A1
DATA BUS
-12V
+Vout
TP1
GND
SL2
SL1
SL0
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
8
7
5
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
+5V
TP3
R31
1K
J11
A0
CLK
OFF
DC-DC CONVERTER
U17
74HCT138
6
4
5
BD
4
5
7
9
3
8
2
6
1
+12V UNREG
WR
-IOWR
-KV UP
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
U2B
MC14050B
4
13
U2F
MC14050B
14
to U37
(sheet 3)
IN1
IN2
U2A
MC14050B
2
U2C
MC14050B
6
OFF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
-IOWR
36
WR
-IORD
RD
A11
CS
A0
A1
A1
9
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
8
7
6
5
+12V ISO
+12V ISO
GND
GND
4
3
2
1
U1B
MC14072B
U11
8255A (82C55 )
PT INPUT
to J2-13 (page 3)
DB0.....DB7
to J16 (page 4)
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
4
3
2
1
40
39
38
37
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
+12V ISO
13
11
12
U1A
MC14072B
+5V
9
10
ON
SW1
IRQ
CN/ST
SHFT
ON
Q2
MTD3055
V ON
AEC
CONTROL
BOARD
J1
1
PT CRL
A0
A1
-IDWR
-KV UP
GND
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
15
AEC STOP
16
A15
17
18
20
-12V
+12V
+5V
19
-KV DWN
21
PT INPUT
22
ABC OUT
(A3012-01/02/05/06)
+5V
RP1
10K
1
2
3
4
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
-IORD
11-12
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
13-14
23-24
27-28
29-30
25-26
15-16
17-18
19-20
21-22
-COL0
-COL1
-COL2
-COL3
-COL4
-COL5
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-IOWR
V (ON)
COL 0
COL 1
COL 2
COL 3
COL 4
COL 5
ROW 0
ROW 1
ROW 2
ROW 3
ROW 4
ROW 5
ROW 6
ROW 7
RP15
10K
U25
8279
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
R29
1K
J1
C38
100nF
JP3
EXP
Q1
MTD3055
POWER ON
V ( ON )
-PWR OFF
-PWR ON
GND
-12V
+12V
+12V UNREG
+12V UNREG
GND UNREG
GND UNREG
C39
100nF
COMM
PREP
EXP
POWER OFF
5
6
R2
100
-AUTO OFF
to J2-21 (page 3)
COMM
CR1
1N4007
J14
7, 8
+12V ISO
V ON
TP2
R1
475
GND
K1
PREP
EXP
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
AEC STOP
A15
J10
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
7
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
+12V
JP5 POSITION:
+5V
A.- VD SELECTION
B.- IC4 SELECTION
C.- PT INPUT SELECTION
JP5
A B
-KV DWN
EN2
to J16-7 (page 4)
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
14
15
16
17
13
12
11
10
RESET
35
A0
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
ABC OUT
to JP19-A (page 3)
-CSE2PROM
SI
C/-D
SCK
6
8
9
5
RS
EN1
EN2
R/W
4
3
2
1
+5V
VD
GND
GND
J5
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4/VD
-FLD1
-FLD2
-FLD3
-STRT DR
GND
+5V
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
C / -D
to J16-8 (page 4)
Vcc
V ON
14
U2
MC14050B
Vcc
+5V
1
U11
+5V
8255A (82C55)
Vcc 26
U17
74HCT138
Vcc
+5V
U25
8279
16
Vcc
U18
X25320
+5V
40
+5V
C11
100nF
GND
C12
100nF
GND
C14
100nF
GND
C13
100nF
GND
C40
100nF
GND
20
CS
SI
SD
SCK
WP
HLD
GND
VCC
U19B
74HCT14
3
+5V
R8
1K
J6A
J6B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PAGE 2 OF 4
+5V
U1
MC14072B
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4/PT INPUT
-FLD1
-FLD2
-FLD3
-STRT DR
GND
VD
ENG
CHK
REV
F. GARCIA
A. DIAZ
SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
A3024-XX
C49
100nF
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
REV.
REV.
REV.
DATE
A
not supplied in
A3012-01/02/05
RIBBON CABLE
ATP CONSOLE
DS2
-12V
10/10/00
U5A
74HCT02
NOTE.- ALL DIODES 1N4148 UNLESS SPECIFIED

SET JP13 FOR DIGITAL MODE
C21
1.0
+5V
1A
1B
1CLR
1CX
1RX/CX
9
10
11
6
7
2A
2B
2CLR
2CX
2RX/CX
A2
A3
A4
DS1
+5V
CR18
R17
10K
R10
1K
1Q
1Q
2Q
2Q
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
E7
15
E6
13
E6
13
-IOWR
E5
11
E5
11
-IORD
RD
E4
E4
A13
CS
A0
RP2
470
-BUCK EXP
1
3
5
7
FL-C DAT
-THERMOSTAT 1
-DOOR
U3
2501
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
K1
K2
K3
K4
RP10
470
-COL
7
5
3
1
-COMP
-THERMOSTAT 2
JUMPER NORMAL
C1
C2
C3
C4
8
6
4
2
K4
K3
K2
K1
C4
C3
C2
C1
10
12
14
16
JP15
removed
set
JP16
removed
set
JP17
removed
set
-IDWR
JP18
removed
set
-IDRD
100nF
1
3
5
7
-PT SEL
-FL EXP
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
WR
RD
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
K1
K2
K3
K4
RP19
470
to J2-15
-SPARE IN2
1
3
5
7
-SPARE IN1
to J2-22
Vcc
+5V
U5
74HCT02
16
A1
A0
A0
Vcc
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
8
7
6
5
K1
K2
K3
K4
C1
C2
C3
C4
U6
8255A
14
Vcc
GND
U15
8255A
26
Vcc
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
14
15
16
17
13
12
11
10
Q8
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
11
12
13
14
18
17
16
15
-DS PREP
(PAGE 1, K4)
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I8
I7
I6
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q8
Q7
Q6
JP15
26
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
RP4
22
-HT INTLK
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
-AUTO OFF
(PAGE 2, R2)
ABC OUT
JP19
A
-DOOR
-COL
-LEFT
SW3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-COMP
B
-THERMOSTAT 2
U8
ULN2803
I4
I3
I2
I1
I5
I6
I7
I8
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
15
16
17
18
14
13
12
11
U36 2501
16
C1
14
C2
C3
C4
A1
K1
A2
K2
A3
K3
A4
K4
6
8
5
7
JP16
JP17
U35 2501
JP18
14
12
10
A1
C1 K1
A2
C2 K2
A3
C3 K3
A4
C4 K4
RP17
470
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
JP23
CR19
1N4148
-BUCK EXP
HT-C CLK
13
-HT INTLK
1
4
-EXP
-PREP
2
5
11
14
C-HT DAT
C-HT CLK
-BUCKY2 DR CMD
-BUCKY1 DR CMD
25
23
21
10
8
-ACT EXP
ALOE
-AUTO OFF
EXP OK
-ROOM LIGHT
22
-SPARE IN1
9
24
-READY
-ALOE
19
-DOOR
-COL
-COMP
11
ABC OUT/ -LEFT

-THERMOSTAT 2
-THERMOSTAT 1
3
5
1
7
4
6
2
8
12
-DIRECT SEL
-SF PREP
RP7
22
17
-FL EXP
16
-PT SEL/ -SFC
13
PT INPUT
14
EXT SYNC
15
-SPARE IN2
5
18
GND
GND
CR12
-SF PREP
CR13
-FL EXP
J4 (to J4 - FLUORO CPU)
FL-C CLK
CAM SYNC
+12V ISO
2
1
7
-CAM FL EXP
C-FL DAT
C-FL CLK
FL-C DAT
FL-C CLK
CAM SYNC
5
6
8
+12V ISO
GND
GND
PAGE 3 OF 4
ATP CONSOLE
ENG
CHK
REV
EXP STOP
EXT REF
F. GARCIA
A. DIAZ
SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
A3024-XX
SEDECAL S.A.
EXT SYNC
to J2-14
DWG
REV.
REV.
REV.
DATE
A
LINE SYNC
12
-THERMOSTAT 1
FL-C DAT
J20
2
1
-SFD SEL
-GEN OK
-SPARE IN2
HT-C DAT
2
1
EXT SYNC
-KV DWN
22
PT INPUT
RP18
470
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-KV UP
8
6
4
2
-PT SEL
-FS
-TOMO EXP
TOMO ON
-TOMO PREP
TIME 1
TIME 2
TIME 3
TIME 4
-PS (DSI) SEL
-CINE (DSA) SEL
-HCF SEL
SPARE IN
EXT REF
EXP STOP
GND
15
7
5
3
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
15
10
11
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
14
13
PT CRL
RP6
J13
35
20
CR20
1N4148
RESET
-LINE CONT
J2
-SPARE IN1
ABC OUT
to J12-22 (page 2)
10
-PREP
to J13-9
-PREP
16
22
HT-C CLK
RP11 22
18
17
16
15
14
11
12
13
+5V
JP14
RP3
-BUCK EXP
RP5
10K
10
+5V
2
4
6
8
RP13 22
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HT-C DAT
LINE SYNC
-DWR
to J16-5 (page 4)
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
C15
100nF
GND
U5D
74HCT02
I8
I7
I6
I5
I1
I2
I3
I4
MASTER RESET
12
IN1
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
-DRD
to J16-6 (page 4)
35
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
to RP15
(sheet 2)
IN2
16
14
12
10
C24
100nF
GND
15
RP14
10K
+5V
C23
100nF
25
24
23
22
18
19
20
21
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
10
2
13
+5V
16
14
12
10
U7
ULN2803
FS
to J16-19 (page 4)
+5V
U37
2501
+5V
C19
100nF
GND
C1
C2
C3
C4
PC1
RESET
CS
A1
SW2
1
2
3
4
U4
74HCT123
U14
2501
-SF PREP
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
36
10
1
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
U15
8255A
A14
+5V
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
10
11
12
13
17
16
14
- KV UP
+5V
12
C10
1nF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C52
1uF
U13
ULN2803
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC0
PT CRL
to J8-1 and J7-1 (page 4)

-ACT EXP
1
3
5
7
11
DATA BUS
removed
-HT INTLK
A0
1
2
3
4
RP9
10K
set
RP12
470
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
6
4
2
9
7
5
3
JP14
1K
A1
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
Q3
MTD3055
RP20 470
R19
2K74
16
14
12
10
MOBILE
37
38
39
40
U5C
74HCT02
R20
10K
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
R12
150K
+5V
U12
2501
8
6
4
2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
WR
- KV DWN
U6
8255A
12
5
A1
DATA BUS
U35/U36
2501
HT-C DAT
R40
10K
+5V
13
4
CR8
U5B
74HCT02
PREP
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
36
U3/U12/U14/U27/U37
2501
1 A1
E7 15
3
-EXPT
R41
2K7
CR16
4
1
2
3
14
15
to U21-10 (page 1)
GND
R11
330K
AEC STOP
J3
U4
74HCT123
to U29-18 (page 1)
CR9
GND
+5V
+5V
JP13
GND
CR17
10/10/00
VERSION
HYBRID
55
61
70
62
63
80
90
132
133
134
REV
H
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SERIAL COMMUNICATION REQUIRES THE

COMPONENTS SHOWN IN THIS BOX
R15
4K7
JP22
485
JP21
422
485
+5V
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
25
16
24
17
23
18
22
19
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
-IOWR
WR
-IORD
RD
A10
35
CS
A0
RS1
A1
RS2
A2
RS3
A3
RS4
31
10
32
XT2
3.6864MHz
33
B
A
Vcc
NC
R
REB
DE
D
GND
+5V
13
12
11
10
9
8
NC
A
B
Z
Y
NC
RS232/422
JP10
232
422
RS232/422
JP9
A
15
26
14
27
13
28
12
29
TXDA
TXDB
30
11
C31
10uF
16V
C33
10uF
16V
C32
10uF
16V
U9
MAX232
C30
10uF
16V
2
1
3
4
5
6
IP6
IP5
IP4
IP3
IP2
IP1
IP0
37
38
39
2
36
4
7
IRQ
21
D0
34
1
2
3
4
2
3
5
+5V
+5V
16
Vcc
C29
10uF
16V
+12V UNREG
JP12
9
14
TXD
12
13
RXD
10
2
6
5
CR24
1.5KE15CA
CR22
1.5KE15CA
CR23
1.5KE15CA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J16
RP8
10K
+5V
R38
10K
Q7
2N4401
R39
1K
-DRD
(PAGE 3, U6-15)
R37
1K
-DWR
(PAGE 3, U15-3)
EN2
(PAGE 2, J10-9)
+5V
J4
J3
+12V ISO
Q5
2N4403
R22
1K
C53
100uF
CR14
1N4148
ATP
CONSOLE
BOARD
J4
J10
R30
10K
FS
(PAGE 3, U15-2)
C58
1nF
+5V
R24
1K
CR10
BZX55C
6V2
C16
1uF
MASTER RESET
(PAGE 3, U6-35)
and
(PAGE 1, U30-21)
R27
6K81
DB0......DB7
(PAGE 2, J10)
DISPLAY
BOARD
R25
825
TP12
GND
1
2
FGND
GND
3
4
VDD
VEE
-WR
-RD
-CE
C/ -D
19
9
10
FS
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
20
RV
ATP CONSOLE
R26
681
-RESET
ENG
CHK
REV
F. GARCIA
A. DIAZ
SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
CN 04/158 (04/10/04)
A3024-XX
J11
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
REV.
REV.
REV.
DATE
A
PAGE 4 OF 4
Q6
2N4401
CR11
1N4148
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
R23
100K
J9
GND
CR21
1.5KE15CA
-12V
KEYBOARD
DTR
-ACT EXP
11
C/ -D
(PAGE 2, U11-11)
INTEGRATED
FLUORO CPU
BOARD
J7
4
1
8
7
SET JP12 FOR

FLUOROSCAN
15
GND
U19A
74HCT14
J2
RXD+ (RXD)
TXD+ (TXD)
GND
+5V
UART RQ
(PAGE 1, U29-25)
8
7
6
5
V+
C1+
C1C2+
C2V-
+5V
-ACT EXP
RXDTXD-
9
422
+5V
DP7
DP6
DP5
DP4
DP3
DP2
DP1
DP0
J8
4
1
8
7
7
40
R16
75
U10
MAX489
GND
C35
100nF
SW4
RXDA
RXDB
X1
X2
RS485
JP7
1
2
3
4
5
6
20
C37
33pF
C34
100nF
422
RS485
JP8
232
Vcc
U16
2681
GND
DATA BUS
-ACT EXP
(PAGE 3, J2-25)
+5V
+5V
RS232/422
JP11
232
422
A
B
NOTE.- SOME COMPONENTS COULD

NOT BE REQUIRED ACCORDING TO
THE VERSION USED
14
11
21
25
31
32
40
50
92
93
94
10/10/00
+5V
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U7
74HCT138
6
G1
G2B
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
+12V
RESET
17
VOUT
VREF
DGND
VSS
-IOWR
A15
16
Y2
13
A1
Y1
14
LDAC
16
Y0
15
CS
14
G2A
15
WR
U2
AD7590
D0
D1
D2
D3
3
4
5
6
A1
A2
A3
A4
U6
ULN2803
U4
74HCT574
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
11
CLK
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
OC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
J2
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
5
6
7
8
9
10
-FLD 1
-FLD 2
-FLD 3
-STRT DR
GND
VD
4
U3
7224
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
A0
AEC/ABC SW
J1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
GND
SCL 2
SCL 1
REFERENCE (as calibration number)
RP2
1K
J2
1
3
5
7
1
2
3
4
IC 1
IC 2
IC 3
PT INPUT
TP4
RAMP
U5
5108
2
4
6
8
4
5
6
C8
100nF
C9
100nF
C10
100nF
S1
S2
S3
12
11
10
9
S5
S6
S7
S8
A0
A1
16
VC
S4
A2
2
7
15
R16
1M
SCL 1
+12V
SCL 2
+5V
U2C
AD7590
12
U2A
AD7590
16
R6
1M
10
TP2
UP PT
R14
10K
FLUORO ABC
C24
100nF
C6
1nF
JP1
R11
10K
R5
10K
C11
1nF
U1
CA3140
2
B
CR1
1N4148
CR2
1N4148
JP2
B
R18
1K
CR3
IN3595
R17
1K
10
11
-KV DWN
7
5
3
1
-KV UP
+5V
+5V
+12V C14
100nF
7
U8B
LM339
U1
CA3140
C15
100nF
VERSION
JP1
JP2
JP4
A
3012-01
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
3012-02
FOR TV CAMERA
3012-05
4 ION CHAMBERS
NOTE.- JUMPER JP3 IN POSITION A FOR ION CHAMBERS

WITH HIGH SENSIBILITY (GAIN 2V / mR )
12
+12V
+5V
U2
AD7590
+V
17
C2
10uF
C4
10uF
C5
100nF
U3
7224
Vcc
+12V
18
U4
74HCT574
Vcc
+5V
U5
5108
+V
20
+12V C20
100nF
13
U7
74HCT138
Vcc
+12V C16
100nF
8
TP5
GND
GND
C3
10uF
GND
19
+12V
13
3
-12V
J1
-12V
-12V
RAD
BOARD
C17
100nF
-V
C18
100nF
1
GND
C19
100nF
GND
10
GND
18
FL
8
6
4
2
C1
100pF
14
+12V
J1
20
R12
10K
RP1
1K
+12V C22
1uF
+5V
R13
10K
14
+
1
+12V
PT CRL
3
R9
100K
U8C
LM339
U8D
LM339
INTEGRATION
TP1
DWN PT
TP3
ABC IN
R2
1K
+5V
14
C7
470nF
+12V
U2B
AD7590
13
R15
100
U2D
AD7590
INTEGRATION RESET
R1
604K
See Note
15
C13
100nF
JP3
R3
1K
11
R7
10K
R10
10K
AEC STOP
C12
100nF
R4
22K
D
15
U8A
LM339
U8B
LM339
R8
2K2
JP4
B
J1
-12V
C21
100nF
-V
16
AEC CONTROL
GND
ENG
CHK
REV
C23
100nF
3
-12V
+5V
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
A. DIAZ
CN 00/155 (07/07/00)
A3012-01/02
REV.
A3012-05
REV.
REV.
DATE
F. GARCIA
05/05/97
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
KODAK
Renewal Parts
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
OCT 1, 2005
New edition
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note
RP-1024R0

Renewal Parts
FRU CODES
FRU column identifies the Field Replaceable Units (FRU) with the codes:
1 = Replacement Part that should be in stock.
2 = No need to have it in stock, easy to get after order.
X-RAY GENERATOR SHF 535 / 635 / 835

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)
Refer to pages 6-5
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)
Refer to pages 6-6
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY INVERTER (MOD. 5)
Refer to pages 6-7
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)
Refer to pages 6-8
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12)
Refer to pages 6-9
HV TRANSFORMER
Refer to pages 6-9
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
Refer to pages 6-10
MISCELLANEOUS
Refer to pages 6-11
1
4
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks

1
PCB, HT Controller 12 bits
A3000--33
U5 EPROM for 50, 64, or 80 kW
SOFT--HT
It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
PCB, Interface Control Rad without HV.
A3009--11
For only Rad Generator
PCB, Filament Driver
A3004--05
Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
53418001
Rectifier Bridge FAGOR / 10 A
53404002
BR1, BR2, BR4
Filter Line
50208001
LF3
ON/OFF Relay K3 / 4PDT /110V
51401012
K3
54002007
C6, C7
Capacitor ELE 2400 Micro/50V
10
Fuse F2 (1.5 A, 250 V) SB
See Fuse Kit
11
Fuses F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250 V) SB
See Fuse Kit
12
Fuses F9 (0.4 A, 250 V) SB
See Fuse Kit
11
11
10
11
12
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)

13
PCB, Delayed Switch OFF
A3274--01
Only for High Speed Generator
14
PCB, ATP Console
A3024--21
Standard
15
PCB, AEC Control
A3012--05
Used for AEC
16
U24 EPROM
SOFT--ATP
13
15
16
14
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5)

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5)
A6362--56S
Remarks
Inverter 3 Ph, 380-480 VAC R&F, High kW
17
IGBT 300A/1200V for 3 Ph equipment
53416011S
Selected IGBT
18
Capacitor 10 Micro /1000DCV
54001011
C9
19
Capacitor ELE 3700 Micro /450V
54002011
C1, C2, C3, C4
20
Capacitor 2 Micro/1000 V
54008002
C8, C10, C11
21
PCB, IPM Driver
A3063--03
22
PCB, Charge/Disharge Monitor
A3212--01
23
PCB, Input Rectifier 3 Phase
A3255--01
24
Rectifier SKKD 40F10
53404019
CR1, CR2, CR3 Behind Input Rectifier
18
17
23
24
22
21
20
19
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks

25
Contactor 3 Phase / 24V / 50 A
51405007
K5, K6
26
Resistor 20 Ohms / 100 W / 10%
52707021
R1
27
Transformer T2
50509029
T2
28
Green Light Lamp 220 VAC
54203006
29
Input Filter for 3 Phase
A6371--01
30
Fuses F12, F13 (10 A, 250V) SB
See Fuse Kit
31
Input Line Fuses F3 ,F4, F5 (50 A, 600V)
See Fuse Kit
LF1
30
27
25
28
26
31
29
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) / HV TRANSFORMER

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12)

32
PCB, Locks
A3214--01
33
PCB, AEC Cabinet Adaptation -- 4 Ion Chambers
A3263--03
34
Fuses F14, F15 (10 A, 250V) SB
Used for 4 Ion Chambers

See Fuse Kit
HV TRANSFORMER
35
HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tube, 400 VAC
A6097--07
35
HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tubes, 480 VAC
A6097--08
33
32
34
35
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts

Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks

36
LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 400 VAC
A6378--26
For 1 or 2 Tubes
36
LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 480 VAC
A6378--27
For 1 or 2 Tubes
37
PCB, Control DRAC
A3243--04
38
PCB, Interface DRAC with Cable
A3240--05
39
Fuses F3, F4 (15 A) and F1, F2 (0.5 A)
40
PCB, Clamping (A3)
A3109--01
41
LV-DRAC Transformer 380 VAC
6456--11
Main and Auxiliary Transformer 380 VAC
41
LV-DRAC Transformer 480 VAC
6456--12
Main and Auxiliary Transformer 480 VAC
42
DC BUS Cable
A3237--02
43
Contactor 24 V / 15 A
51405004
K2, K3, KT1
44
U17 EPROM DRAC
53406157
45
Auxiliar Contactor
51405006
46
Fans Micro Boxer 24 VDC
53103001
See Fuse Kit
46
45
43
42
40
41
39
41
36
RP-1024R0
44
37
38
Renewal Parts
MISCELLANEOUS
LIST OF PARTS WITHOUT ILLUSTRATION
Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
F2 (1.5 A, 250V ) SB
53801012
On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F3, F4, F5 (50 A, 600VAC) SB
53801011
Input Line Fuses (Mod. 6)
F9 (0.4 A, 250V ) SB
53801015
On the Power Supply at the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250V) SB
53801003
On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F12, F13 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB
53801008
On Transformer T2 (Mod. 6)
F14, F15 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB
53801008
On Looks PCB (Mod. 12)
Fuses F3, F4 (15 A, 600 V) for LV-DRAC
53801018
On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)
Fuses F1, F2 (0.5 A, 250 V) for LV-DRAC
53801019
On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)
Interface AEC Cable
A3251--02
Ion Chamber Cable
A3252--03
Cable Generator -- Interface Box
A3352--01
Cable Interface Box -- PC
A3363--01
A3223--05
A6470--08
Pre-installation Manual
--
Service Manual
--
FUSE KIT
CABLES
HAND SWITCH
Hand Switch with Sub--D
For PC On/Off Box
COVER
Generator Cover
DOCUMENTATION
RP-1024R0
IMPORTANT NOTE
FOR X-RAY TUBE SEASONING
The seasoning procedure should be carried out to assure a correct operation of the
X-ray Tube when it is putting into operation for the first time (new X-ray Tubes). This
action establishes a favorable distribution of the electrical charges and electrostatic
stresses in the insulation system of the tube and the associated equipment.
Included in each X-ray Tube, the manufacturer gives the instructions to perform the
Tube seasoning. It is mandatory to follow these instructions, calibrating previously
the combinations of kV / mA stations required for carrying out the seasoning
procedure. (Refer to Calibration document for calibration of kV / mA combinations).
A correct seasoning will assure the most accurate calibration of the Generator
(Filament Current Numbers) and a subsequent trouble-free operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR AUTO-CALIBRATION

Auto-calibration procedure of Digital mA Loop Open (Filament Current Numbers)
is the recommended method to achieve the most accurate calibration. In any case,
Auto-Calibration is a help for the Manual Calibration procedure that can be
performed at any moment or when Auto-calibration procedure is not fully performed.
(Refer to Section 2.5 Digital mA Loop Open in the Calibration document).
During the Auto-calibration process, the Generator informs about different conditions
through messages or codes displayed on the Console. The table below is a resume of
these situations:
MESSAGE / CODE
TUBE OVERLOAD,
GENERATOR OVERLOAD,
ETC
CONFIRM / DISMISS
222
TUBE TOO HOT
111
AUTOCALIBRATION
FAILURE
777 or 888
AUTO CALIBRATION OK
999
SITUATION
The Generator can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination
(because anode overheated, space charge, generator power limit, etc...). In this
case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the following available
kV/mA combination for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the process it will try
to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated.
This message / code appears at the beginning of the Auto-calibration procedure to
confirm or leave the Auto-calibration procedure.
Exposures are inhibited momentarily because the Heat Units capacity that remain
is 40% or less
less. Wait until the X-ray
X ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units
capacity.
Auto-calibration procedure has been cancelled after ten attempts of calibration of
the same kV / mA combination. In this case, calibrate manually the kV / mA
combinations uncalibrated.
C d 777 appears iinstead
Code
t d code
d 888 when
h
A t
Auto-calibration
lib ti
procedure
d
is
i
cancelled due to space charge during calibration of 40 kV at any mA station for
Small Focal Spot.
Auto-calibration procedure has been successfully performed for the selected
Focal Spot.
Auto-calibration procedure is independent for each Focal Spot. If Auto-calibration

has been successful for one of the Focal Spots and aborted for the other Focal Spot,
it is only required to perform the Manual Calibration of the mA station uncalibrated
for the other Focal Spot. Enter in Manual Calibration mode, select each kV / mA
combination and identify the combinations that require to be manually calibrated
(these combinations keep the Filament Stand-by value as Filament Current
Number).

Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Publication

REASON FOR CHANGE

JUL 15, 2002

SEP 20, 2003

kW corrections for SHF-5xx model

FEB 17, 2004

SEP 15, 2005

Revision of environmental and electrical requirements

DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT

ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT

Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or

Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent

Line Powered Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line Powered Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Powered generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Powered Ggenerators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interconnection and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Install required material prior the delivery of the system components.

Complete room floor, ceiling and wall finish.

Install conduit, duct, and raceway.

Complete and proper Pre-Installation will avoid delays and

This page intentionally left blank.

Vertical Generator Cabinet

Compact Generator Cabinet

Compact Generator Cabinet

Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

LINE POWERED GENERATORS

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

with Handswitch support

w/o Handswitch support

with Handswitch support

w/o Handswitch support

STANDARD CONTROL CONSOLES

R&F Control Consoles

RAD Console Graphic Display

Touch Screen Console

Optional Pedestal for

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE AND PC UNIT

NORMAL METHOD OF MOUNTING

Floor freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to floor with

Desk freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to an optional pedestal.

MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FREE AREA FOR SERVICE ACCESS

(For only 1 Tube)

Wall and Floor Supports are options

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

Wall and Floor Supports are options

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES (TPC)

THESE CONSOLES CAN BE MOUNTED ON A TABLE SUPPORT, WALL SUPPORT OR PEDESTAL

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

Temperature range of --40oC to 70oC

Temperature range of --20oC to 40oC

Temperature range of 10oC to 40oC

Do not under size the Distribution Transformer (Line Powered

Size feeder and ground wires per this document.

Ensure and maintain input mains voltage to specification. Ensure that